We have also tried to make it easy to use. Our philosophy has been to add the features that will be most useful without sacrificing ease of use, accuracy or performance.

Please refer to one of the following topics for detailed information about features, requirements, installation and use of AccuTerm 7:

Usage Guidelines

Features of AccuTerm 7

Hardware and Software Requirements

Installing AccuTerm 7

Running AccuTerm

AccuTerm User Interface

Customizing the Menu and Toolbar

Macros

Scripting

Mouse Support

Reference

AccuTerm Object Reference

AccuTerm Programming

Wyse Programming

ADDS Programming

ANSI Programming

Pick PC Console Programming

ASCII Codes

Customizing the Installation Process

Welcome to AccuTerm 7 15

AccuTerm 7 includes many features designed specifically for the MultiValue user (Pick, D3, QM,

UniVerse, UniData, Reality, jBase, etc.) We hope you find these special features useful!

Import & Export MultiValue Data

MultiValue Server

Object Bridge

GUI Development Environment wED Editor

1.1.1 Usage Guidelines

Trial Version

When you first install AccuTerm on a new computer, it will run in "evaluation mode" for 30 days, or until you enter an activation code to activate the software. During the trial period, the program is completely functional. We encourage you to use the program in your own operating environment to determine if it will meet your expectations, prior to purchase. When the trial period expires, the program will cease running, except to allow the entry of an activation code. You are free to share your trial copy of

AccuTerm with others so that they may also evaluate the software.

Single User Version

By entering an

activation code

for a Single User License, you can activate your trial version at any time.

A Single User License allows you to install the program on one computer, or for use by one thin client user in a server environment. All program

features are enabled, and you can use the

documented interfaces to integrate AccuTerm into a custom solution. If you intend to distribute your custom solution,

the recipient must have a valid AccuTerm license.

Multi User Version

16 AccuTerm 7 Help

By entering an

activation code

for a Multi User License, you can activate your trial version at any time.

You can also increase the number of licensed users, or convert a Single User License to Multi User

License by entering an appropriate activation code. A Multi User License allows you to install the program on a limited number of computers, or for use by a limited number of thin client users in a server environment. The total number of users (individual computers or thin client users) must not exceed the license count specified on your invoice or product media. You can use the program's

About Box to view

the number of users you are allowed to install. Under the Multi User License, users refers to installed users, not concurrent users. All program

features

are enabled, and you can use the documented interfaces to integrate AccuTerm into a custom solution. If you intend to distribute your custom solution, the recipient must have a valid AccuTerm license for the appropriate number of users.

Bundled Version

Certain database vendors have a bundling agreement with Zumasys to include AccuTerm with their database license. When you enter an

activation code for a Bundled License, you can use AccuTerm on

any computers (or thin clients), as long as you use it to connect to the database it is bundled with.

AccuTerm will "nag" you if it is unable to identify the database you connect to as one that matches the bundled activation code.

Personal Version

The Personal version of AccuTerm is intended for educational use. It is similar to the Trial version, except that it does not expire after 30 days. The Personal version is designed to be used with personal databases. Both the database program and AccuTerm must be installed on the same computer. The

Personal version is only able to make connections to 'localhost' using telnet.

1.1.2 Features of AccuTerm 7

Multiple sessions using MDI (Multiple Document Interface). This means that you can run two or more terminal sessions at the same time without running two copies of AccuTerm. It works the same as other programs that allow you to work with more than one document at a time like word processors, spreadsheets, etc. so it's easy to work with. You don't have to learn a new way of working. Also, by using MDI instead of running multiple copies of AccuTerm, you use less system resources and memory.

You can still run multiple copies if you choose, we just think MDI works better.

User interface has modernized interface, including context menus accessed by clicking with the right mouse button. The new toolbar can be hidden completely and also features balloon help that shows you what the buttons mean. Toolbar, menu, session tabs and status bar can be customized by the user.

Full OLE Automation / ActiveX support allows integration with other Windows applications. AccuTerm

7 acts as both automation client and automation server. AccuTerm exposes its application and session objects, which allows other applications complete control of AccuTerm.

ActiveX component (OCX) terminal emulation & communications engine may be used in custom applications where accurate terminal emulation is required.

Secure Shell connections ensure privacy using public key encryption technology. SSH1 and SSH2 protocols are supported, and several ciphers are available.

SSL/Telnet connections ensure privacy using industry-standard SSL encryption for hosts that do not support Secure Shell.

FIPS-140 mode uses only FIPS compatible encryption algorithms in conjunction with FIPS certified

Microsoft Crypto API DLLs.

Welcome to AccuTerm 7 17

Accurate emulations. When you use AccuTerm everything will work just like the terminal being emulated. No strange problems with word processors or spreadsheets. No messed up screens. No hassles.

Modem connections use Windows built-in dialer, and unlimited phone directory entries.

Fast file transfer capabilities using industry standard protocols like Xmodem, Ymodem, Zmodem, and

Kermit. MultiValue File Transfer Wizard and utilities import and export MultiValue data in a variety of formats. And direct Host-to-Host file transfer, too!

Scripting language and macro recorder allows users to record macros or write scripts using Visual

Basic for Applications (VBA).

Enhanced scroll back window saves up to 10,000 lines for instant recall.

Extended screen support of up to 240 columns by 240 rows.

Automatic font scaling so that you can always see the full screen. This is a great feature that once you get used to it, you'll never want to go without.

Enhanced network support for Telnet and Secure Shell (SSH1 & SSH2) over TCP/IP. Supports IPV6 and Internationalized Domain Names.

GUI Development Environment helps you build user-friendly GUI front-ends for your MultiValue applications.

Image and sound support lets you to display images anywhere on the terminal screen. You can also play Wave, MP3 and MIDI sound files.

wED Windows based program / data editor includes BASIC syntax highlighting in an MDI environment.

Includes host file & item browser with an Explorer-like interface.

Tektronix graphics terminal emulation in both color and monochrome.

Visual Styles and full color mapping lets you choose any foreground and background color combination for any terminal visual attribute, and attach a border effect to the attribute. Application of

Visual Styles can give character-based applications an instant face-lift.

Unicode / UTF-8 supported in all emulations, the GUI Development Environment, the wED Editor and

Kermit and Zmodem file transfers.

Easy to use. We've followed the Windows Interface Application Design Guide more closely than many other terminal emulation programs. This makes AccuTerm easier to learn and use.

1.1.3 Hardware and Software Requirements

Memory:

Processor:

512MB

Pentium 4 or better

18 AccuTerm 7 Help

Windows:

Communications interface:

Mouse:

XP SP2, Vista, Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows 8.1, Server 2003, Server

2008, Server 2012

Any serial port, modem or network adaptor supported by Windows

Any mouse supported by Windows

1.1.4 Installing AccuTerm 7

AccuTerm 7 is available as either a downloadable install file or on CD. To install AccuTerm 7 from a CD, insert the CD and select "Install AccuTerm 7" from the auto-run menu. If there is no auto-run menu, you can install AccuTerm by browsing the CD with Windows Explorer and double-clicking the installation file in the 'atwin71' folder.

To install from a downloaded install file, either choose "Run" from the "Download Complete" box, or use

Windows Explorer to browse to folder where the install file was downloaded and double-click to start the installer. The installer will then guide you through the installation process, as outlined below in the following step-by-step instructions.

The Welcome screen is displayed. Click Next to begin the installation.

The Installation Type screen is displayed. Select the type of installation that you want then click the Next button.

Normal: installs AccuTerm 7 for all users of the computer. Program files are installed in the C:\Program Files\Atwin71 folder, and the registry is updated to establish file associations as well as component file registration. Administrator privileges are required for this type of installation. Note: when installing on a server running Terminal Services

or Citrix, you must use Control Panel "Install Application on Terminal Server" to install

AccuTerm 7.

Personal: installs AccuTerm 7 for the current user only. Program files are installed in the Atwin71 program folder and the current user's registry is updated to establish file associations as well as component file registration. If the Atwin71 folder is not in a protected directory (such as Program Files), Administrator privileges are not required for a personal installation.

Portable: installs AccuTerm 7 on a portable device such as a USB flash drive or removable hard drive. No file associations or component registrations are stored in the registry. The Portable installation allows you to take a copy of AccuTerm with you when you work on multiple machines and run it without further installation on any XP-SP2 or later version of Windows. Some of the Setup Wizard screens described below are not used for Portable installs.

The Setup Wizard screen is displayed. Click the Next button to continue.

The Software License screen is displayed. Review the license agreement, and if you agree to the terms, click the accept check box and click the Next button.

The Destination Folder screen is displayed. Choose the directory where you want to

Welcome to AccuTerm 7 19

install AccuTerm 7. The default destination is "C:\Program Files\Atwin71".

Two optional items can also be selected on this screen: if you would like to create a desktop shortcut for AccuTerm 7, click the Create shortcut check box. If you need to enter a custom feature code, click the Enable custom features check box (most users do not require this). Click the Next button to continue.

If you selected the Enable custom features check box on the previous screen, the

Custom Code screen is displayed. Enter any custom feature codes in the box on this screen, then click the Next button.

The Ready to Install screen is displayed. Click the Install button to proceed with the installation. You may need to provide Administrator credentials after clicking the Install button (Normal install).

The installation progress will be displayed during the install process. When the program has been installed click the Finish button to complete the installation.

After installing AccuTerm 7, you can launch it from the Start Menu or desktop icon. Use the

Connection Wizard

to create a new session and log in to your host system! If you selected a portable

installation and opted to create a launcher, you can launch AccuTerm by double-clicking the "Start

AccuTerm 7" batch file in the root of the portable drive.

If you are using a MultiValue host and you would like to take advantage of the special MultiValue features built into AccuTerm 7, you should install the

AccuTerm MultiValue Host Programs

. If you are unsure about installing the host programs, check with your system administrator.

See also:

Customizing the installation process

20 AccuTerm 7 Help

1.2 Running AccuTerm

AccuTerm 7 uses the Windows MDI (Multiple Document Interface) standard for handling more than one session. It works the same as other popular Windows applications like Microsoft Excel and Microsoft

Access, except that instead of opening workbooks or tables, you open terminal session files. Normally, terminal session files are saved with the .atcf extension.

To run AccuTerm 7, simply select AccuTerm 7 from the Start menu, or click the AccuTerm icon on the desktop. AccuTerm’s main window will be displayed.

AccuTerm 7

If you have a prior version of AccuTerm installed and this is the first time you have run AccuTerm 7, you will be given the opportunity to import all of your settings and preferences from the prior version into

AccuTerm 7. This is a one-time offer.

Upon startup, AccuTerm 7 displays a Welcome screen:

From this screen you can create a new session, open an existing session or open a recently used session. You can also opt-out of showing the Welcome screen in the future. Note: if you start AccuTerm

by double-click ing a session file or a shortcut to a session file, the Welcome screen is not displayed and the session file is opened automatically.

Creating a New Session

Create a new session by selecting the Create new session option from the Welcome screen, or by using File New from the main menu or by clicking the button on the toolbar. The

Connection

Wizard will open to guide you through the session creation process.

Welcome to AccuTerm 7 21

Shortcuts

After saving a session file (.atcf) or layout file (.atly) you can create a shortcut to the file so that

AccuTerm automatically opens that session or layout. To create a shortcut, use Windows Explorer to find the session or layout file (usually in the My Documents folder). Right-click on the desired file.

Select Copy from the popup menu. Position the mouse where you want to create the shortcut (desktop,

Start menu, etc.) Right-click and select Paste Shortcut from the popup menu. If you created the shortcut on the desktop, double-clicking the new shortcut icon will start AccuTerm and open the desired session or layout. If you created the shortcut in the Start menu, selecting the new menu item in the

Start menu will do the same.

1.2.1 Connection Wizard

The Connection Wizard helps you configure a new session by letting you choose the most common settings using a wizard-style dialog. If you do not want to use the Connection Wizard, a check-box is provided to bypass the wizard in the future.

At any time you can skip the rest of the wizard and open the

Settings dialog by clicking the Session

settings button.

Connection Options

Choose the connection type for your new session from the Connection Options page. Choices are

Telnet

Secure Shell , SSL/Telnet,

Serial Port or

Modem . After selecting the connection type, click the

Next> button.

1.2.1.1

Telnet Connection

After selecting Telnet as the connection type, enter the host name or IP address that you would like to connect to. Click the drop-down arrow to display a list of recently used hosts.

If you know the type of the host system, select it from the drop-down list. If you do not know the type, leave it set to "default".

If you know that your host's telnet server is using a non-standard TCP port number, enter the port number. The default port number for Telnet is 23. Note: some host types use a non-standard telnet port.

Choosing the correct host type is important for these hosts.

After entering the host details, click the Next> button to choose the

terminal type .

1.2.1.2

Secure Shell Connection

After selecting Secure Shell as the connection type, enter the host name or IP address that you would like to connect to. Click the drop-down arrow to display a list of recently used hosts.

If you know the type of the host system, select it from the drop-down list. If you do not know the type, leave it set to "default".

If you know that your host's SSH server is using a non-standard TCP port number, enter the port number. The default port number for SSH is 22. Note: some host types use a non-standard SSH port.

Choosing the correct host type is important for these hosts.

After entering the host details, click the Next> button to choose the

terminal type .

22 AccuTerm 7 Help

1.2.1.3

Serial Port Connection

After selecting Serial Port as the connection type, select the port number you are using to connect to the host computer from the drop-down list. Note: the port number in this screen is the serial, or COM

port, that is built into your PC, not the port number on the host computer.

Some computers do not have built-in serial ports. If this is the case, and you need to use a serial port to connect to your host, you may be able to use a USB Serial Port adapter. This is a cable with a USB connector on one end and a 9-pin serial connector on the other.

After selecting the serial port, click the Next> button to choose the

port settings

1.2.1.3.1 Serial Port Settings

After selecting the serial port number, select the port settings that match the serial port on the host computer you are connecting to. Generally these settings must be that same on both serial ports (the one on your PC and the one on the host computer).

Baud rate

Baud rate is the speed that the serial port communicates with the host computer. AccuTerm supports baud rates from 300 to 115,000 baud. If your PC is connected directly to the host machine, you will most likely use 9600 or 19200 baud. The speed that you use depends on the host computer. If you select the wrong baud rate, you screen may appear garbled or you may get no response from the host when you type on the keyboard.

Data bits

This refers to the number of bits the serial port sends to represent the actual character. The options are

7 or 8 bits (the default is 8 bits). This setting must match your host system.

Stop bits

This is the number of bits that the serial port uses to separate each character sent. The options are 1 or

2 stop bits (default is 1). This setting must match your host system.

Parity

Parity is an error checking mechanism performed by the serial port. The options are: None, Odd, Even,

Mark and Space. The most common is None (this is the default). This setting must match your host system.

H

andshake

AccuTerm supports three methods of handshaking. The first and most common is. Xon/Xoff (or software

handshak e). With this method, AccuTerm sends a special Xoff character (

DC3

) to the host system when it wants the host to stop sending characters. When the AccuTerm has caught up, it sends the Xon character (

DC1

The second handshake method supported by AccuTerm is DTR/DSR. This method is referred to as hardware handshake because it physically changes the voltages on the serial port to indicate whether the receiving computer is ready.

The third method, RTS/CTS, protocol works the same as DTR/DSR except it uses a different pair of signals (pins) on the serial port.

For DTR/DSR or RTS/CTS handshake to work, the cable which connects the PC and the host computer must connect the appropriate handshake signals at both ends. Physical cable wiring is beyond the scope of this reference.

Welcome to AccuTerm 7 23

After selecting the serial port settings, click the Next> button to choose the

terminal type .

1.2.1.4

Modem (dialup) Connection

After selecting Modem as the connection type, select the modem you would like to use from the dropdown list. All modems that are installed in your computer should be displayed in the list. Note: if the

modem you are look ing for is not in the list, then AccuTerm was unable to identify that modem.

Sometimes updating the modem driver will correct this.

After selecting the modem, click the Next> button to choose the

terminal type .

1.2.1.5

Terminal Type

In order for AccuTerm to work properly with terminal-based applications, the terminal type that AccuTerm is emulating must match the terminal type the host application is configured or designed to use. Select the terminal type (emulation or personality) from the drop-down list. If you select the wrong type, your screen will probably be scrambled, and you should try a different type.

After selecting the modem, click the Finish button to close the wizard.

See also:

Terminal types supported by AccuTerm 7

1.2.2 Reconnect

When you are connected to a host using Telnet or SSH, and the connection is terminated by the host

(for example logging out of a Unix host will terminate the connection), a disconnect notice is displayed on the terminal screen. The disconnect notice has three options: Reconnect, Close and Cancel. If you click the Reconnect button, AccuTerm will attempt to reconnect to the host. If you click Close,

AccuTerm will close the session. If you click Cancel, the reconnect notice is cleared (you can reconnect later by choosing Tools

Reset

Connection from the main menu or by clicking the

button on the toolbar.)

24 AccuTerm 7 Help

1.3 Product Activation

You can activate AccuTerm 7 immediately after installation by clicking the Enter Activation Code button on the final screen of the installer. You can also enter your activation code at any time by selecting Enter Activation Code from the Help menu.

To complete the product activation process you will need to enter some information about yourself or the company you work for. Most fields are optional, however you must enter either a user name or company name (Small Business and Enterprise licenses require company name and location).

As part of the activation process, the registration information on the Activation screen can automatically be sent to Zumasys securely over the Internet. Check the Send registration details... check box to enable this feature; un-check to disable. Although registering your product with Zumasys is optional, we

highly recommend doing so because it enables us to provide superior support if you should contact us about lost activation codes, upgrades or software problems.

If you are a local administrator for your computer, you can check the Activate all users... check box.

You may be prompted to enter your administrator password or respond affirmatively to the User Account

Control dialog.

Welcome to AccuTerm 7 25

1.4 AccuTerm User Interface

AccuTerm 7 uses the Windows MDI (Multiple Document Interface) standard for its user interface. It works the same as other popular Windows applications like Microsoft Excel and Microsoft Access, except that instead of opening workbooks or tables, you open terminal session files.

Title Bar

The title bar is a standard Windows element that contains the title of the application: AccuTerm 7. There is an application icon at the left side of the title bar, and standard Windows icons for minimize, maximize, restore and close at the right side.

Main Menu

The

main menu is displayed immediately below the main window title bar. It is used to control the

AccuTerm application. The main menu contains top-level menu items for File, Edit, View, Tools,

MultiValue, Window and Help. Clicking one of the main menu items displays a sub-menu with items relating to the top-level item.

Toolbar

The Toolbar is shown below the main menu. The Toolbar contains buttons that duplicate some of the menu items, a kind of shortcut for the menu item. If you let the mouse hover over a toolbar button, a small description of the button's action will be displayed. You can hide or show the Toolbar from the

View menu .

Session Tabs

Session tabs are displayed above the workspace window, with a tab corresponding to each open session. Click on a session's tab to activate it. The session icon is displayed at the left side of the session's tab. When the mouse is over a tab, the tab shows a small close (X) button which can be used to close the session.

Each session tab provides a context menu (right-click menu) which can be used to activate the session, maximize (or un-maximize) the session window, clone the session or close the session.

At the right edge of the tab bar, there is a drop-down arrow which will display a list of open sessions.

Click a session in the drop-down list to activate it.

You can hide or show the Session Tabs from the

View menu .

Workspace

The workspace is the area within the main window where you open terminal session windows. Multiple session windows can be displayed in the workspace. A session window may occupy the entire workspace area if it is maximized. Session windows can also be tiled or cascaded within the workspace. When no sessions are open, the workspace background color is shown in this window

(normally the background is dark gray).

Session Window

All session windows reside within the workspace window. If a session window is maximized, it occupies the entire workspace. The session title is appended to the main window title and shown in the main window title bar. If a session window is not maximized, it has its own title bar showing the session title

(the session file name is used as the title unless you specify a different title in

Window Settings .)

Status Bar

The Status Bar is displayed at the very bottom of the workspace window. The Status Bar indicates

26 AccuTerm 7 Help

various status information about the current (active) session, such as the keyboard state (locked or unlocked), the cursor position, screen size, terminal type, printer status, file capture status and connection status. You can hide or show the Status Bar from the

View menu .

1.4.1 Keyboard Commands

Next Session -

CTRL+TAB

If you have multiple session windows open, press

CTRL+TAB

to activate the next session. The sessions are sequenced in the order they were last active. You can press

TAB

multiple times while continuing to hold the

CTRL

key to scan the session windows until you find the one you want to activate.

Print Screen -

ALT+G

Prints the terminal screen on the currently selected printer.

Data Capture -

ALT+C

This is a shortcut to open up the Capture dialog box.

Toggle Slave Printer Mode -

ALT+P

Toggle slave printer mode on and off.

Previous Page -

CTRL+PGUP

Displays the previous terminal page. To use this command, the session must be setup with more than one video page. Note: this command changes pages in the terminal page memory, not the history

(scrollback ) buffer.

Next Page -

CTRL+PGDN

Displays the next terminal page. Note: this command changes pages in the terminal page memory, not

the history (scrollback ) buffer.

Pause / Resume -

SCROLL LOCK

This command pauses or resumes the processing of received data by the terminal. The keyboard

"Scroll Lock" LED indicates the current status.

Scanning the History Buffer (Scrollback)

Use

CTRL+SHIFT+PGUP

CTRL+SHIFT+PGDN

CTRL+SHIFT+UP

CTRL+SHIFT+DOWN

CTRL+SHIFT+HOME

, and

CTRL+SHIFT+END

to navigate the history (scrollback) buffer.

Besides using the keyboard to navigate the history buffer, you can also use the mouse wheel. Just scroll the mouse wheel up or down to scroll the history.

Note: in order to scan the history buffer, you must specify the number of history rows to remember in

Screen Settings .

Welcome to AccuTerm 7 27

1.5 AccuTerm Main Menu

As is common in most Windows applications, AccuTerm provides a menu and toolbar to control the program. The menu provides complete control, and the toolbar provides quick access to the most common functions. The menu functions are described in this topic, as well as the toolbar buttons.

File Menu

The AccuTerm File menu contains options for creating, opening, closing and saving sessions, and printer setup and control. Common menu options may also be performed by clicking a button on the toolbar.

File New

To create a new terminal session, select the New option or click the button on the toolbar. Normally, the

Connection Wizard

is shown to help you create and configure the new

session (there is a checkbox on the wizard startup page to disable this feature).

File Open...

To open an existing session configuration file, select the Open option or click the button on the toolbar. This creates a new session with the settings that were saved in the selected configuration file.

File Close

To close the active session, select the Close option. If you have made any changes to the session settings, you will have the opportunity to save them in a session configuration file before closing the session.

File

Save and File

Save As...

After adjusting session settings, save the new settings in a configuration file by selecting the S

ave or Save As option, or by clicking the button.

File

Save Layout and File

Save Layout As

If you have several sessions open, you can save them as a group, or layout, by selecting the

Save Layout or Save Layout As options.

File Printer On

Selecting this option toggles the slave printer on and off. When the slave printer is on, received data is printed on the selected printer and displayed on the terminal screen. You can also press

ALT

to toggle the slave printer state.

File Print Screen

Selecting this menu option or clicking the button option causes the current terminal screen to be printed on the selected printer. You can also press

ALT

to print the terminal screen.

File Print Setup...

Select this option to set up printer information. See

Printer Settings for details.

Recent Files

28 AccuTerm 7 Help

Opens one of the most recently opened terminal session configuration or layout files. Note: you

can configure the number of items to show in the recent file list in the

General Settings

File Exit

Select this option to terminate AccuTerm.

Edit Menu

The AccuTerm Edit menu contains commands to copy and paste from the Windows clipboard and select the screen.

Edit Copy

This command will copy a selected block of text from the terminal screen to the Windows clipboard. If there is no selection, the entire screen is copied. To select a block on the screen, position the mouse on the upper left corner of the desired block. Press and hold the left mouse button for about one-half second, then drag the mouse to the lower right corner, and release the button. The selected area will be enclosed by a dotted rectangle. To remove the selection, click the left mouse button anywhere on the screen. If the screen needs to be scrolled to select the desired data, move the mouse to the edge of the window (while holding the left button) and the window will automatically scroll in that direction.

You can also click the button to perform this function.

An option is provided to remove the selection rectangle after a Copy operation - see

Clipboard

Settings for details.

Edit Paste

This command will send the clipboard contents to the host computer. See

Clipboard Settings

for line-end and paste-end options. Clicking the function.

button on the toolbar will also perform this

Edit Paste From...

This command will send the contents of a text file to the host computer. A file selection dialog box will be opened when you select this command.

Edit Select Screen

This command will select the entire screen. You will see a dotted rectangle around the selection.

Edit Select All

This command will select the entire screen and all history. You will see a dotted rectangle around the selection.

Edit Select None

This command will remove the selection rectangle from the screen.

View Menu

The AccuTerm View menu contains options to select screen size, display or hide the toolbar and status bar and session bar.

View Extended Screen Size

Toggles the screen size between Normal (usually 80 by 24) and Extended (usually 132 by 24).

Welcome to AccuTerm 7 29

See

Screen Settings for information on setting the number of columns and rows. The screen

size may also be changed by clicking the button.

View Toolbar

Check this option if you want the toolbar displayed in AccuTerm’s main window. Un-check this option if you want to remove the toolbar.

View Status Bar

The status bar displays information about the current session: keyboard state, cursor position, screen size, terminal type, printer status, capture status, connection type and connection status. Check this option to display the status bar at the bottom of AccuTerm’s main window.

Un-check this option if you do not want the status bar displayed.

View Session Tabs

Session Tabs are used to quickly activate a desired session when multiple sessions are open.

Every session has a corresponding tab and clicking on the tab activates that session. Check this option if you want session tabs displayed at the top of AccuTerm’s main window. Un-check this option if you do not want session tabs displayed.

View Function Bar

The Function Bar is used to display a row of function key buttons at the bottom of the session window. These buttons perform the same action as the twelve function keys on the keyboard.

Un-check this option if you do not want the Function Bar displayed.

The first button in the Function Bar indicates the shift state of the buttons (Normal, Shift, Ctrl,

Shift+Ctrl). When this button is clicked a small popup menu is displayed which will allow you to lock the shift state for the buttons in the Function Bar. Normally, the Function Bar buttons track the actual state of the

SHIFT

and

CTRL

keys.

The default function key button captions are simply F1 ... F12, however, the captions may be customized in

Keyboard Programming . Options to select the bar position (top or bottom) and

display the key number in the corner of each button are available in

General Settings .

Tools Menu

The Tools menu contains options for modifying AccuTerm’s settings, dialing a number, initiating file transfers and data capture, recording a macro and opening the script window. Each of these options opens a dialog box where the desired function is performed. See the appropriate topic for details on each function.

Tools Dialer...

Select the Dialer option to enter or choose a phone number to dial when using a dial-up modem connection. Also choose this option to disconnect a dial-up modem connection. Note: this

option will be disabled unless the connection type is "Modem". You can quickly call up the

Dialer dialog by clicking the button on the toolbar.

Tools Reset Terminal

Resets the terminal (clears screen, restores default character set and emulation, etc.) You can quickly reset the terminal by clicking the button on the toolbar.

30 AccuTerm 7 Help

Tools Reset Connection

Resets the connection. If the session has been disconnected, this command will attempt to reconnect. You can quickly reset the connection by clicking the

Tools Settings...

button on the toolbar.

Select this option or click the button to open the Settings dialog box. This dialog is used to modify all of AccuTerm’s settings and preferences, such as communications device, terminal type, screen colors, etc.

Tools Customize Menu...

Select this option to open the

AccuTerm Menu Designer , which is used to customize the menu,

toolbar and status bar.

Tools Upload...

Selecting this option displays the

File Upload dialog. The File Upload dialog is used to initiate a

manual file upload and allows you to select files to upload as well the protocol to use and other options. Note: to upload data to a MultiValue host which has the AccuTerm MultiValue host

programs installed, select Import Data from the

MultiValue menu

instead.

Tools Download...

Selecting this option displays the

File Download dialog. The File Download dialog is used to

initiate a manual file download and allows you to select the target directory as well as the protocol to use and other options. Note: to download data from a MultiValue host which has the

AccuTerm MultiValue host programs installed, select Export Data from the

MultiValue menu

instead.

Tools Capture...

Selecting this option displays the

Begin Capture

End Capture dialog box. Use the Begin

Capture dialog to select the destination file and specify other options. Use the End Capture dialog to terminate the capture operation. You can quickly call up the Capture dialog by clicking the button on the toolbar.

Tools Macro Record New Macro

Select this menu item to begin recording a new macro. All menu and toolbar actions, including changing settings and preferences, are recorded in the macro. Also, keystrokes sent to the host and responses from the host are recorded in the macro. When a macro is being recorded, a small control window is shown in the lower-right corner of the screen. Use the control window to end, pause or resume macro recording.

Tools Macro Run Macro

This menu item opens a sub-menu which contains a list of recorded macros. Select the macro you want to run from this sub-menu. Note: a shortcut k ey can be assigned to a recorded macro

to simplify running the macro.

Tools Macro Edit Macros...

This option opens the AccuTerm Script window with the Macro tab selected. Use this window to examine or modify the VBA code for your recorded macros.

Tools Script Editor...

Welcome to AccuTerm 7 31

This option opens the AccuTerm Script window with the Main script tab selected. Use this window to create, modify, run and debug VBA scripts.

MultiValue Menu

This menu contains all of the functions which are specifically designed for users of MultiValue host systems.

MultiValue Export Data...

Select this option or click the button on the toolbar to launch the AccuTerm File Transfer

Wizard to guide you through the process of exporting data from your MultiValue database. This option requires the AccuTerm MultiValue Host Programs be installed on your MultiValue host.

MultiValue Import Data...

Select this option or click the button on the toolbar to launch the AccuTerm File Transfer

Wizard to guide you through the process of importing data to your MultiValue database. This option requires the AccuTerm MultiValue host programs be installed on your MultiValue host.

Tools wED Editor...

AccuTerm 7 includes a Windows based text and program editor designed specifically for

MultiValue users. If you are connected to a MultiValue host, you can access the wED editor by selecting this menu option or clicking the button on the toolbar. Note: the wED editor is

also invok ed by using the WED command from TCL.

Tools GUI Designer...

AccuTerm 7 includes a development tool to help programmers create GUI Applications for

MultiValue systems. If you are connected to a MultiValue host, you can access the GUI

Designer by selecting this menu option or clicking the button on the toolbar.

Tools Host Programs Install

Select this option to start the MultiValue Host Program Installer. The installer simplifies the installation of the AccuTerm host programs by determining the MultiValue platform and uploading the correct installation files to the host.

Tools Host Programs Update

Select this option to update the MultiValue Host Programs to the version supplied with your

AccuTerm installation and to install optional libraries, samples and demo programs.

Tools Host Programs Account Setup

Select this option to enable accounts on the MultiValue host to use the AccuTerm Host

Programs. This is required if you would like to access the file transfer functions, the wED Editor,

GUI Designer or GUI runtime library from accounts other than the ACCUTERM account.

Tools Host Programs Configuration

Select this option to adjust MultiValue Host Program options.

Tools MultiValue Options...

Select this menu item to display the AccuTerm MultiValue TCL Rules dialog box. Several of

AccuTerm's MultiValue tools (File Transfer Wizard, wED Editor and GUI Designer) require a

32 AccuTerm 7 Help

special MultiValue server utility to function. The server utility is typically initiated from "TCL", and settings in this dialog define how AccuTerm gains access to TCL and starts the server program.

Window Menu

The Window menu contains options for re-arranging the open sessions within the main window, and for switching from one session to another.

Window Cascade

This option arranges all open session windows so that they overlap. The session title of all sessions remains visible.

Window

Tile Horizontally and Window

Tile Vertically

These options arrange all open session windows so that no windows overlap.

Window Maximize

This option toggles the Maximized state of the active session window.

Windows

The open sessions are shown at the end of the Window menu. You can switch to any session by clicking on its entry in this menu.

Help Menu

The Help menu contains functions to display online help, documentation and program information. It also provides a function to enter your product activation code. You can get context-sensitive help at any time by clicking the button.

Help Contents

This menu item will open the online help to the Contents tab, where you can browse the topics to locate the information you need.

Help Index

This menu item will open the online help to the Index tab, where you can search help topics by keyword to locate the information you need.

Help Enter Activation Code

Select this menu item to open the Product Activation dialog to enter your activation code.

Help Documentation

This menu item will open the User Manual, GUI Manual, Scripting Language Reference (VBA)

Manual, Release Notes, or the Software License Agreement.

Help About AccuTerm

This menu item will open the About AccuTerm dialog which displays the product copyright notice, serial number, release, license summary, and registration information. A link is provided to check for product updates.

See also:

Keyboard Commands

Welcome to AccuTerm 7 33

1.6 Configuring AccuTerm

To modify AccuTerm’s settings, use Tools Settings... from the main menu or click the on the toolbar.

button

AccuTerm's settings are organized into categories which are shown in a nested tree structure, with similar categories as branches from a common parent category. The tree is displayed on the left pane of the Settings window. When you select a category from the tree by clicking on it, the settings for that category are displayed in the right pane.

When you have completed your changes, simply press

ENTER

(or click the OK or Apply button) to save changes, or press

ESC

(or click the Cancel button) to discard changes and close the Settings dialog box.

Category:

1.6.1 General Settings

The General Options are applicable to the overall operation of AccuTerm and are not associated with any particular session. Some of these settings allow you to re-activate features that have been previously disabled, like showing the Welcome screen.

Single instance of AccuTerm

34 AccuTerm 7 Help

activated. When this option is not checked, a new instance of the AccuTerm program will be started.

Show welcome page at startup

Check this option to show the Welcome screen when AccuTerm first starts up.

Show large buttons in toolbar

Check this option to use large buttons in the toolbar. If the option is not checked, small buttons are used.

Function key bar: at top of screen

Check this option to show the function key bar at the top of the session window. If this option is not checked, the bar will be displayed at the bottom of the window. Note: you must check the Function

Bar item in the View menu to show the function k ey bar.

Function key bar: show key numbers

Check this option to show tiny key numbers in the corner of each button in the function key bar.

Use connection wizard when creating new sessions

Check this option to open the Connection Wizard when you create a new session. If this option is unchecked, use the Settings dialog to configure the new session.

Warn before disconnecting

If this option is checked, then when you attempt to close a session which is currently connected to the host (Dial-up, Telnet and Secure Shell connections), you will receive a warning that the session is still connected. You can then choose to cancel, leaving the session open, or continue closing the session.

When this option is not checked you will not receive this warning.

Close AccuTerm when all sessions closed

If this option is checked, when the last session is closed, the AccuTerm program will automatically close.

Remember Caps Lock and Scroll Lock state when activating

When this option is checked, AccuTerm remembers and restores the state of the

CAPS LOCK

and

SCROLL

LOCK

keys when the program is activated. Each session maintains its own independent state for these keys. Note: this option is often unreliable - we are investigating a resolution for this.

Reset menu & toolbar to factory settings

This function applies to either the user's personal custom menu or the AccuTerm master menu.

Resetting the master menu required administrator privileges and you will need to start AccuTerm using

"run as administrator". You might need to reset the menu if your custom menu file becomes corrupted or is in a non-functional state.

1.6.2 File & Folder Settings

Default folder for session files

This field specifies which folder to start in when opening or saving a session file. Once you have opened or saved a session file, open or save will start with the last folder used. The default folder for session files is the current user's My Documents folder.

Phone book for dialup connections

This field contains the file name containing the auto-dialer phone book. The phone book file is a tab delimited ASCII file, with one line per entry. Each entry contains two fields: name and phone number.

Welcome to AccuTerm 7 35

The default phone book file is "Phone.dat" and is stored in the user's profile under the AppData folder.

You can click the Browse... button to browse for this file.

Default upload/download folder

This field contains the default folder for uploading and downloading files. You can click the Browse... button to browse for a folder.

Default capture folder

This field contains the default folder for storing captured data files. You can click the Browse... button to browse for a folder.

Recent file list size

Select the number of recent files displayed in the File menu. The default is 4 files.

Single instance of AccuTerm

If this option is checked, only one instance of the AccuTerm program is allowed to be running. If you try to start AccuTerm from the Start menu when AccuTerm is already running, the running program will be activated. When this option is not checked, a new instance of the AccuTerm program will be started; that is you will have two or more AccuTerm tasks active.

Explore application data folder

Click this button to open a Windows Explorer window at the top of the AccuTerm application data folder.

This folder is the user's profile under the AppData folder. This is the folder where the phone book file,

Secure Shell keys and personal custom menus are stored.

1.6.3 Connection Settings

Connection Method

The Connection Method group of option buttons is used to select a connection type. Once a connection type has been selected, other configuration options will become available. For example, if

Serial Port is chosen, various options for a serial port, such as port number, baud rate, etc. will be displayed. The specific settings for each connection type will be described later in related topics.

Echo (duplex)

There are three echo options: remote echo (full duplex), local echo (half duplex) and loopback (local mode). Typical terminal sessions operate in full duplex. In this mode, all characters typed on the keyboard are sent to the host computer. They are not printed on the screen. The host echoes the character back to the terminal where it is displayed on the screen. Usually, when control characters (

ENTER

BACKSPACE

DELETE

, etc.) or function keys are sent to the host, the echo is suppressed and the application responds in an appropriate manner. In half duplex mode, characters typed on the keyboard are simultaneously sent to the host computer and displayed on the screen. In loopback mode, characters are displayed directly on the screen and are not sent to the host computer. This mode is usually used only for testing keyboard or display functions.

Clear high bit of received data

Most communications devices use eight bits to represent each character. When using eight bits, the computer can send up to 256 different character codes. Some terminal types have no way of handling characters above 127 (hex 7F). In this case, you can check this box and the high bit of each byte will be automatically stripped from all received characters. If you need to use any international characters or special symbols from the PC character set, you should not use this option (the Wyse 60 and VT emulations have commands to access these characters when using only 7 bits).

36 AccuTerm 7 Help

Enable device licensing (U2 / QM / D3)

If this option is set, multiple connections (sessions) to compatible versions of UniData, UniVerse, QM

and D3 consume only a single user license. When the Append LF option is checked, the response sent to the host by AccuTerm is terminated by a line-feed character. Contact your U2, QM or D3 dealer for more information regarding device licensing. Note: Windows versions of U2 implement

device licensing using a proprietary Telnet server. This precludes using SSH with device licensing on these platforms.

Display connection warnings

Check this option to display non-fatal connection errors, such as UART overrun errors when using a serial port connection.

Close session on disconnect

When this option is checked, if a connection is closed by the host computer the AccuTerm session will automatically close. This option may be used in conjunction with the Close AccuTerm after last

session is closed option (

General Options

See also:

Telnet Settings

Secure Shell Settings

Serial Port Settings

Modem Settings

1.6.3.1

Device Settings:Telnet

AccuTerm supports Telnet connections to host machines over a TCP/IP network. Any Telnet server

(host) on the network, including hosts on the Internet, can be accessed.

Host name or IP address

Enter the host name or IP address in this field. If the desired host name has been used previously when configuring a Telnet session, you may select it from the drop-down list by clicking the drop-down arrow in this field.

Host type

If your host is listed in the Host Type list, select it, otherwise just use the Default host type. By selecting a host type from this list, certain advanced options are configured to be compatible with the specified host type. For some host types, the port number and host terminal type are also adjusted.

Port

If the Port field is left blank, or set to "Default" AccuTerm will use TCP port 23 (the default port for

Telnet). If a different port is used for Telnet connections to your host, enter that port number in this field.

Certain host systems, such as Raining Data D3, allow a host process number (PIB) to be mapped to a specific TCP port number. You can use the Port setting to specify the port number mapped to your process number. Consult with your system administrator for this setting.

Connect timeout

When establishing a connection to a host computer, AccuTerm will wait up to the specified number of seconds before giving up. If this field is left blank, or zero, the default timeout is 15 seconds.

Note: this timeout only affects the time AccuTerm waits for a response from the host when opening a connection to the host.

Welcome to AccuTerm 7 37

Advanced Options

Check the Show advanced options check-box to display the advanced Telnet options.

Binary

Normally, Telnet operates in "text mode", with special rules for handling

and

characters. When the Binary option is selected, Telnet sends

and

characters without any alteration. Some hosts do

not function correctly in binary mode.

Keepalive

Although the Telnet protocol specification does not provide for "keepalives", AccuTerm can send periodic commands that should be ignored by most Telnet servers. Using keepalives may prevent the host (or router) from detecting that the connection is idle and forcing a disconnect. To use keepalives, select either DMARK or NOP as the command to send as a keepalive. Enter the desired interval in the every...

sec field.

Break key

Normally, AccuTerm sends the Telnet "interrupt process" command when you press the

CTRL+BREAK

key. If your host requires a different BREAK command, or to use a control character instead of a command, select the desired option from this drop-down list. If you select "control character", enter the decimal value of the control character to send in the code field (for

CTRL+C

, the decimal value is 3).

Skip initial option negotiation

When a Telnet connection is first established the AccuTerm and the host negotiate various operating modes. When this option is selected, the initial option negotiation is suppressed. This is necessary for some Telnet servers which do not respond correctly to Telnet options (Advanced Pick and D3 turnkey or nailed Telnet).

Disable outbound coalescing

Normally, TCP delays outbound messages for a short time so that multiple small messages may be combined into a single network packet. This prevents many small packets from clogging up the network.

When this option is selected, messages are sent as soon as possible. This may improve throughput

(especially when running GUI programs or performing file transfers), at the expense of increased network traffic.

Allow internationalized domain names

Select this option to enable Internationalized Domain Names (IDN) for the host name. IDN relies upon a standardized mechanism known as "Punycode" for encoding Unicode domain names using only the

ASCII characters that are permitted by the global DNS system.

1.6.3.2

Device Settings: SSH

AccuTerm supports Secure Shell (SSH) connections to host machines over a TCP/IP network connection. Any SSH server on the network, including hosts on the Internet, can be accessed.

AccuTerm implements both version 1 and version 2 of the Secure Shell protocol. Protocol selection is usually automatic and uses version 2 if it is supported by the host. Otherwise, it automatically falls back to version 1.

AccuTerm Secure Shell requires Windows 128 bit encryption. You can check your encryption capabilities by opening Internet Explorer and selecting "About Internet Explorer" from the Help menu. If the Cipher Strength is less than 128 bits you will need to either upgrade to Internet Explorer 6 (or above), or install the High Encryption Pack for your version of Internet Explorer. Search Microsoft's site for "High

Encryption" for more information.

38 AccuTerm 7 Help

Host name or IP address

Host type

Port

If the Port field is left blank, or set to "Default" AccuTerm will use TCP port 22 (the default port for SSH).

If a different port is used for SSH on your host, enter that port number in this field.

Connect Timeout

When establishing a connection to a host computer, AccuTerm will wait up to the specified number of seconds before giving up. If this field is left blank, or zero, the default timeout is 15 seconds.

SSH version

Select the version of the SSH protocol that will be used by the connection. When you select "auto",

AccuTerm will automatically select the highest version supported by the host. If you select SSH1 or

SSH2, AccuTerm will only connect using the selected protocol. If the host does not support the selected protocol, the connection will fail and an error message will be displayed.

Authentication

Select the authentication method which will be use to validate the user with the host. AccuTerm supports "password", "interactive" and "public key" authentication. It is important to select an authentication method that is compatible with the SSH server running on your host.

Private key

If "public key" authentication has been selected, click the Select... button to open the

Key Management

dialog. Use the

Key Management dialog to create new keys, load existing keys and import keys created

on another system.

Host validation

When an SSH connection is established, the host sends its public key (DSA or RSA) to AccuTerm.

AccuTerm supports various host key validation levels:

None: the host key is ignored (this means that you trust that the host you connect to is the desired host).

Trust on first use: if the key has not been established (first time you connect to a particular host),

AccuTerm assumes you are connected to the desired host and its key is saved in your session configuration. The key is verified on subsequent connections. If verification fails, the connection is aborted.

Confirm change: a dialog is displayed if a change in the host key for a particular session is detected. Confirmation is required to complete the connection. If the host is confirmed, the new key is saved in the session configuration. Otherwise, the connection is aborted.

Verify host key fingerprint: verifies that the fingerprint in the Host Key Fingerprint field matches the key supplied by the host. If verification fails, the connection is aborted.

Host key fingerprint

This is the host key fingerprint used for verifying the host key. The fingerprint is the MD5 or SHA1 hash of the host RSA or DSA public key, in hexadecimal form. If your host is running OpenSSH, you can use

Welcome to AccuTerm 7 39

the ssh-keygen command to display the host's public key fingerprint. The command line syntax is: sshkeygen -lf /etc/ssh/ssh_host_rsa_key.pub

(change "rsa" to "dsa" to display the DSA key fingerprint instead). The ssh-keygen command displays the MD5 hash of the host key in hexadecimal, with the key length shown before the hash. Only the hash (not the key length) should be entered into the

Host key fingerprint field. Note: when running AccuTerm in FIPS-140 mode, you must use the SHA1

hash because the MD5 hash algorithm is not supported in FIPS-140 mode.

Advanced Options

Check the Show advanced options check-box to display the advanced Telnet options.

Preferred cipher

If you wish to select the cipher used to encrypt the SSH session, you can select it from this list. If

"auto" is selected, the default cipher is used. Otherwise, you can choose Triple DES, Blowfish, 128 bit

AES or 256 bit AES. The default cipher for SSH1 is Triple DES. The default cipher for SSH2 is 128 bit

AES in CTR mode (aes128-ctr).

Only use preferred cipher

When this option is set, the cipher selected above must be supported by the host. If the preferred cipher is not supported by the host, the connection will be terminated and an error message displayed. When this option is not set, if the preferred cipher is not supported by the host, a different, mutually supported, cipher (normally, Triple DES) will be used.

Break key

Normally, AccuTerm sends

CTRL+C

when you press the

CTRL+BREAK

key. Alternatively, you can opt to send the BREAK command or INT signal when the

CTRL+BREAK

key is pressed. In order to use the

BREAK command, the SSH server on your host must implement the Session Channel Break Extension spec (RFC 4335). In order to use the INT signal, the SSH server must implement signals, and must respond to the INT signal by interrupting or breaking the process. Not all SSH servers implement these features. To use a control character instead of a command or signal, select "control character" from this drop-down list and enter the decimal value of the control character to send in the code field.

Send keepalives

When the Send keepalives option is selected, AccuTerm sends a dummy message to the host periodically. This may prevent the host (or router) from detecting that the connection is idle and forcing a disconnect. Enter the desired interval in the every...sec field.

Disable outbound coalescing (advanced option)

Normally, TCP delays outbound messages for a short time so that multiple small messages may be combined into a single network packet. This prevents many small packets from clogging up the network.

When this option is selected, messages are sent as soon as possible. This may improve throughput

(especially when running GUI programs or performing file transfers), at the expense of increased network traffic.

Allow internationalized domain names

Select this option to enable Internationalized Domain Names (IDN) for the host name. IDN relies upon a standardized mechanism known as "Punycode" for encoding Unicode domain names using only the

ASCII characters that are permitted by the global DNS system.

1.6.3.2.1 Key Management

Use the Key Management dialog to create public/private keys for SSH, or to load or import private keys. AccuTerm supports RSA public keys for both SSH 1 and 2, and DSA public keys for SSH 2.

40 AccuTerm 7 Help

AccuTerm can import SSH 2 private keys that were created by OpenSSH or putty (puttygen). AccuTerm can save public/private key files in either OpenSSH ( www.openssh.org

) or putty format (OpenSSH format is not available when AccuTerm is running in "

FIPS mode ").

Creating a new key

Click the Create New Key button to create a new public/private key pair. After clicking the Create New

Key button, select the key type (RSA or DSA), and key length. The default length of 1024 bits is recommended. Enter a descriptive comment describing the key being created, and enter a password to

protect your private k ey. Although the password is optional, it is highly recommended since anyone who gains access to your private key file can impersonate your identity! The Save Key button will remain disabled until the password has been confirmed.

Click the Save Key File button to create the new key and save the newly created key file. By default,

AccuTerm will save the key in its standard key folder, located in the user's profile. You can select a different location, such as a removable USB drive, if desired.

Once your public/private key pair has been created, you need to place the public key on the server which you want to connect to. Use the Export Key or Copy Key to Clipboard functions to retrieve your public key so that it can be installed on the server.

Exporting the key

You can save the public key to a file by clicking the Export Key button and selecting the Public Key option. Click the Export button to save the public key file. Browse to the folder where you want to store the public key file and click the Save button. Once saved, you could attach the key to an email message and send it to the server's administrator (it is a public key, so security is not a major issue).

You could also save the public key file to a removable drive or diskette and deliver it to the server administrator.

The same process can be used to export the private key file. Note: exporting the private k ey may pose a

security risk . If an unauthorized user obtains your private k ey he can impersonate you and gain access to the host system using your identity! Use caution when mak ing a copy of your private k ey.

Copying the key to the clipboard

Click the Copy Key to Clipboard button to copy either the public key (recommended) or private key

(not recommended) to the clipboard. The process is the same as described under Exporting the key except that you do not need to supply a destination file.

Loading an existing key

If your private key was saved to a different folder or to a removable drive or diskette, you can click the

Load Existing Key button to load that key. Enter the password and click the Verify button to check the password. If the password is correct, the key fingerprint will be displayed. Click OK to use this key (in its current location). Otherwise, you can save the key in a different location by clicking the Save Key button.

Importing a key

Importing a key is exactly like loading an existing key, except for the file locations. AccuTerm can import private keys created by OpenSSH.

Key fingerprint

When you create a new key, or load or import an existing key, AccuTerm displays the "fingerprint" of the public key. You can use this fingerprint to ensure that your key is correct. Use a utility on the server to show the fingerprint of the public key and compare to the fingerprint shown in AccuTerm.

Welcome to AccuTerm 7 41

OpenSSH example

If the host is using OpenSSH as the SSH server, and if you currently have access to the server via password authentication, you can set up public key authentication using the following steps:

1. Open an AccuTerm session and connect to the server. Log in using your password.

2. Open the AccuTerm Settings dialog to create your new key pair. Select "public key" as the authentication method.

3. Click the Select Key button to open the Key Management dialog.

4. Click the Create New Key button and follow the steps above for creating a new key.

5. Click the Copy Key to Clipboard button and choose the Public Key option. Click the Copy button.

6. Click OK two times to dismiss the dialogs. Ignore the warning about changes not being effective.

7. From a Unix/Linux prompt, change to your

~/.ssh

directory. Edit the authorized_keys2

file using your favorite text editor. Start a new line in the authorized_keys2

file.

8. From the AccuTerm Edit menu, choose Paste to paste the public key into the

authorized_keys2 file.

9. Save the modified authorized_keys2

file.

10. Save the modified AccuTerm session file. Close AccuTerm. Open AccuTerm and open the session file you just modified.

11. Enter your user ID.

12. If you entered a password when you created your new key, you will prompted to enter the password.

Enter the password (case sensitive).

13. If the server accepts your key, you will be logged in.

1.6.3.3

Device Settings: SSL/Telnet

AccuTerm 7 supports SSL/Telnet connections to host machines over a TCP/IP network connection.

This connection method is used primarily for hosts running on Windows which do not normally support

Secure Shell. This connection method establishes a secure connection using industry-standard SSL/

TLS, then initiates a telnet session within the secure connection (tunnel). UniVerse and UniData platforms running under Windows have built-in support for this connection method. Other platforms may use an SSL proxy such as stunnel to support this connection method.

Many of the SSL/Telnet settings are shared with the normal

Telnet settings . Please refer to the Telnet

settings for details. Only the settings specific to SSL/Telnet are described in this topic.

Host name or IP address

Enter the host name or IP address in this field. If the desired host name has been used previously when configuring an SSL/Telnet session, you may select it from the drop-down list by clicking the drop-down arrow in this field. Note: depending on how you configure Server Validation, the value in this field may

need to match the Common Name attribute of the host's certificate.

Host type

Port

If the Port field is left blank, or set to "Default" AccuTerm will use TCP port 992 (the default port for SSL/

Telnet). If a different port is used for SSL/Telnet connections to your host, enter that port number in this field.

42 AccuTerm 7 Help

Connect timeout

When establishing a connection to a host computer, AccuTerm will wait up to the specified number of seconds before giving up. If this field is left blank, or zero, the default timeout is 15 seconds.

Note: this timeout only affects the time AccuTerm waits for a response from the host when opening a connection to the host.

Advanced Options

Check the Show advanced options check-box to display the advanced SSL and Telnet options.

Server Validation

When establishing an SSL/TLS connection, the host will send its server certificate to AccuTerm, so that

AccuTerm can authenticate the host's identity. AccuTerm supports a variety of validation options:

None: any server certificate is assumed to be valid.

Minimal: the server certificate must not have been revoked. The certificate's name, role, expiration and root certificate authority are ignored.

Self-signed - disregard host name: the server certificate must not be expired and must not be revoked. The certificate's name, role and root certificate authority are ignored.

Self-signed - verify host name: the server certificate's Common Name must match the value in the

"Host name or IP Address" field (above). The certificate must not be expired or revoked. The certificate's role and root certificate authority are ignored.

Strict - the server certificate must be issued by a trusted certificate authority, and it must be valid for use as a Server certificate. It must not be expired or revoked, and the Common Name must match the value in the "Host Name or IP Address" field (above).

Custom - click the Custom button to customize the validation options.

Client certificate

The Client certificate is used for client authentication when establishing an SSL/TLS connection. Client certificates are not normally used. If the server requires a client certificate, select the desired certificate from the drop-down list. Only certificates installed in the Windows Certificate Store are shown in this list. Note: for UniVerse and UniData, the "peer names" are not case-sensitive.

Advanced Telnet Options

See

this topic for a description of the advanced Telnet options.

1.6.3.4

Device Settings: Serial Port

Port

AccuTerm supports serial ports from COM1 to COM127, at baud rates up to 115,000 baud. Although you can select any port from 1 to 127, most computers only have one or two ports installed, and some may not have any. The drop-down list contains all of the ports that AccuTerm was able to identify on your computer.

Baud rate

Welcome to AccuTerm 7 43

Data bits

This refers to the number of bits the serial port sends to represent the actual character. The options are

7 or 8 bits (the default is 8 bits). This setting must match your host system.

Stop bits

This is the number of bits that the serial port uses to separate each character sent. The options are 1 or

2 stop bits (default is 1). This setting must match your host system.

Parity

Parity is an error checking mechanism performed by the serial port. The options are: None, Odd, Even,

Mark and Space. The most common is None (this is the default). This setting must match your host system.

Flow control (handshake)

Computers can send information very quickly. However, there are situations where one computer can send data faster than the other computer can process it. In these cases, the computer on the receiving end needs to inform the sending computer to suspend transmission until the slower computer is able to catch up. A technique called “handshaking” is used to accomplish this task.

AccuTerm supports three methods of handshaking. The first and most common is. Xon/Xoff (or software

handshak e). With this method, AccuTerm sends a special Xoff character (DC3) to the host system when it wants the host to stop sending characters. When the AccuTerm has caught up, it sends the Xon character (DC1). AccuTerm normally uses “inbound” Xon/Xoff handshake; that is, AccuTerm can control flow of data from the host, but the host cannot control the flow of data from AccuTerm. If you check the

“bidirectional” option, then AccuTerm will use both “inbound” and “outbound” Xon/Xoff handshake allowing the host to control the flow of data from AccuTerm as well.

The third method, RTS/CTS, protocol works the same as DTR/DSR except it uses a different pair of signals (pins) on the serial port.

This setting must match your host system.

Break key

Normally, AccuTerm sends a BREAK signal when you press the

CTRL+BREAK

key. Alternatively, you can use a control character instead of the BREAK signal. If you select "control character", enter the decimal value of the control character to send in the code field (for

CTRL+C

, the decimal value is 3).

1.6.3.5

Device Settings: Modem

AccuTerm supports dial-up connections using modems which have been installed on your system.

AccuTerm uses TAPI (a service built into Windows for supporting telephony) to communicate with your modem. By using TAPI, AccuTerm can share the modem with other TAPI enabled applications, like

Windows fax applications.

44 AccuTerm 7 Help

Modem Name

To use a modem connection, select a modem from the Modem Name list.

Auto Answer

If you want AccuTerm to answer incoming calls, check the "Auto Answer" option.

Dialing Options

To modify the dialing properties for the selected modem, such as your current location, dialing prefixes, etc., click the "Dialing Options" button.

Override settings from Control Panel

When this option not selected, the modem settings (baud rate, data bits, stop bits, parity and handshake) are determined by the modem properties set in Control Panel (Phone and Modem Options).

Select this option to override the Control Panel settings.

Baud rate

Baud rate is the speed that the serial port communicates with the host or modem. AccuTerm supports baud rates from 300 to 115,000 baud. If your PC is connected directly to the host machine, you will most likely use 9600 or 19200 baud. The speed that you use depends on the host computer.

Only connect at this speed

Select this option to lock the modem speed to the selected baud rate. When this option is not selected the specified baud rate is the maximum connection speed. Note: not all modems support this option.

Data bits

This refers to the number of bits the serial port sends to represent the actual character. The options are

7 or 8 bits (the default is 8 bits). This setting must match your host system.

Stop bits

This is the number of bits that the serial port uses to separate each character sent. The options are 1 or

2 stop bits (default is 1). This setting must match your host system.

Parity

Parity is an error checking mechanism performed by the serial port. The options are: None, Odd, Even,

Mark and Space. The most common is None (this is the default). This setting must match your host system.

Flow control (handshake)

AccuTerm supports two methods of handshaking for modem connections: software (Xon/Xoff) or hardware (RTS/CTS). Most modern modems work best with hardware (RTS/CTS) handshake.

Break key

Normally, AccuTerm sends a BREAK signal when you press the

CTRL+BREAK

key. Alternatively, you can use a control character instead of the BREAK signal. If you select "control character", enter the decimal value of the control character to send in the code field (for

CTRL+C

, the decimal value is 3).

1.6.4 Terminal Settings

Terminal Emulation

Welcome to AccuTerm 7 45

supported by AccuTerm 7:

Wyse 50: emulates a Wyse 50 terminal with “Enhanced” enabled. Wyse 50 emulation may also be used for Wyse 30, 99, 125 and 350 terminals.

Wyse 60: emulates a Wyse 60 terminal with “Enhanced” enabled. Wyse 60 emulation is similar to

Wyse 50, but with non-embedded visual attributes (the visual attribute codes do not take a position on the screen). Wyse 60 emulation may also be used for Wyse 150, 160 and 320 terminals.

ADDS Viewpoint A2: emulates the ADDS Viewpoint A2 terminal. This is the original A2 terminal, with no enhancements.

ADDS Viewpoint 60: emulates the ADDS Viewpoint 60 terminal. The Viewpoint 60 is similar to the

A2, but uses embedded visual attributes (the visual attribute codes take a position on the screen).

Procomm VP60: emulates an ADDS Viewpoint 60 terminal, but with non-embedded visual attributes. This emulation is similar to the Viewpoint 60 emulation provided by Procomm.

Viewpoint A2 Enhanced: emulates a Wyse 50 terminal in ADDS Viewpoint mode with “Enhanced” enabled. This is basically a hybrid of Wyse 50 and ADDS Viewpoint A2. Viewpoint A2 Enhanced may also be used for ADDS 2020 and 4000, and NCR 2900 terminals.

MDIS P30 (Prism): emulates a McDonnell Douglas Prism P30 terminal.

VT52: emulates the DEC VT52 terminal.

VT100: emulates the DEC VT100 terminal. VT100 is a 7-bit emulation, and can also be used for applications which require VT102 terminals.

VT220: emulates the DEC VT220 terminal. The VT220 emulation supports a super-set of the VT100 commands, and includes a host-writable status line, protected characters, multiple character sets and multiple pages.

VT320: emulates the DEC VT320 terminal. The VT320 emulation supports a super-set of the VT220 commands, and includes support for reporting and restoring various terminal states.

VT420: emulates the DEC VT420 terminal. The VT420 emulation supports a super-set of the VT320 commands, and includes support for rectangle operations, left & right margins, and horizontal split screen.

ANSI BBS: emulates the old MS-DOS ANSI.SYS device driver. This emulation may be useful when connecting to bulletin board systems.

Linux Console: emulates the Linux console, including function keys and colors.

SCO Console: emulates the SCO Unix console.

Pick PC Monitor: emulates the original Pick PC Monitor (“ mm-mon

” or “

” terminal type), including color and function keys.

Tektronix 4014: emulates the Tektronix 4010/4014 terminals. Color enhancements as implemented in the CIT467 terminal (from CIE Electronics) are included.

Tektronix 4100: partially emulates the Tektronix 41xx terminals.

TTY Emulation: emulates basic TTY functions.

Host terminal type

When a Telnet or Secure Shell session is initiated, the contents of the Host terminal type field is

46 AccuTerm 7 Help

passed to the host. The host may use this information to set its TERM environment variable or setting.

Generally, when you change the Terminal emulation setting, the Host terminal type is automatically

updated. The two fields are similar, but normally are not identical. The Host type setting ( Telnet or

Secure Shell ) may influence the Host terminal type setting.

Answerback

The contents of this field are sent to the host when the application sends a "send answerback" command to AccuTerm. Wyse and VT emulations support the answerback command. When the answerback message is sent to the host under Wyse emulation, an

ACK

control character follows the message. Under VT emulation, no terminator is sent.

Control characters may be entered into the Answerback field by prefixing the character with a caret (

Terminal Options

Certain terminal types support additional settings shown in the Terminal Options panel.

Send 8 bit controls

If this option is selected, then 8-bit control codes will be transmitted to the host. If the option is not set

(the default), equivalent 7-bit escape sequences will be transmitted to the host. This option applies to the

VT220, VT320, VT420 and Linux Console emulations.

Allow application mode

When this option is selected (the default), commands that switch the numeric keypad keys and cursor keys into "application mode" are emulated. When the option is not selected, those commands are ignored, preventing the terminal from switching to "application mode". This option is useful when the host or application erroneously sends the command to enter application mode, and the application is expecting normal numeric or cursor keys. This option applies to the VT emulations (except VT52) and

Linux Console emulation.

Keypad sends application codes

When this option is selected, the numeric keypad keys send special application codes. When the option is not set (the default), the numeric keypad keys send decimal numbers. This option applies to the VT emulations (except VT52) and Linux Console emulation.

Cursor keys send application codes

When this option is selected, the cursor keys send special application codes. When the option is not set (the default), the cursor keys send normal cursor codes. This option applies to the VT emulations

(except VT52) and Linux Console emulation.

Backspace key sends DEL

When this option is selected, the

BACKSPACE

key sends the

DEL

(delete) control code. When the option is not set (the default), the

BACKSPACE

key sends the

(backspace) control code. This option applies to the VT emulations (except VT52) and Linux Console emulation.

Auto-print works just like VT terminal

When this option is selected, the "auto print" slave printer function works the same as a real VT terminal. That is, when AccuTerm is in "auto print" mode, the entire screen line that the cursor is on is printed when AccuTerm receives a

control code. If this option is not set, then text is printed as it is received from the host (similar to Wyse auto-print mode).

Welcome to AccuTerm 7 47

1.6.4.1

Screen Settings

Use the Screen Settings panel to specify the size of the terminal screen, the number of screen pages, the number of history rows, the status line and other options.

Screen Size

There are two separate screen sizes that AccuTerm supports: normal and extended. These sizes are used to emulate the 80 and 132 column modes of the Wyse and VT terminals. AccuTerm has taken the extended and normal modes one step further: with AccuTerm you can define both the normal and extended modes to be any number of columns or rows (up to a maximum of 240). You can select which screen size is active when the session is first opened by checking the Active box for the desired size.

You will probably leave these settings at their default settings of 80 columns by 24 rows for normal mode and 132 columns by 24 rows in extended mode. If you have software that supports other screen sizes, you can experiment with these settings until you find a size that you like.

The number of rows may change if you change terminal emulations. The console terminal emulations use 25 rows with no status line; others use 24 rows with one or more status lines.

When AccuTerm switches between the normal and extended modes, one of two things will happen: either the font will change size to fit the visible screen, or scroll bars will be displayed if the full screen will not fit within the session window at the selected font size (see

Fonts ).

Screen pages

Some of the terminals which AccuTerm emulates support multiple addressable pages. With AccuTerm, you can have up to 25 pages.

History rows

AccuTerm supports a "history" or "scrollback" buffer, which saves lines which have scrolled off of the terminal screen. To use this feature, specify how many rows (up to 10,000) are to be saved. When the history buffer has been enabled (by setting the number of rows), use the vertical scroll bar, mouse wheel, or keyboard commands to scan history.

You can use

CTRL+SHIFT+PGUP

CTRL+SHIFT+PGDN

CTRL+SHIFT+UP

CTRL+SHIFT+DOWN

CTRL+SHIFT+HOME

, and

CTRL+SHIFT+END

to scan the history.

Status & message lines

Some of the terminals that AccuTerm can emulate display status, function key labels or host messages on the top or bottom lines of the screen. Depending on the terminal emulation selected, you may be able to adjust the number of status lines to use.

For Wyse and ADDS emulations, up to 3 status lines are available: a host message line at the top of the screen, and a "shifted" label line and "unshifted" label line at the bottom of the screen. For VT emulations, only a single status line is available for displaying a message from the host at the bottom of the screen. For the console emulations, the status line is not supported.

No message or status line: select if you do not want any status or message lines.

Shared message & status line: select to use a single, shared line at the bottom of the screen. If the native terminal supports more than one line (Wyse and ADDS Viewpoint), the bottom row of the screen displays the most recently used line. The line is shared between label line, shifted label line and host message line.

Split message & status lines: select if you want two separate status lines. The host message line

48 AccuTerm 7 Help

is the top row of the screen display, and the label line is displayed on the bottom row. If the shifted label line is programmed, pressing the

SHIFT

key displays the shifted label line. Releasing the

SHIFT

key displays the unshifted label line.

Separate message, status & shift lines: select if you want three separate status lines. The host message line is the top row of the screen display, and the shifted and unshifted label lines are displayed on the bottom two rows.

Show scrollbar

Select this option if you would like a vertical scroll bar at the right edge of the screen window. The vertical scroll bar is useful when scanning history, or if the window is too small to display the complete screen.

Allow Tektronix graphics

Checking this box enables the Tektronix 4010/4014/4100 graphic terminal emulation. If the Tektronix graphics mode is enabled, AccuTerm will automatically switch to the Tektronix graphic emulation when it receives the appropriate command from the host computer. AccuTerm will return to the previous emulation mode when graphics mode is terminated.

Automatic line wrap

When this option is checked, automatic line-wrap is enabled. When the cursor reaches the end of a line, typing another character normally causes the cursor to move to the beginning of the next line. When this option is not set, the cursor does not move.

Cursor style

AccuTerm supports either a blinking block or blinking underscore for the terminal screen cursor.

Protected attribute

Wyse 50 and Wyse 60 terminals use a visual attribute to identify "protected" characters. To change the

"protected" attribute, click the drop-down arrow and select the desired attribute.

1.6.4.1.1 Color Settings

Most of the terminals which AccuTerm emulates do not support color. Instead, they have visual attributes like normal, reverse, dim, blink, underline, etc. While AccuTerm supports these visual attributes, it also supports color, even for terminals without native color support. This is done by assigning a foreground (text) and background color to each of the visual attributes that the native terminal supports.

Besides the visual attributes and colors, AccuTerm also supports "Visual Styles". This is a feature that automatically surrounds rectangular blocks on the terminal screen with a thin border. The border resembles the border that Windows uses for text fields, lists, buttons and frames. Effective use of Visual

Styles can make an ordinary text screen appear very Windows-like.

Preview

The Preview window displays a sample screen with commonly used attributes using the current color settings. To choose a different color for any attribute in the preview window, click on the name of the attribute you would like to change. A drop-down list showing all possible color combinations will be displayed. Click an item in the list to change the foreground and background color of the attribute.

Theme

The Theme buttons provide an easy way to select one of the built-in color themes. Themes consist of the palette colors, attribute colors and Visual Styles. To preview any of the built-in themes, hover the mouse over one of the theme buttons. The Preview panel temporarily changes to the theme under the

Welcome to AccuTerm 7 49

mouse so you can see the effect without actually changing the current settings. To select one of the built-in themes, click the theme's button.

Some of the built-in themes utilize AccuTerm's "Visual Styles" feature which can make character-based screens look like Windows. This effect requires careful use of the visual attributes by the application.

Each rectangular block of characters on the screen with a common visual attribute will be enclosed in a thin border, if one is defined for that attribute. Visual Styles supports 3 border styles: inset, raised and flat.

The built-in themes are:

Default colors: uses a palette of 8 dark and 8 light colors. The dark colors are a bit darker than the dark legacy colors and the light colors are a bit lighter. The "normal" color (this is the color that the screen displays any time it is cleared) is light gray with black text.

Legacy colors: uses a palette of 8 dark and 8 light colors. The palette is essentially the same as the original VGA palette. This is the palette that all prior versions of AccuTerm have used. The

"normal" color is dark blue with yellow text.

White on Black: resets the palette to the 16 default palette colors and assigns combinations of black, light gray, dark gray and black to each of the visual attributes. The normal color is black with light gray text.

Black on White: similar to White on Black, except that the normal color is light gray with black text.

Green Screen: resets the palette to the default palette, except that the Olive color is a medium shade of green. Assigns combinations of light green, medium green, dark green and black to each of the visual attributes. The normal color is black with medium green text.

Reverse Green Screen: similar to Green Screen, except that the normal color is medium green with black text.

System colors: sets several colors in the palette to "system colors" defined in the Windows Display

Properties. The normal background color is "Window background" and the normal text color is

"Window text." The following palette colors are replaced by a system color:

Black = Window Text Color

White = Window Background Color

Dark Blue = Highlight Background Color

Olive = Highlight Text Color

Light Gray = 3D Light

Dark Gray = 3D Shadow

Other palette colors are set the same as the default colors.

Classic Windows: this theme enables AccuTerm's Visual Styles. It uses the same palette as

System Colors and assigns an inset border style to the "reverse" and "dim reverse" attributes, so that text displayed using these attributes resembles a typical Windows text field. A raised border is assigned to "underline" and "dim underline" which resembles a Windows command button. The normal background color is "3D face" and the normal text color is "Window text."

50 AccuTerm 7 Help

Modern Windows: this theme is similar to Classic Windows except that a flat border is assigned to "reverse" and "dim reverse". This is similar to the border that Windows XP and later uses for text fields.

Advanced Colors & Styles

Click this button to open the

Attribute Colors panel, which allows you to fine-tune the colors and border

effects for each visual attribute.

Border Style

If you are using Visual Styles (or the AccuTerm private programming command to draw borders), you must select a border style. Choose "thin" for a one-pixel border, or "thick" for a two-pixel border. When external borders are selected, vertical border lines are drawn in adjacent character cells. Otherwise they are drawn inside the character cell and sometimes overlap the left or right edge of the character; thin borders work best with smaller font sizes, but are less dramatic than thick borders.

Line Drawing

AccuTerm supports the line and box drawing characters used by the native terminals. AccuTerm supports three line drawing styles: normal, flat and beveled. Choose "normal" to draw lines using the current character color. Choose "flat" to draw lines using the "outer flat border" color. Choose "beveled" to draw 3D lines using the "outer highlight" and "outer shadow" colors.

See also:

Palette Settings

1.6.4.1.1.1 Attribute Colors

The mapping of visual attributes to colors is displayed as a table with an entry for each possible attribute combination. Select an item from the attribute table to modify or view its properties. Each item has a

background color, text color and border style. Sample text drawn using the selected colors and border style is shown in the attribute table. The border style is only available if text border size is not

"none".

Text border size

The text border size is used by "Visual Styles" and determines the thickness of the border drawn around blocks of text. Choices are "thin" (1 pixel) or "thick" (2 pixels). The border is usually drawn inside the character cell bounds. Sometimes, especially for wide characters, the pixels used to draw the border overlap the pixels used to draw the character. If this is the case, you can select "thin (ext)" or "thick

(ext)", which draws the vertical lines used for the border in the character cell immediately to the left or right of the block. If you use this setting, be sure that your application does not use the characters to the left & right of blocks, otherwise the border lines might overlap those characters.

To select a border style for any attribute, the text border size must not be "none".

Line draw style

Most of the terminals that AccuTerm emulates support some form of line drawing. AccuTerm supports this function and lets you choose the style of line to use when drawing lines: normal, beveled and flat.

Attribute effects

Since AccuTerm assigns colors to the visual attributes, some of the visual effects are not as important

Welcome to AccuTerm 7 51

as they were on a real terminal. You can disable the underline effect or the blinking effect is you like.

The assigned colors will still be used for those attributes, but the actual underline or blink will be disabled.

See also:

Palette Settings

1.6.4.1.1.2 Palette Settings

AccuTerm uses a palette of 16 colors for the background and foreground (text) color of all characters on the screen. There are also 6 colors used for drawing borders when using Visual Styles.

The drop-down list for each of the palette entries displays a list of the 16 standard VGA colors, the system colors (from Windows Display Properties), and a final item called "Custom Color". Click on any item in the list to select that item, or click on Custom Color to open a color selection dialog where you can choose any shade you like for the palette entry.

Since it is possible for the application to request specific foreground and background colors, it is recommended that the color chosen for a particular palette entry is close to the color name associated with that entry.

Note: selecting a theme on the

Colors & Themes

panel will replace all of the palette entries with colors compatible with the selected theme.

1.6.4.1.2 Background Settings

AccuTerm has the ability to display a graphic image as the background (or wallpaper) for the terminal screen. If you enable the use picture for screen background option, you can enter (or browse for) the name of a file to display as the screen background. A preview of the screen with the selected background picture shows what the selected picture might look like with text written over the background using the currently selected "normal" colors.

Background color transparency

Because detailed pictures can be distracting and might actually obscure the text displayed on the screen, the background picture's transparency can be adjusted. Setting the background color transparency to 0% uses the picture as the screen background. Setting it to 100% shows the normal background color. Any setting in between blends the picture with the normal background color.

Background picture scaling

The background picture will be scaled to fit the screen window. Three scale modes are available:

Stretch: the picture is stretched (or compressed) in both directions to fit the window size.

Fit: the picture's aspect ratio is maintained. It is stretched (or compressed) in one direction to fit the window. Any space not filled by the picture in the other dimension is left black.

Crop: the picture's aspect ratio is maintained. It is stretched (or compressed) in one direction to fit the window. The other dimension is cropped to the window size.

Note: the back ground picture is only shown in areas of the screen that are "normal". Characters which use a visual attribute other than "normal" obscure the back ground picture.

52 AccuTerm 7 Help

1.6.4.2

Keyboard Settings

The Keyboard Settings panel is specify keyboard options and open the keyboard programming window.

Locking programmed keys

Most terminals provide commands that allow the host to program the function keys. If you would like the host to be able to reset and reprogram the keys, select the Unlocked – host can reset or

reprogram keys option. If you would like the host to be able reprogram keys, but not reset them to their default values, select the Locked – host cannot reset keys to defaults option. If you would like to prevent the host from resetting or reprogramming keys, select the Locked – host cannot reset or

reprogram keys option.

Map F11 through F20 to CTRL+F1 through CTRL+F10

Some terminals (like Wyse 50 and 60) have more than 12 function keys on their native keyboard.

Since the PC keyboard only has 12 function keys, AccuTerm allows you to map the native F11 through F20 keys to PC keyboard

CTRL+F1

through

CTRL+F10

(and native

SHIFT+F11

SHIFT+F20

to PC

CTRL+SHIFT+F1

through

CTRL+SHIFT+ F10

Note: for Wyse, the last native k ey is F16; for the VT terminals, the last native k ey if F20; for all others,the last native k ey is F12. In the preceding paragraph, replace F20 with the last native k ey for the terminal being emulated.

Start with Caps Lock on

Sometimes applications are designed for upper-case text. If you would like the

CAPS LOCK

key state to be "on" when the session is opened, check this option.

Program the Keyboard

Click this button to open the

keyboard programming

window.

1.6.4.2.1 Keyboard Programming

The Keyboard Editor is used to manually program the keyboard. For real terminals, this is usually limited to the function keys

F12

. However, AccuTerm supports programming almost any key on the keyboard.

Welcome to AccuTerm 7 53

Click on any key to view or edit the programming for that key. The programmed contents of the selected key is copied to the Key data field, and the key's name is shown in the Selected key field. The state of the Shift, Ctrl and Alt keys reflected by the corresponding check boxes. Clicking the SHIFT, CTRL, or

ALT keys on the keyboard editor toggles their state. The new state is reflected in the check boxes.

Key data

If the content of the selected key is the default for that key, the Key data field is shown using normal characters. If the content is not the default, it is shown in bold. Control characters are shown with a caret (^) prefix. You can enter most control characters by simply holding the

CTRL

key while typing the corresponding alpha key. For example to enter CTRL-M, hold the

CTRL

key and press the

key. ^M will be added to the text in Key data field.

The carat (^) and backslash (\) characters are used as special prefixes in keyboard programming. If you need to enter either of these characters, just enter two of them (^^ or \\).

The keys can be programmed with a character sequence which is transmitted to the host when the key is pressed, or a

script command

, which is executed when the key is pressed. To program a script command, enclose the command in square brackets, for example:

[Beep]

Button bar key caption

One of AccuTerm's features is the ability to show a Function Key Button Bar at the bottom (or top) of the terminal window. The bar contains 12 buttons which can be clicked to perform the same action as the corresponding function key

F12

. The caption displayed in the buttons on the Function Key Button

Bar can be customized by entering the desired text in this field.

Button bar help hint

Like the button bar key caption, each of the buttons can have a custom help hint that is displayed when the mouse hovers over the button. Enter the desired help text in this field.

Reset to default...

Clicking the Reset to default button opens a Reset Keys dialog where you can specify which keys you want to reset: the current key, the normal (A-Z, 0-9, etc.) keys, cursor keys, function keys, function key captions or the entire keyboard. If any option except "current key" is selected, you can restrict the reset to the current key bank. In this case, only the keys with the same Shift, Ctrl and Alt state are reset.

Click the Reset button to perform the action or Cancel to return to the Keyboard Editor.

1.6.4.3

Font Settings

Font

The Font drop-down list shows all of the available fonts installed on your computer that are suitable for use with AccuTerm. In order for a font to be considered suitable, it must be fixed-pitch (most Windows fonts are not fixed-pitch), and it must support the ANSI character set. AccuTerm uses the open-source

DejaVu Sans Mono font by default.

The AccuTerm Legacy and AccuTerm Legacy (bitmap) fonts are also available in case you prefer those instead. Due to limitations of bitmap fonts in Windows, the AccuTerm Legacy (bitmap) font is limited to the Latin-1 character set (ISO 8859-1) and does not contain the all of the symbol characters.

54 AccuTerm 7 Help

Size

The Size list shows the font sizes available for the selected font. Choose "auto" if you want the font to scale to fit the screen size. This is the default.

Style

Select either "normal" or "bold" font style.

Keep legible

If this option is checked, and the Size is set to "auto", AccuTerm will never scale a font smaller than 5 pixels wide by 7 pixels high.

Character set

Select the character set encoding that is used by the application running on the host. Most terminals have one or more native character sets - these are always included in the character set encoding list and are the most common choice. The current Windows ANSI character set is also included in the character set list. Select this encoding if your host application is using the same ANSI character set that Windows is using. If your application uses Unicode sends and receives data using UTF-8, select the Unicode

(UTF-8) encoding. Other single-byte character sets that are installed in Windows may be also be selected.

For VT220, 320 & 420 emulations, the selected character set is used when AccuTerm receives the SCS

(select character set) command to select the UPSS (user-preferred supplemental set).

You should select a font that supports all the characters used by your application. Windows includes a feature known as "Font Linking" which enables the use of characters (actually, glyphs) from a similar font if a required glyph is missing from the selected font. This sometimes yields poor results, so selection of an appropriate font is important. Font Linking is not supported for bitmap fonts.

Euro character

If your host application needs to display the Euro currency symbol, enter the ASCII value of the Euro symbol, as used on your system. Note: for most character sets there is no standard value for this

symbol. Some possible values are 128 (Windows ANSI), 164 (Latin-1 currency and Latin-9 Euro) and

213 (IBM modified code page 850). Unicode (UTF-8) defines the Euro as U+20AC. If you are using

Unicode encoding, the Euro character value is ignored.

1.6.4.4

Sound Settings

Terminal bell

Like the margin bell of antique mechanical typewriters, terminals have the ability to "ring a bell", usually to get the attention of the operator. The ASCII

BEL

control code is universally used to "beep" the terminal.

AccuTerm provides great versatility in customizing the sound generated by this command.

Enable terminal bell sound

By default, the "bell" sound is enabled. If your environment requires a silent terminal, you can disable the sound by un-checking this box.

Play Windows sound

By default, AccuTerm will play the wave file assigned to Windows “Default Beep” program event defined in the Sounds applet in Control Panel. If you would like to play the sound defined for a different program event you can select the event from the drop-down list. Click the Test button to play the sound immediately.

Welcome to AccuTerm 7 55

Play media file

If you would like choose your own WAVE or MP3 file to use as the "bell" sound, select this option. Click the Browse... button to browse for the desired file.

Beep using PC speaker

To use a real "beep" as the "bell" sound, select this option and enter the frequency of the beep in Hz, and the duration in milliseconds. The default is 600Hz for 250ms. The frequency must be between 200Hz and 4000Hz. The duration must be between 100ms and 5000ms.

1.6.5 Printer Settings

AccuTerm 7 uses the printer in two ways: First, AccuTerm can print the contents of the terminal screen

(Screen Print). The user can perform a Screen Print by using File Print Screen from the main menu, by clicking the button on the toolbar or by using the keyboard shortcut

ALT+G.

The application on the host can also send a command to AccuTerm to print the screen.

The other way AccuTerm uses the printer is as a "slave printer". Most of the terminals that AccuTerm emulates allowed the user to attach a printer to a special port on the terminal. This printer was known as a "slave printer", which was accessed by the application program differently than a "system printer". The port that the slave printer was attached to was often called an "auxiliary port", so "slave printer" is synonymous with "auxiliary printer" or "aux printer".

AccuTerm can direct data that it receives from the host to the Slave Printer either by receiving the appropriate command from the application or by using File Printer On from the main menu. The

ALT+P

keyboard shortcut can also be used to toggle the state of AccuTerm's Slave Printer. A panel in

AccuTerm's status bar indicates the current state of the Slave Printer.

AccuTerm can print in two modes: text and graphics. Text is the mode used by “real” terminals. This mode is different from normal Windows printing in that the Windows “printer driver” is not used. For screen printing, text mode sends the screen text to the printer. For slave printing, AccuTerm passes raw data, including control characters and escape sequences from the host directly to the printer (or spooler). In text mode, the host computer is responsible for setting printer font sizes and page orientation by sending the appropriate printer commands.

In graphics mode, AccuTerm prints an image of the screen on the printer, using the Windows printer driver. When the screen is printed in graphics mode, the printed image includes text, line drawing characters, and may optionally include the screen background and colors. For slave printing, AccuTerm understands

(carriage return),

(line feed) and

(form feed) control characters, but other control characters and escape sequences are ignored. You can select the font, paper size and page orientation used for slave printing in graphics mode. You can select the paper size and orientation used for screen print in graphics mode.

AccuTerm can also use special

print adapter

scripts to perform custom processing of slave or screen

print jobs.

AccuTerm 7 has separate printer configurations for screen and slave printing. Both configurations contain similar settings which are described in this topic.

Enable printing

Enable or disable slave or screen printing by checking or un-checking this box.

56 AccuTerm 7 Help

Printer selection

Select the printer to use for slave or screen printing from the Printer drop-down list. The first item in the list is always the current default Windows printer. Select this item to use the Windows default printer for slave or screen printing. Even though the name of the current default printer is shown here, selecting this option will track changes to the default printer. If a specific printer is desired, select it from the drop-down list.

Text mode

Select text mode if you want to send raw text to the printer. For slave printing, the print data can contain control codes and escape sequences to control the printer. For screen printing, the screen text is sent to the printer with

CR LF

after each line.

Eject page before / after (text mode only)

Selecting either of these options causes a page eject before or after each print operation. These options are only available in text mode. Graphics mode always ejects a page after the print operation.

Graphics mode

Graphics mode is normally used for screen printing since the printed output closely resembles the actual screen, including the font used on the screen. Graphics mode may be necessary for slave printing if the selected printer cannot use text mode. Many printers now only support graphics mode.

Page Setup (graphics mode only)

Click this button to select the font, paper size and orientation used for screen or slave printing in graphics mode.

Print background (screen print only)

Select this option to print the screen background when printing the screen in graphics mode.

Print in color (screen print only)

Select this option to print the screen in color. If the Print background option is also checked, then the screen background is also printed in color.

Use print adapter script

AccuTerm can utilize print adapter scripts to process screen or slave print jobs. The print adapter script can launch command-line print utilities such as Print Wizard (from Rasmussen Software) to process the print job (file). To use a print adapter, select this option and choose the desired adapter script from the drop-down list.

You can create your own custom adapter scripts. Use the supplied PrintWizardPCL.atsc script as a template, and customize your script to process the print job to suite your own requirements.

Print Wizard

Several Print Wizard adapter scripts are supplied with AccuTerm 7. If you have Print Wizard installed on your PC, you can select one of the Print Wizard adapter scripts for screen or slave printing.

Print Wizard PCL Converter: this adapter script can print jobs that contain Hewlett Packard

PCL on most any Windows printer, even if the printer does not have native PCL support. This is quite useful if you use PCL-formatted reports and forms in your application, but have newer printers without PCL (or even text) support.

Print Wizard Interactive: this adapter script will open the Print Wizard user interface where the operator can choose the disposition of the print job - save as PDF, email, fax or print.

Welcome to AccuTerm 7 57

Print Wizard Kiosk: this adapter script is similar to the Interactive script. The Print Wizard kiosk mode presents more options than the Interactive mode.

Print Wizard PDF Creator: this adapter script creates a PDF file from slave print or screen print jobs. When the print job is closed, the standard Windows "Save as" dialog is displayed to enter the file name for the PDF file.

Encoding for temporary print files

When using a print adapter, AccuTerm stores the print job in a temporary file. When the job is closed, the temporary file is passed to the adapter script for processing. You can choose the character set encoding to use for this temporary file. Choose No encoding to store the data exactly as received from the host. Other selections convert from the host character set to the selected encoding (ANSI, Unicode or UTF-8).

Printer job close timeout (slave printer only)

Enter the number of seconds to wait after receiving a Printer Off command before closing the print job.

Usually, when the host computer needs to print a report, it sends a Printer On command, sends the printer data and then sends a Printer Off command. But some host programs send a Printer On command, send some data to the printer, send a Printer Off command, and send some other data to the screen, and then send another Printer On command, and send more data to the printer, etc. Because of this, AccuTerm has no way of knowing when the host is finished sending the print job. The only way it can determine this is to wait for a set amount of time after the Printer Off command before closing the job. If this field is set to the default of 5 seconds, AccuTerm waits 5 seconds after the Printer Off command has been received before closing the print job.

This causes a delay when printing under AccuTerm. If all your host programs always turn the slave port on, send all the data and then turn it off, you can reduce this number to 1 or 0. If you have programs that are constantly turning the slave port on and off, you may need to adjust this number until things work correctly.

1.6.6 Clipboard Settings

Paste Options: end-of-line

When the clipboard is "pasted" to an AccuTerm session, AccuTerm transmits the clipboard text to the host computer. The end of line options determine what AccuTerm does at the end of each line: send

(default), send

, send

CF+ LF

, send

TAB

, do nothing, or send a user-defined character. To specify a user-defined character, select the user defined option and enter the ASCII code of the character to be sent at the end of each line.

If you do not want the end-of-line character to be sent after the last (or only) line pasted, check the Do

not send line-end after last (or only) line pasted option.

Paste Options: end-of-text

After pasting the clipboard to an AccuTerm session, AccuTerm can send an optional end of text character. Normally, AccuTerm does not transmit any character at this time, but you can select EOF

(which is the

SUB

CTRL+Z

control code), or send a user-defined character. To specify a user-defined character, select the user defined option and enter the ASCII code of the character to be sent at the end of a paste operation.

Interline delay

58 AccuTerm 7 Help

After each line from the clipboard is sent to the host computer, AccuTerm will wait for the specified delay time before sending the next line. The delay time is specified in milliseconds. Note: this is the same

delay setting as the ASCII file transfer.

Copy Options: Clear selection after copy

Normally, if there is a selection rectangle shown on the AccuTerm screen, copying the selection to the clipboard leaves the selection intact after copying. Check this option if you would like to automatically remove the selection from the screen after copying it to the clipboard.

Copy / Paste shortcut

AccuTerm supports standard Copy and Paste functions using the Edit menu or the context (rightclick) popup menu. You can also choose shortcut keys for these functions:

CTRL+INS

SHIFT+INS

CTRL+C

CTRL+V

. However, if you select the shortcut you will no longer be able to use the normal function of the shortcut keys. For example, if you select

CTRL+C

CTRL+V

for your Copy / Paste shortcut, you will not be able to send the

CTRL+C

control character anymore.

1.6.7 Mouse Settings

AccuTerm supports extended mouse functions which can used to add mouse functionality to your character-based applications. Two mouse extensions are provided: host mouse reporting, and mouse

pattern matching.

Allow mouse input for supported applications

This option determines whether host mouse reporting is enabled. When this option is enabled (the default), AccuTerm will enter mouse input mode when the host sends the enable mouse input command.

Mouse pattern file name

To use mouse pattern matching, enter the name of the desired mouse pattern file here, or click

Browse... to browse for the pattern file. Note: several sample mouse pattern files are included with

AccuTerm in the Samples folder under the main AccuTerm program folder. These files have a .mou file extension.

See also:

Mouse support

1.6.8 File Transfer Settings

Use the File Transfer Settings panel to modify how AccuTerm's file transfer functions work. There are sections for ASCII, Kermit and X/Y/Zmodem. It is generally not a good idea to change these settings from their default values unless you have a good understanding of the protocol and the companion file transfer program on the host computer.

ASCII settings

When transferring a file from the PC to a host computer (upload) using the ASCII protocol, the each line may be terminated with a

CR LF

combination. Select the appropriate end-of-line for the host computer's ASCII upload program by checking the appropriate option.

ASCII is a "blind" protocol. The host computer cannot tell AccuTerm if it is ready to receive the next line. In order to perform reliable ASCII uploads, you may need to specify an Interline delay time. After

Welcome to AccuTerm 7 59

each line is sent to the host computer, AccuTerm will wait for the specified delay time before sending the next line. The delay time is specified in milliseconds.

Note: the Interline delay setting also applies to the Edit Paste and Edit

Paste From...

commands.

Kermit settings

The Kermit file transfer protocol is popular with minicomputer and mainframe systems. There have been many revisions of this protocol, and it may be necessary to modify some of these settings to communicate with another Kermit program.

Kermit defaults

When AccuTerm’s Kermit is negotiating with the host's Kermit program, any of the checked options will be requested, and if the other Kermit is capable, the option will be used.

The "Quote eighth bit" option should be used when the communications path only supports 7 data bits, or when the other machine is not capable of processing eight bit data.

The "Compress data" option may be used to perform rudimentary data compression. Not all Kermit programs perform data compression.

The "CRC block check" option instructs Kermit to use CRC error detection instead of the standard simple checksum error check. This results in more reliable transfers, especially over noisy phone lines.

Not all Kermit programs perform CRC error checking.

Timeout settings

When using any of the X/Y/Zmodem protocols, you can specify the number of seconds before a timeout occurs. If the other machine fails to respond within the number of seconds specified here, the protocol will attempt to resend the previously sent message.

Automatic Zmodem download

If this option is set, then AccuTerm will automatically begin receiving files using the Zmodem protocol when the other machine begins sending files using the Zmodem protocol. The files are saved in the

"Default download directory".

Defaults

Select Text or Binary as the default transfer mode (used only for Kermit and Zmodem protocols).

When you select Upload or Download from the main menu, the default mode will be selected. For downloaded text files, select the desired encoding of the downloaded file. Select "no encoding" if no character set translation is desired. Select ANSI, Unicode or UTF-8 if you want to translate downloaded files from the host character set to the selected encoding. Also, select whether to overwrite existing files when downloading. You can change any of these options in the Upload or Download dialog before performing the transfer.

1.6.9 TCL Rules

Several of AccuTerm's MultiValue tools (Upload Wizard, Download Wizard, wED Editor and GUI

Designer) require a special MultiValue server utility to function. The server utility is typically initiated from the command line (TCL, ECL, etc.), and settings in this panel define how AccuTerm can verify that the session is "at TCL".

Prompt characters

60 AccuTerm 7 Help

It TCL can be recognized by one or more particular prompt characters, check the Prompt characters checkbox and enter these characters in this field. For example, many MultiValue systems use a colon

( : ) as the TCL prompt. Some systems change the prompt if a select list is active, for example, to a greater-than-sign ( > ). In this example, to require the current prompt be either a colon or greater-thansign for AccuTerm to issue a TCL command, enter ":" and click Add, then enter ">" and click Add.

Cursor row is and Cursor column is

It TCL can be recognized by the cursor position, check the Cursor row is and/or Cursor column is checkbox, then enter the position (or range of positions) where the cursor must be before AccuTerm will issue a TCL command.

TCL check (command, response and timeout)

When the correct prompt character and cursor position are found (as specified in the previous options),

AccuTerm will attempt send the command shown in this field to the host to "run at TCL". AccuTerm waits for the specified response to be returned from the host. If the correct response is returned within the timeout period, AccuTerm assumes that the session is at TCL and AccuTerm can run other TCL commands. The default TCL check program is "FTTCL", which is installed with the AccuTerm host programs. When you run FTTCL, it displays the text "**TCL**" on the screen so AccuTerm can verify that the session is "at TCL".

Server command

Once AccuTerm recognizes that the session is at TCL, it sends the Server command to the host to initiate "server mode". This mode is required for various AccuTerm MultiValue tools to read and write data from the host. The default server program is "FTSERVER" which is installed with the AccuTerm host programs.

See also:

Installing the host programs

1.6.10 Window Settings

The Window Settings pane is divided into two sections: Session Window and Main Window. The

Main Window section is shown only when the Show advanced options check box is checked. This section is only available to users with administrator privileges, and only when AccuTerm has been started using "run as administrator".

Session Window

Session title format

When AccuTerm displays the session window title, it may add a copy number or session ID to the title text. The copy number is only added when more than one instance of a particular session file is open.

You can select various formats for the title from this drop-down list.

Session title

Normally, AccuTerm uses the session file name as the session window title. If you would like to enter your own title text, enter it in this field.

Session icon

Welcome to AccuTerm 7 61

AccuTerm normally shows the standard AccuTerm 7 session icon in the session tab. If you would like to display a different icon, click the Change... button and select the desired icon.

Main Window

Main window title

It is possible to customize AccuTerm's main window title by entering the desired text in this field.

Main window icon

AccuTerm normally shows the standard AccuTerm 7 program icon in the main window title bar.

The same icon is used in the Windows task bar and in the

ALT+TAB

window. If you would like to display a different icon, click the Change... button and select the desired icon.

Splash screen

Like many other Windows applications, when AccuTerm starts up, it briefly shows a "splash screen" which contains a graphic image. The splash screen is shown while AccuTerm opens files and performs other preparatory tasks. You can disable this behavior by un-checking the Show splash screen option.

You can also select a custom graphic to be used in the splash screen. If you select a custom splash graphic image, its dimensions should be approximately 500x250 pixels.

62 AccuTerm 7 Help

1.7 Customizing the Menu and Toolbar

A custom AccuTerm 7 menu can be created for the current user (user's personal custom menu) or for all

AccuTerm users (master menu). When the Menu Designer starts, you can select whether to create (or modify) the current user's menu or, if you have administrator privileges, the master menu. When creating or modifying the master menu, you can force the master menu to override any personal menus by checking the override box in the

Menu Properties

pane. Otherwise, a user's personal custom menu has priority over the master menu.

Menu Structure

The AccuTerm menu is a hierarchical structure of Bands and Tools. A band is a collection of related tools organized in a logical manner. There are different types of bands (menu, toolbar, status bar), as well as different types of tools (menu item, toggle item, panel, etc). Bands contain tools which perform actions.

Menu Designer

Use the Menu Designer to customize AccuTerm’s main menu, popup menu, toolbar and status bar.

Use caution when modifying AccuTerm’s menu structure; it is possible to make AccuTerm nonfunctional. The menu designer allows you to add, remove and modify menu items, sub-menus, toolbar buttons and status bar fields.

To start the Menu Designer, use Tools Customize Menu from the main menu.

The Menu Designer displays the menu structure using a tree in the left pane of the designer window and properties in the right pane. The root node in the tree is AccuTerm Menu & Toolbar. Under the root are nodes for each band in the menu structure. Each menu, toolbar, status bar and session bar is considered a band. There can be only one Main Menu band and only one Session Bar band. It is possible to have multiple Toolbar, Status Bar, and Context Menu bands, although having multiples may be confusing to the user.

Selecting a node (band or tool) in the menu tree structure causes the right pane of the designer window to display the properties of that node. You customize the selected object by adjusting its properties.

Menu properties

Band properties

Tool properties

New

The New button creates a new band if the current selection is the root. The New button creates a new

tool if the current selection is a band or Sub-Menu tool or Dropdown Button tool. Clicking the New button displays a drop-down menu that allows you to choose the type of item to create.

Delete

The Delete button deletes the currently selected item.

Default

The Default button resets the entire menu structure back to its default state. Any customizations are lost. You will receive a warning to confirm this action if you click this button.

Cancel

Welcome to AccuTerm 7 63

Click the Cancel button to close the menu designer and abandon any modifications you have made.

Click the OK button to close the menu designer and accept all modifications you have made.

1.7.1 Menu Properties

When the root node (AccuTerm Menu & Toolbar) is selected in the menu tree, the properties pane displays the actual menu file name. If the master menu was selected from the designer startup page, the override status of the master menu is also displayed in the properties pane.

Master menu override

Selecting the Master menu override option causes any existing personal custom menus to be ignored, and prevents the user from creating or modifying his personal menu. If this option is not selected, the master menu is used unless the user has a personal menu. Users will be able to create and modify their personal menu.

1.7.2 Band Properties

Name

Specify the name of the band. The following band names are recognized by AccuTerm and should not be changed: Menu, StatusBar, Toolbar, ContextMenu, SessionBar and TabCtx.

Type

Displays the band type: Main Menu, Popup Menu, Toolbar, Status Bar or Session Bar. You cannot change the band type; the type is determined when you create a new band using the New button.

Style

Choose the band style. Usually this is "Normal", but you can choose one of the other styles if you want to display icons in the Session Bar and Status Bar, or display captions in a Toolbar.

Title

The band Title is only used if a Toolbar band is "floating" - that is - not "docked" to an edge of the main window. If you change the Dock position of a Toolbar to "floating", then this title is displayed at the top of the floating Toolbar window.

Dock position

You can change the dock position of Toolbar and Status Bar bands. Normally, Toolbar bands are docked at the top of the window, and Status Bar bands are docked at the bottom.

Enabled

When a band is Enabled, the user can click on tools in that band. If it is disabled, tools on the band do not respond to user clicks or keyboard shortcuts.

Visible

If you want the user to see the band, set the Visible property. If you clear this property, the band will be hidden. The Visible state of most bands is updated by AccuTerm based on preferences or menu selections.

Large icons

The Large icons property is set at runtime by AccuTerm. Do not alter this property here.

Auto wrap

64 AccuTerm 7 Help

If you check the Auto wrap property for a Toolbar band, and the window is not wide enough to display all of the Toolbar buttons, the Toolbar will "wrap" at the right edge of the window and show on two or more lines.

See also:

Tool Properties

1.7.3 Tool Properties

The ID property identifies each tool. Many IDs are built-in and can be selected from the dropdown list.

When you create a new tool that does not duplicate the function of a built-in tool, you must specify a unique ID in the range of 10000 to 19999.

Type

The tool Type depends on the type of band the tool is on:

Menu or Popup Menu

Menu Item: when the user clicks a Menu Item, an action is performed.

Sub-Menu: when the user clicks a Sub-Menu, another menu level is displayed.

Toggle Item: when the user clicks a Toggle Item, the item changes state (checked vs.

unchecked). When a Toggle Item is "checked", it may display a different icon, or a checkmark if no icon has been designated. When a Toggle Item changes state, its action is performed.

Group Item: a Group Item is like a Toggle Item, except that only one item in the group can be "checked" at a time. A group is delimited by a menu item that has the Begin group option checked.

Toolbar

Normal Button: when the user clicks a Normal Button, an action is performed.

Dropdown Button: when the user clicks a Dropdown Button, another popup menu (submenu) is displayed.

Toggle Button: when the user clicks a Toggle Button, the button changes state (depressed vs. raised). When a Toggle Button is "checked", it may display a different icon from the

"unchecked" state. When a Toggle Button changes state, its action is performed.

Group Button: a Group Item is like a Toggle Button, except that only one button in the group can be "checked" at a time. A group is delimited by a button item that has the Begin

group option checked.

Status Bar

Normal panel: displays text and/or icon in the Status Bar.

Num Lock panel: displays the state of the Num Lock key in the Status Bar.

Caps Lock panel: displays the state of the Caps Lock key in the Status Bar.

Scrl Lock panel: displays the state of the Scroll Lock key in the Status Bar.

Welcome to AccuTerm 7 65

Time panel: displays the current time in the Status Bar.

Date panel: displays the current date in the Status Bar.

Date/Time panel: displays the current time and date in the Status Bar.

Session Bar

A Session Bar does not have any design-time tools. The Session Bar buttons are created automatically.

Style

The tool Style determines whether text, icon or both are displayed. You can also choose "normal", which will display the most common style for the tool and band type.

Caption

The tool Caption text is displayed in Menu and Status Bar tools. It can optionally be displayed for a

Toolbar button. For Menu tools, you can create an "accelerator" for the item by inserting an ampersand

(

) before the letter you want to use for the accelerator in the Caption.

Alignment

For Status Bar tools, choose the text alignment: Left, Right or Center.

Border style

For Status Bar tools, choose the panel border style: Inset, Raised or None.

Panel size

For Status Bar tools, choose the panel size: Fixed Width, Fit Contents or Spring. If you choose Fixed

Width, and set the Minimum Panel Width to zero, the panel will be sized using the text in the Caption property. If you choose Fit Contents, the panel will adjust size any time the Caption text is updated. If you choose Spring, the panel size is like Fit Contents, but varies with window size. All Spring panels are resized when the window size changes.

Minimim panel width

Specify the size of a Fixed Width panel, or the minimum size for a Fit Contents or Spring panel. This value is in pixels.

Shortcut

For Main Menu tools only, you can select a keyboard shortcut for that tool. This shortcut is usually combined with Ctrl, Shift and Alt modifier keys. Note that the shortcut overrides any other use of the key. For example, if you designate Ctrl+C as a shortcut, AccuTerm will be unable to send the

CTRL+C

control code when you press

CTRL+C

Tool tip

Tool tip text is displayed when you leave the mouse over a Toolbar tool or Status Bar panel.

Action

The Action field determines what happens when the user clicks the tool. For built-in tools, the Action is the same as the ID. For user-defined tools, you can either enter a string to send to the host, or a script, in this field. The syntax is exactly the same as

function key programming .

Enabled

When a tool is Enabled, the user can click on it. If it is disabled, the click is ignored. For built-in tools,

66 AccuTerm 7 Help

AccuTerm will adjust this property depending on the program and session state.

Visible

If you want the user to see the tool, set the Visible property. If you clear this property, the tool will be hidden. For built-in tools, AccuTerm will adjust this property depending on the program and session state.

Checked

This is the initial state of a Toggle Item, Group Item, Toggle Button or Group Button. For built-in tools,

AccuTerm will adjust this property depending on the program and session state.

Begin group

If the Begin group property is set, there will be a separator before the menu item or toolbar button. This property is also used to identify which buttons belong to a group of Group Items or Group Buttons.

Select Image...

Click the Select Image button to open the

Image Selection dialog to choose an icon for a button or menu

item.

See also:

Band Properties

1.7.4 Image Selection

When you click the Select Image... button in the Tool properties panel, the Image Selection dialog is displayed. Use this dialog to select an icon to display for the tool. You can select both normal (unchecked) and checked icons. For each tool, the image can be one of the built-in icons, or you can specify a file name for the image.

Image source

Choose the image source, or specify that the tool does not have an icon.

Normal image

Check this box if the tool has a normal (un-checked) icon. Enter the image file name (if the tool's icon is loaded from a file at runtime), or the image ID if the tool uses a built-in image. Click the Browse button to browse for image files or built-in images.

Checked image

Check this box if the tool has a checked icon that is displayed when the tool is in its "checked" state.

Enter the image file name (if the tool's icon is loaded from a file at runtime), or the image ID if the tool uses a built-in image. Click the Browse button to browse for image files or built-in images.

Welcome to AccuTerm 7 67

1.8 Auto Dialer

The AccuTerm Auto Dialer gives you an easy way to store and dial phone numbers. The Phone

directory list contains all the phone numbers in the current directory file. You can have as many phone numbers in a directory file as you want. You can also have any number of directory files. The default directory file name is set in

Files & Folder Settings .

To access the Auto Dialer, select the Tools Dialer... from the main menu or click the on the toolbar.

button

Note: the Auto Dialer is only available if the current session is configured to use a Modem for its connection.

Dialing

Using the Auto Dialer is very simple. To dial a number, double click an entry in the phone directory, or highlight the desired number in the phone directory list then click the Dial button.

If you want to dial a number which is not in the directory, simply enter the desired phone number in the

Number field, then click Dial.

Hanging Up

To terminate a connection, click the Hang Up button.

Adding a new entry

To add a new entry to the directory, click on the New button. Enter a phone number and optional description, then click the Add button.

Deleting an entry

To delete the selected entry, click the Delete button.

Modifying an entry

To change an existing description or number, select the entry you want to change, modify the description or number and click the Edit button.

Creating a new directory file

To create a new phone directory file, click the Change Directory button. From the Open Phone

Directory File dialog, select the drive and directory for the new phone directory file, and enter the new phone directory file name. Click OK to create the new phone directory file.

Changing directory files

To select a different phone directory file, click the Change Directory button, then select the new phone directory file. Click OK.

Changing dialing options

To change the dialing options such as your current location, dialing prefix, credit card information, etc., click the Dialing Options button.

Directory file format

Phone directory entries are stored in a standard tab delimited ASCII file with a file extension of .dat. The name is the first field and the phone number is the second field. Each entry has it’s own line. Many applications have the ability to export data to ASCII files so it may be possible to use your existing phone directories from other applicatoins with the Auto Dialer.

68 AccuTerm 7 Help

Welcome to AccuTerm 7 69

1.9 File Transfer

AccuTerm has the ability to transfer files between your computer and the host computer using one of the five built in file transfer protocols: ASCII, Kermit, Xmodem, Ymodem and Zmodem. The manual (non-

MultiValue) file transfer features are accessed from the Tools Upload or Tools Download from the main menu.

AccuTerm also includes a library of file transfer utility programs for use with MultiValue based host systems. For users of MultiValue based systems, using these utilities is the recommended method of exchanging data between your PC and the host system. If you have the MultiValue host programs installed, you can use the File Transfer Wizard to guide you through the file transfer process.

See also:

Manual Upload

Manual Download

MultiValue File Transfer Wizard

MultiValue File Transfer Programs (installation and use)

1.9.1 File Download

Download transfers a file (or files) from the host computer (remote machine) to your workstation.

Downloads may use any of the supported protocols. Usually, to perform a file download, you would start the sending program on the remote machine while in normal terminal emulation mode. Then after the remote sending program has been started, use Tools Download from the main menu to open the

Download dialog, select the appropriate protocol, select the destination directory (and file name if using Kermit or Xmodem), then press

ALT+L

or click the Download button.

If you want to select the destination directory, but not initiate the transfer immediately, you can click the

OK button instead. In this case, all of your selections remain until the next time you open the

Download dialog.

Note: if you are using a MultiValue-based host system (D3, Pick , UniVerse, Unidata, QM, jBase, etc.),

AccuTerm includes a library of MV/BASIC programs which can be installed on the host. When these host-based programs are used, they greatly simplify the exchange of data between the host computer and the work station. See

MultiValue File Transfer and Server Programs

for details on installing and using

these programs.

Directory and File Selection

Click the Browse button to select the destination directory. If you have selected a protocol which requires a file name (ASCII or Xmodem), then you also need to specify a file name for the downloaded file.

Protocol

Select the protocol to be used for downloading the selected files by clicking the appropriate option button: ASCII, Kermit, Xmodem, Ymodem or Zmodem. For details about each of the protocols, see the discussion in the previous section.

Mode

When the protocol is set to ASCII, the mode is text; when it is set to Xmodem or Ymodem, the mode is binary. When using Kermit, you can select either text or binary mode. The mode for Zmodem transfers is determined by the sender.

70 AccuTerm 7 Help

When text mode is selected lines are terminated with a

CR LF

. When binary mode is selected, the files are transferred without alteration.

Encoding

When the transfer mode is text, select the encoding (character set) to use for the downloaded file.

Select None, ANSI, Unicode or UTF-8.

Overwrite

Check this box to allow existing files to be overwritten. Note: Kermit and Ymodem always overwrite.

When Zmodem is selected, the sender controls the action to tak e if a file exists.

1.9.2 File Upload

Upload transfers a file (or files) from the workstation to a remote machine (host). Uploads may use any of the supported protocols. Usually, to perform a file upload, you would first start the receiving

(download) program on the remote machine while in normal terminal emulation mode. Then after the remote receiving program has been started, use Tools Upload from the main menu to open the

Upload dialog, select the appropriate protocol, select the file(s) to upload, then press

ALT+L

or click the

Upload button.

If you want to select items to upload, but not initiate the transfer immediately, click the OK button instead of the Upload button. In this case, all of your selections remain until the next time you open the Upload dialog.

Note: if you are using a MultiValue-based host computer (D3, Pick , UniVerse, Unidata, QM, jBase, etc.), AccuTerm includes a library of MV/BASIC programs which can be installed on the host. When these host-based programs are used, they greatly simplify the exchange of data between the host computer and the work station. See

MultiValue File Transfer and Server Programs

for details on installing and using these programs.

File Selection

Click the Browse button to select the file(s) to upload. If you have selected a protocol which can upload more than one file (Kermit, Ymodem, or Zmodem), you can select multiple files, otherwise select only a single file.

Protocol

Select the protocol to used for uploading the selected files by clicking the appropriate option button:

ASCII, Kermit, Xmodem, Ymodem or Zmodem.

The ASCII protocol by its nature has no error checking. This protocol should only be used when there is a local, error free connection, or when the host system does not support any of the other protocols.

The ASCII protocol only sends text files, and it is not a "batch" protocol - you can only send one file.

You can adjust the line termination to

CR LF

by selecting the desired option in the

File Transfer

category of the Settings dialog box (Tools Settings menu). You can also set the inter-line delay time in the same section (this is the amount of time AccuTerm waits between lines when sending a file).

The Kermit protocol provides error detection and correction. Kermit is a "batch" protocol, so you can send multiple files. Kermit can send either text or binary files; text files are converted to the format required on the receiving machine. Kermit is slower than X/Y/Zmodem, but is the most portable protocol. It often succeeds when the other protocols fail. Several options may be set in the File

Transfer category of the Settings dialog box. These include the retry limit, timeout period, end of line character, eighth bit quoting, data compression and block check type (checksum or CRC).

Welcome to AccuTerm 7 71

Xmodem is a binary protocol which includes error checking. Xmodem is not a "batch" protocol; you can only send one file using Xmodem, and you need to specify the file name to the receiving program.

Files transferred using Xmodem "grow" to the next multiple of 128 bytes. The Xmodem protocol requires an 8 bit data path, and full 8 bit transparency (you cannot use Xon/Xoff handshaking when using Xmodem). You can set the Xmodem timeout period in the

File Transfer category of the Settings

dialog box.

Ymodem is a binary protocol which includes checksum or CRC error checking. Ymodem is available in several "flavors"; the "flavor" used by AccuTerm is Ymodem-G (1K blocks, batch oriented). The

Ymodem protocol requires an 8 bit data path, and full 8 bit transparency (you cannot use Xon/Xoff handshaking when using Ymodem). You can set the Ymodem timeout period in the

File Transfer

category of the Settings dialog box.

Zmodem is a sophisticated file transfer protocol which is popular on PCs and Unix based minicomputers. Zmodem provides robust CRC error checking, several options for existing files and text file conversion. If the receiving machine uses the "rz" program, AccuTerm will send the "rz" command before sending the files, to automatically invoke the receiver’s Zmodem program. The Zmodem protocol requires an 8 bit data path, but full 8 bit transparency is not normally required (you can use Xon/

Xoff handshaking when using Zmodem). You can set the Zmodem timeout period in the

File Transfer

category of the Settings dialog box.

Mode

When the protocol is set to Kermit or Zmodem, a Mode frame is displayed. You can select text or

binary mode. When text mode is selected the line termination is adjusted to match that of the receiving machine. When binary mode is selected, the files are transferred without alteration. ASCII always transfers text files, and Xmodem and Ymodem always transfer in binary mode.

When text mode is selected, AccuTerm can translate the file to the host character set as the file is uploaded. When this option is selected, AccuTerm examines the first few bytes of the file to determine its encoding (ANSI, Unicode or UTF-8), and converts the content to the host encoding automatically.

Overwrite

When the Zmodem protocol is selected, another frame, Overwrite, is displayed. When using Zmodem, the sender controls the action to take if a file exists on the receiving machine. Select never if you want to preserve all existing files. Select always to overwrite existing files. Append will append onto existing files. The newer option replaces existing files only if the file being sent is newer than the existing file. The update option overwrites existing files; non-existing files are not transferred. Use the

resume option for crash recovery after aborted transfers - if a file does not exist on the receiving machine, it is sent; if a file exists, but it is shorter than the file on the sending machine, the remainder of the file is sent; if a file exists, but it is the same length or longer, it is skipped. Note: the resume option

may only be used if the transfer mode is binary.

1.9.3 Import & Export MultiValue Data

To make the most effective use of AccuTerm with your MultiValue based host system, you should install the AccuTerm host programs. These programs implement the Kermit and ASCII file transfer protocols, coordinate the transfer of data between your computer and the host, import and export data in a variety of formats and provide a simple host-to-host transfer facility. See

Installing MultiValue

Host Programs for information on installing the host programs.

In order to understand how to best use AccuTerm’s MultiValue file transfer features, the differences between the PC and MultiValue file systems must be examined. Traditional PC files may be

72 AccuTerm 7 Help

programs, documents or data files; in the typical MultiValue system, programs and documents are stored as individual items (records) in a file, whereas a data file is collection of related items (records) in a file, with an associated file dictionary.

When exchanging data between your computer and your MultiValue host, it is important to realize the difference between “document files” and “data files”.

MultiValue File Transfer Wizard

Use the File Transfer Wizard to simplify the process of uploading or downloading data and documents between your PC and MultiValue host. The wizard uses a series of simple questions to guide you through the file transfer process. You can use the wizard to help you upload or download data or document files.

MultiValue File Transfer Utilities

When transferring “document files” between the PC and MultiValue host, use AccuTerm’s FT utility.

This utility transfers MultiValue items to PC files and vice versa. The key concept is that each

MultiValue item becomes a separate file on the PC.

When transferring “data files” between your PC and your MultiValue host, use the FTD utility. This utility transfers a set of MultiValue items to a single PC file and vice versa. The key concept is that a set of items on the host becomes a single file on the PC.

You can also use AccuTerm to trasnfer data between two MultiValue hosts. The FTPICK utility is used to transfer data from one MultiValue machine to another, either directly (using two concurrent

AccuTerm sessions), or using an intermediate PC file.

Kermit is the recommended file transfer protocol because of the automatic error detection and correction. Also, even with the increased overhead ensuing from Kermit, because the sender and receiver are synchronized and no time delays are required, the Kermit protocol usually performs better than the ASCII protocol when receiving a file.

MultiValue File Transfer Functions:

Installing MultiValue Host Programs

Updating the MultiValue Host Programs

Downloading documents to your PC

Uploading documents from your PC

Downloading data files to your PC (export)

Uploading data files from your PC (import)

Transferring data between two MultiValue hosts

Integrating file transfer functions into MultiValue applications

Welcome to AccuTerm 7 73

1.10 Data Capture

Initiating Data Capture

AccuTerm is capable of capturing data to a file data. The source of the captured data can be either the entire stream of characters received by the workstation (possibly filtering out control characters), or the data which would normally be printed to the slave printer. To start data capture, select Tools

Capture from the main menu or click the options in the Begin Capture dialog.

button on the toolbar. Select the capture file and

Capture to File

Enter the capture file name in this field, or click the Browse button to select the directory and file.

Mode

Select New file only, Overwrite, Append, or Clipboard by clicking the appropriate option button. If you select Overwrite or Append and the file does not exist, AccuTerm will create the file. If you select New file only and the file does exist, a warning will be displayed. If you select a file or folder for which you do not have the necessary permissions to update, a warning will be displayed.

Source

Select the data source to be captured as Received data or Printed data. If Received data is selected, all data received by AccuTerm (except when a file transfer is occurring) will be captured to the specified file. This includes all control characters and escape sequences. If Printed data is selected, all data which would normally be printed to the slave printer port is captured to the selected file, and not printed.

Filter

Select the Text only (strip control codes) option if you want control characters and escape sequences filtered out of the captured data.

Encoding

When capturing text data, select the encoding (character set) to use for the capture file. Select None,

ANSI, Unicode or UTF-8.

To initiate the data capture, click the Start Capture button.

Terminating Data Capture

If data capture is already in effect (as indicated in the status bar), selecting Tools ? Capture or clicking the button on the toolbar will display the End Capture dialog. Click the End Capture button to terminate the capture operation and close the capture file, or click the Continue button to resume capturing.

Data capture can also be controlled by the host using AccuTerm private escape sequences. See

AccuTerm Programming for details.

74 AccuTerm 7 Help

1.11 Troubleshooting

Common problems and solutions are described here. If you cannot find the solution to your problem, you should visit Zumasys' web site and check the FAQs (frequently asked questions) to see if a solution is available. Otherwise, you can send an email to [email protected]

Unanticipated Errors

If AccuTerm encounters an unanticipated error condition, the "Unanticipated Error" dialog box will be displayed showing the error source and description. You can choose to Ignore the error, Retry the failing operation, or Fail (terminates the failing operation).

When an unanticipated error occurs, a log of the error is written to the main program directory (atwin71.

log). If you have email capabilities, you can email this log file to [email protected]

along with a description of the conditions surrounding the error (What you were doing when the error occurred? What version of Windows? Any other programs open?).

Modem Problems

Most modem problems are caused by incompatible modems (hardware) or by incorrect settings on one or both of the modems involved (your modem and the host computer modem). Some common problems are outlined here.

Unable to connect

If you attempt to dial and you hear the typical modem noises, but eventually you receive an error indicating that the connection failed, your modem may not be compatible with the remote modem. Try adjusting the baud rate, data bits, stop bits, parity and handshake on your modem

(Tools->Settings->Connection, click the "Override port settings" option). Set these options to match the port on the host computer. Typical settings are 9600 baud, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, no parity and Rts/Cts handshake.

Garbled characters

If you are able to connect, but get garbled characters displayed on your screen, then it is likely that the baud rate of the remote modem is incorrect. This may be caused by the two modems negotiating a higher baud rate than the host computer port is set to. Most host computers are not capable of adjusting thier baud rate on the fly. Try to set your baud rate to match the host port baud rate (Tools->Settings->Connection, click the "Override port settings" option). Also, try checking the "Connect only at this speed" option.

If you are unable to resolve the problem by changing settings on your end, it may be necessary to adjust the settings of the remote modem. In order to do this you normally need to disconnect the remote modem from the host and connect it to a dumb terminal (or PC running AccuTerm).

Refer to the remote modem documentation for instructions on setting the modem serial port baud rate to a fixed rate, and saving this setting to non-volatile memory. Reconnect the remote modem to the host and see if this resolves your problem.

Disconnects immediately after connecting

Sometimes a modem will successfully connect to the remote system, and then disconnect immediately. One of the causes for this is using incompatible error correction protocol. Often, disabling error correction will solve this. You need to change this setting in Control Panel (Start-

>Settings->Control Panel->Modems). Click the Properties button. Select the Connection tab.

Click the Advanced button).

Welcome to AccuTerm 7 75

Network Problems

Most network problems are caused by incorrect network settings or a network failure. AccuTerm 7 only lets you specify the host name or IP address and optional host port number. Other network settings are beyond the scope of this document.

If you receive a "Timeout" error when attempting to open a network connection, the host computer you are attempting to connect to may not be responding. AccuTerm's default timeout is 15 seconds, which is sufficient for most hosts even across the Internet.

If you receive a "Host unreachable" error then the IP address or subnet mask of your machine may be incorrect. Also, check the IP address of the host you are attempting to connect to.

If your connection drops after an idle period, it may be caused the an "idle timeout" on the host (or a router). If this happens, you may be able to enable the

keepalive option for your network connection.

76 AccuTerm 7 Help

1.12 FIPS-140 Mode

AccuTerm 7 can be installed in "FIPS Mode" by entering the custom feature code "FIPS140" during the installation. In FIPS mode, AccuTerm Secure Shell (SSH) will only use FIPS-approved or FIPScompatible algorithms. While AccuTerm Secure Shell itself is not FIPS certified, the encryption functions used by AccuTerm Secure Shell in FIPS mode are provided by the Microsoft Crypto API

Library DLLs, which are FIPS certified when Windows is running in FIPS mode. When running in FIPS mode, AccuTerm is unable to create RSA keys. However you can import an RSA private key created by another program, for example, puttygen.

Welcome to AccuTerm 7 77

1.13 Contacting Zumasys

Zumasys customer service department may be reached by phone, fax, email or the web.

Zumasys, Inc.

9245 Research Drive

Irvine, CA 92618

USA

Phone:

Fax:

Email:

Web:

1 (866) 986-2797

1 (949) 334-0288 [email protected]

www.zumasys.com

78 AccuTerm 7 Help

2 AccuTerm 7 Automation

2.1 Macro Recorder

Recording a Macro

You can use the Macro Recorder to create an AccuTerm macro by recording a sequence of actions, including sending keystrokes to the host and waiting for responses from the host. To start recording a new macro, use Tools

Macro

Record New Macro from the main menu. When you are finished recording the macro, click the suspend recording by clicking the

button on the Macro Recorder toolbar. You can temporarily

button on the Macro Recorder toolbar. To resume recording, click the button.

When you are finished recording a macro, the Save Macro dialog will be displayed. Here you can give your recorded macro a name (up to 32 characters, letters, numbers or underscore characters only, beginning with a letter), a short description (up to 32 characters) which is displayed in the Tools

Mac ro

Run Macro sub-menu, a detailed description and a shortcut key.

The recorded macro is saved in the "AccuTerm Macros.atsc" script file when you click the Save button.

If you do not have a macro script file open yet, you will be prompted to select the file name for your macro file. When you start AccuTerm, the macro script file (if it exists) is automatically loaded.

Macros are recorded as a sequence of Visual Basic for Applications (VBA) statements.

Running a Macro

To run a macro, select the desired macro from Tools

Macro

Run Macro menu. Alternatively, if the macro has a shortcut key assigned to it, simply press the shortcut key combination to run the macro.

Editing a Macro

You can edit your recorded macros by selecting Tools

Macro

Edit Macros... from the mainmenu.

The macro script will be displayed in the macros tab of the AccuTerm Script Editor window. Macros are written using Visual Basic for Applications (VBA) language. For more information about VBA scripting, see the

Scripting

AccuTerm 7 Automation 79

2.2 Scripting

AccuTerm 7 includes a powerful scripting language based on the popular Microsoft Visual Basic

Programming System, Applications Edition (VBA). The language has been enhanced to allow your script to control almost every aspect of AccuTerm’s operation.

Script Editor

Although the Script Editor is not the only way to create and use VBA scripts with AccuTerm, it is a convenient place to learn about AccuTerm's scripting features. To access the Script Editor, use Tools

Script Editor from AccuTerm's main menu.

The Script Editor window has a standard Windows menu and toolbar with tabs for each of the two script files that AccuTerm supports: Main Script and Macro. User-created script files are loaded into the Main

Script tab; recorded macros are loaded into the Macro tab.

To quickly locate a function or subroutine in the code pane of the script editor, select it from the Proc drop-down list. If you would like the Run command (or the Debug Step Into) to begin execution with the selected procedure, check the Run selected procedure check-box (normally Run begins execution with

Sub Main()

Creating a Script

Scripts are created by entering VBA statements into the script code window. Scripts usually begin with

Sub Main()

and end with

End Sub

. Enter any valid VBA statements between the

Sub Main()

and

End

Sub

statements.

You can create other subroutines and functions which are called by your

Main()

subroutine (or from function keys, popup menus, host commands, etc). Subroutines begin with the

Sub

keyword followed by the name of the subroutine. If the subroutine requires arguments, enclose them in parentheses. The last statement in a subroutine is

End Sub

Functions are similar to subroutines, and begin with the

Function

keyword, and end with the

End

Function

statement. Functions return a value; simply assign the return value to the function name within your function code.

Certain declarations must be placed before the

Main()

subroutine. Declare global variables (using the

Global

keyword), DLL functions (using

Declare Function

Declare Sub

), and user-defined data types (using

Begin Type

and

End Type

) before

Sub Main()

. Within a subroutine or function, declare any local variables using the

Private

Dim

Static

statement.

In addition to local references to subroutines and functions defined in your script, those subroutines and functions may also be called from outside of your script in three ways: First, they may be called by script commands sent by the host (see AccuTerm Programming). Second they may be called by script commands programmed into function keys (see

Keyboard Settings ). Third, they may be called by script

commands executed in response to custom menu and toolbar actions (see

Tool Properties ).

Saving a Script File

After the script has been created or modified, save the script by clicking the

Save or File Save As from the Script Editor menu.

button or use File

80 AccuTerm 7 Help

Loading a Script File

To load a script file, click the button use select File Open from the Script Editor menu.

Loading and Running a Script File

To load and run a script file, use File Run from the Script Editor menu. Enter or browse for the name of the script file to run, and click the OK button. Note: execution always begins with

Sub Main()

Closing the Script Window

Select the File Close from the Script Editor menu to close the script window. If there are any unsaved changes to the current script, you will be prompted to save changes.

Instead of closing the Script Editor window, you can hide it by using Window Hide or activate the main AccuTerm window by using Window AccuTerm 7.

Printing a Script

Select File Print from the Script Editor menu to print the current script. Select File

Print Setup

to select the printer used to print the script.

Editing Scripts

The Script Editor Edit menu provides many editing functions such as Undo, Redo, Cut, Copy, Paste,

Delete, Select all, Indent, Outdent, Find and Replace. The font used in the script window may be changed by using Edit Font, and the dialog editor may be invoked by using Edit User Dialog.

See also:

AccuTerm Object Reference

Running a Script

Debugging a Script

Controlling AccuTerm with Scripts

Script Editor Reference

Script Language Reference

Script Language Extensions

2.2.1 Running a Script

To run a script from the Script Editor, create a new script or load an existing script into the script window. Then use Run Start (resume) from the Script Editor menu or click the toolbar button or press the

key (to single step the script, see

Debugging a Script .) To terminate the script, use Run

End from the menu or click the toolbar button. To suspend execution, use Run Pause from the menu or click the the button.

button on the toolbar. To resume execution, use Start (resume) or click

AccuTerm 7 Automation 81

Unless the Run selected procedure check-box is checked, script execution begins with

Sub Main()

Running a Script from the Command Line

To run a script from the command line, append the name of the script file to the target or command line

(click the AccuTerm icon with the right mouse button, then select Properties). When AccuTerm starts, it loads the script into a hidden script window, and executes its

Main

subroutine. You can use a command line script to open up a number of sessions, the log a user on, etc.

You can the file association for AccuTerm's script files (.atsc) to start AccuTerm from a script file (or a shortcut to a script file). This is essentially the same as running a script from the command line.

Running a Script from a Layout File

You can run a script automatically when opening a layout file. To save a script with a layout file, open all sessions to be included in the layout file. Open the script window, then load the script you want to automatically run. Return to the main AccuTerm window, and select File Save Layout. When the layout file is opened next, the script file will be loaded and its

Sub Main()

will be executed. Note: when

opening a layout file, all sessions are opened before executing the script.

Running a Script from a Function Key

To run a script from a function key, simply program the function key (see

Keyboard Programming ) with

script statements enclosed in brackets

[ ]

. Multiple statements can be separated by a colon (

). A script stored in a function key can contain a maximum of 250 characters. If a more complex script is to be executed from a function key, create it as a separate script file and use the

Chain

statement in the

function key to run the script file. For example:

[Chain "MyComplexScript.atsc"]

Running a Script from a Menu or Toolbar

Running a script from a menu item or toolbar button is similar to running a script from a function key. In the

Menu Designer , set the Action property of the menu or toolbar item to the desired script statements

enclosed in brackets

[ ]

Running a Script from the Host Computer

To run a script from the host system, send the private AccuTerm command:

ESC STX

script

ESC STX

script

See AccuTerm Programming for details.

2.2.2 Debugging a Script

The Script Editor menu and toolbar provide functions for executing, interrupting, resuming and single stepping a script, and for setting breakpoints and watch expressions.

Run

Start (resume) (

) begins execution at

Sub Main

or resumes execution at the current

82 AccuTerm 7 Help

statement. If the Run selected procedure box is checked, then the procedure in the Proc drop-down list is started instead of

Sub Main

Run

Pause ( or

CTRL+BREAK

) will interrupt execution and enter Break mode.

Debug

Step Into ( or

) will execute the next statement and then enter Break mode. If the next statement calls into a subroutine or function, Step Into will Break in the called procedure.

Debug

Step Over ( or

SHIFT+F8

) is the same as Step Into except that when it reaches a call into a subroutine or function, it will not step into the called procedure. The procedure will run, and Break mode will be entered at the next statement in the current procedure.

Debug

Step Out ( or

CTRL+F8

) causes a called procedure to continue running and enter Break mode when the called procedure returns.

Debug

Toggle Breakpoint ( or

) sets or clears a breakpoint at the current statement. Lines containing breakpoints are marked with a large dot in the left margin.

Debug

Add Watch adds a watch expression based on the variable or function at the cursor position.

Use Step Into to start the script before adding a Watch expression, otherwise a warning is displayed.

To remove a watch expression, click on the Watch tab, select the expression you want to delete, and press the

DELETE

key.

Debug

Quick Watch ( ) will show the value of a variable or expression in the Immediate window. Position the cursor on the desired expression, then use the menu or toolbar button to view the value.

2.2.3 Controlling AccuTerm with Scripts

From a script’s perspective, AccuTerm consists of a set of objects which can be manipulated. The main object,

AccuTerm

, may be used to control the general settings of AccuTerm - those items which are set in the General Options or Files & Folders category of the Settings dialog box. The

Session

object is the most useful object for controlling AccuTerm. Using the

Session

object, you can change any of the session Settings, communicate with the host system, manipulate the screen, etc. The

AccuTerm

Object Reference describes the object structure used to control AccuTerm.

There are several built-in objects which can be referenced while executing scripts. These are the

AccuTerm

object, the

Sessions

collection, the

ActiveSession

object, and the

InitSession

object.

AccuTerm

object

The

AccuTerm

object is the top-level application object, and is described in detail in the next topic.

Sessions

collection

AccuTerm 7 Automation 83

The

Sessions

collection is a collection

Session

objects. There is one

Session

object in the collection for each currently open session. The first session in the collection is

Sessions(0)

Sessions

is simply a shortcut for

AccuTerm.Sessions

The

Session o bject type is described in detail in the next topic.

ActiveSession

object

The

ActiveSession

object is an object of type

Session

, which refers to the currently active session. The currently active session is the session whose title bar is highlighted.

InitSession

object

The

InitSession

object is an object of type

Session

, which refers to the session which initiated execution of the current script. This may not be the same as

ActiveSession

, since script execution could be initiated from a non-active session under host program control.

2.2.4 Script Language Extensions

Several new statements have been added to the VBA language used by AccuTerm. These extensions implement features which may be useful in AccuTerm scripts.

AppActivate statement

AppClose statement

AppFind function

AppGetActive function

AppGetPosition statement

AppGetState function

AppHide statement

AppList statement

AppMaximize statement

AppMinimize statement

AppMove statement

AppRestore statement

AppSetState statement

OpenFileName function

Pause statement

Random function

SaveFileName function

Sleep statement

Word function

WordCount function

84 AccuTerm 7 Help

2.2.4.1

Extensions

2.2.4.1.1 AppActivate statement

Syntax:

AppActivate(

title$ )

Description:

Activates the application identified by

title$

. If no window exists with

title$

, the first window with a title that begins with

title$

is activated. If no window matches, an error occurs.

2.2.4.1.2 AppClose statement

Syntax:

AppClose

names$

Description:

Closes the named application. The

names$

parameter is a String containing the name of the application.

If the

names$

parameter is absent, then the

AppClose statement closes the active application.

2.2.4.1.3 AppFind function

Syntax:

AppFind(

name$ )

Description:

Returns a String containing the full name of the application matching the partial

name$

2.2.4.1.4 AppGetActive function

Syntax:

AppGetActive( )

Description:

Returns a String containing the name of the active application.

2.2.4.1.5 AppGetPosition statement

Syntax:

AppGetPosition

X, Y, width,

height

[

name$

]

Description:

Retrieves the position of the named application.

X, Y, width,

height

are integer variables into which the applications position and size are stored.

Name$

is the name of the application whose size is being retrieved. If

name$

is not specified, then the currently active application is assumed.

AccuTerm 7 Automation 85

2.2.4.1.6 AppGetState function

Syntax:

AppGetState(

name$ )

Description:

Returns an Integer specifying the state of the top-level window.

2.2.4.1.7 AppHide statement

Syntax:

AppHide

name$

Description:

Hides the named application.

2.2.4.1.8 AppList statement

Syntax:

AppList

AppNames$

()

Description:

Fills an array with the names of all open applications. The

AppNames$

parameter must specify either a zero- or one-dimensioned dynamic String array. The array will be redimensioned to match the number of open applications. After calling this function, you can use

LBound

and

UBound

to determine the new size of the array.

2.2.4.1.9 AppMaximize statement

Syntax:

AppMaximize

name$

Description:

Maximizes the named application.

2.2.4.1.10 AppMinimize statement

Syntax:

AppMinimize

name$

Description:

Minimizes the named application.

2.2.4.1.11 AppMove statement

Syntax:

AppMove

[

name$

]

Description:

Sets the upper left corner of the named application to a given location.

86 AccuTerm 7 Help

2.2.4.1.12 AppRestore statement

Syntax:

AppRestore

name$

Description:

Restores the named application.

2.2.4.1.13 AppSetState statement

Syntax:

AppSetState

newstate

[

name$

]

Description:

Maximizes, minimizes, or restores the named application, depending on the value of

newstate

. The application is maximized if

newstate

is 1, minimized if

newstate

is 2 and restored if

newstate

is 3.

2.2.4.1.14 AppShow statement

Syntax:

AppShow

name$

Description:

Shows the named application.

2.2.4.1.15 AppSize statement

Syntax:

AppSize

width,

height

[

name$

]

Description:

Sets the size of the named application.

2.2.4.1.16 Chain statement

Syntax:

Chain

filename

[

arguments

]

Chain

filename | macroname

[

arguments

]

Description:

This statement transfers control to the specified script file.

Filename

is a string expression, and may contain a complete path name. If

macroname

is present, it must be separated from

filename

by a vertical bar ( | ) and execution begins with subroutine

macroname

. Otherwise, execution begins with

Sub

Main()

in the new script file. Optional

arguments

may be appended to the filename string separated by a space character. The arguments may e retrieved in the chained-to script by using the

Command() function. Execution never returns to the calling script. Note: both

filename

and

macroname

and optional

arguments

are contained in a single string expression, such as:

Chain "C:\ATWIN\SCRIPTS\MYSCRIPT.SCR|FOO IMAGE XX.JPG"

AccuTerm 7 Automation 87

2.2.4.1.17 Command() function

Syntax:

Command()

Data type: string

Description:

This function returns the command line. If the script was invoked from another script using the

Chain statement, the command line is taken from the

Chain

statement argument.

2.2.4.1.18 FileExists function

Syntax:

FileExists(

name$ )

Description:

Returns True if file exists, otherwise returns False.

2.2.4.1.19 Item function

Syntax:

Item(

text$, first, last

[

delimiter$

]

)

Description:

Returns all the items between

first

and

last

within the specified formatted text list. Items are substrings of a delimited text string. Items, by default, are separated by commas and/or end-of-lines. This can be changed by specifying different delimiters in the

delimiter$

parameter.

2.2.4.1.20 ItemCount function

Syntax:

ItemCount(

text$

[

delimiter$

]

)

Description:

Returns an Integer containing the number of items in the specified delimited text. Items are substrings of a delimited text string. Items, by default, are separated by commas and/or end-of-lines. This can be changed by specifying different delimiters in the

delimiter$

parameter.

2.2.4.1.21 Line function

Syntax:

Line(

text$, first, last )

Description:

Returns a String containing a single line or a group of lines between

first

and

last

2.2.4.1.22 LineCount function

Syntax:

LineCount(

text$ )

88 AccuTerm 7 Help

Description:

Returns an Integer representing the number of lines in

text$

2.2.4.1.23 OpenFileName function

Syntax:

OpenFileName(

[

title$

[

extension$

]]

)

Description:

Displays a dialog box that prompts the user to select from a list of files, returning the full pathname of the file the user selects or a zero-length string if the user selects Cancel. If

title$

is specified, then it is used as the title of the dialog box, otherwise, “Open” is used. If

extension$

is specified, then it specifies a list of file types and extensions - type:ext[,ext][;type:ext[,ext]]… where type is a description of the type of file, and ext is the extension pattern. For example, to display “All Files” and “Documents”, the

extension$

argument might be:

"All files:*.*;Documents:*.txt,*.doc"

2.2.4.1.24 Pause statement

Syntax:

Pause

Seconds

Description:

This statement causes the script to pause for the specified number of seconds. While the script is paused, normal terminal functions are operational, including any file transfers in progress.

2.2.4.1.25 Random function

Syntax:

Random(

min , max)

Description:

Returns a Long value greater than or equal to

min

and less than or equal to

max

2.2.4.1.26 SaveFileName function

Syntax:

SaveFileName(

[

title$

[

extension$

]]

)

Description:

Displays a dialog box that prompts the user to select from a list of files, returning the full pathname of the file the user selects or a zero-length string if the user selects Cancel. If

title$

is specified, then it is used as the title of the dialog box, otherwise, “Save As” is used. If

extension$

is specified, then it specifies a list of file types (see

OpenFileName for details).

2.2.4.1.27 Shell function

Syntax:

Shell(

command$

, [

WindowType

]

)

Description:

Executes a Windows or DOS command. If

command

specifies a file or URL, the file or URL is opened

AccuTerm 7 Automation 89

using the default application defined for that file. The return value is non-zero if the function succeeds.

The

WindowType

argument is optional and specifies the window state of the executed program:

0=hidden, 1=normal, 2=minimized (default), 3=maximized, 4=normal but not activated, 6=minimized but not activated.

2.2.4.1.28 Sleep statement

Syntax:

Sleep

millieconds

Description:

This statement causes the script to pause for the specified number of milliseconds. While the script is paused, normal terminal functions are operational, including any file transfers in progress.

2.2.4.1.29 Word function

Syntax:

Word(

text$, first, last )

Description:

Returns a String containing a single word or a group of words between

first

and

last

2.2.4.1.30 WordCount function

Syntax:

WordCount(

text$ )

Description:

Returns an Integer representing the number of words in

text$

. Words are separated by spaces, tabs, and end-of-lines.

90 AccuTerm 7 Help

2.3 Object Reference

AccuTerm 7 exposes a rich COM/OLE/ActiveX object structure. This allows AccuTerm to act as an

Automation Server to any number of client applications. AccuTerm’s objects are arranged in a hierarchy, with the

AccuTerm

application object at the top. The object hierarchy is shown in diagram below.

Properties

To reference a property, simply append a period (.) followed by the property name to an object variable of the appropriate type. To get the value of a property, assign the property reference to a variable of the appropriate type; to set the value, assign an appropriate expression, constant or variable to the property reference.

Methods

A method is a subroutine or function call. To reference a method, simply append a period (.) followed by the method name to an object variable of the appropriate type. Function methods return a value; for these methods, assign the result to a variable of the appropriate type. Some methods accept one or more arguments separated by commas. If the method also returns a value, enclose the argument list in parentheses. Optional arguments are shown enclosed in brackets [ ]; the brackets are not part of the syntax.

Events

Certain of AccuTerm’s objects have the ability to fire events. To use events, the client application must be capable of responding to events. For example, to use the

Session

object’s

DataReady

event, the following declaration is required in a VB form or class:

Dim WithEvents objSession As AccuTermClasses.Session

Type Library

AccuTerm 7 includes a type library, ATWIN71.TLB, which contains information about AccuTerm’s public objects, including their properties, methods, events, arguments and constants. When specifying the object type in a declaration, always use the type library as a reference. This will ensure compatibility with future versions of AccuTerm. For example, to declare a VB object variable as type “AccuTerm”, use the following declaration:

Dim obj As AccuTermClasses.AccuTerm

AccuTerm 7 Automation 91

See also:

2.3.1 The AccuTerm Object

The

AccuTerm

object is AccuTerm’s top-level application object. To access the

AccuTerm

object of a running instance of AccuTerm, use the following syntax:

Dim obj as Object

Set obj = GetObject(, "ATWin32.AccuTerm")

To create a new instance of AccuTerm, use:

Dim obj as Object

Set obj = CreateObject("ATWin32.AccuTerm")

The properties and methods of the

AccuTerm

object are described in the following pages. Use these properties and methods to control the overall application. The

AccuTerm

object contains the

Sessions collection, which has one element for each open session. The

ActiveSession

property may be used to obtain a reference to the

Session

object which is currently active.

AccuTerm properties

ActiveSession property

AutoClose property

Common property

CustomMouseTable property

FuncBarPos property

FuncBarStyle property

FuncBarVisible property

Height property

Left property

Menu property

NoCloseWarning property

NoConnectWizard property

NoWelcomePage property

PhoneBookName property

ProductLicenseType property

ProductName property

ProductRelease property

ProductSerialNumber property

RecentListSize property

RegisteredCompany property

RegisteredLocation property

RegisteredUser property

92 AccuTerm 7 Help

SesionBarVisible property

Sessions property

SingleInstance property

StatusLineVisible property

ToolbarVisible property

AccuTerm methods

SettingsDialog method

Show method

Terminate method

2.3.1.1

AccuTerm properties

2.3.1.1.1 ActiveSession property

Syntax:

Set

object = AccuTerm.ActiveSession

Data type: Session object

Description:

The

ActiveSession

object is an object of type

Session

, which refers to the currently active session.

The currently active session is the session whose title bar is highlighted.

2.3.1.1.2 AutoClose property

Syntax:

AccuTerm.AutoClose

Data type: boolean

Description:

If non-zero, then when the last open session is closed, AccuTerm will terminate.

See also:

Session AutoClose property

2.3.1.1.3 Common property

Syntax:

AccuTerm.Common

AccuTerm 7 Automation 93

Data type: collection object

Description:

Returns a reference to the

Common collection object. The

Common

collection may be used to save global variables so that they may be shared between different instances of scripts and OLE clients.

2.3.1.1.3.1 Common collection

Syntax:

Common.Clear

Common(

key) = value

variable = Common(key)

Description:

The

Common

collection is used to store values which may be saved between script executions, or shared with between several running scripts. That is, one session can set a value in the

Common

collection, which another session can retrieve it. Items stored in the

Common

collection are referenced by "keys".

The

key

is a string argument. The values stored in the

Common

collection are variants, and thus can contain any data type. The

Common

collection can be reset by using the

Clear

method.

2.3.1.1.4 CustomMouseTable property

Syntax:

AccuTerm.CustomMouseTable

Data type: string

Description:

This is the file name of the global mouse table file. See

Mouse Pattern Matching

for more information on using a custom mouse table.

See also:

Session CustomMouseTable property

2.3.1.1.5 FuncBarPos property

Syntax:

AccuTerm.FuncBarPos

Data type: integer

Description:

Set to zero to show the function key bar at the bottom of the window, or 1 to show the bar at the top of the window.

2.3.1.1.6 FuncBarStyle property

Syntax:

AccuTerm.FuncBarStyle

Data type: integer

94 AccuTerm 7 Help

Description:

Set to 1 to display the function key number as a tiny number in the corner of the function key buttons, or

0 to not display the key number.

2.3.1.1.7 FuncBarVisible property

Syntax:

AccuTerm.FuncBarVisible

Data type: boolean

Description:

Set to True (non-zero) to display AccuTerm’s function key bar, otherwise set to False (zero).

2.3.1.1.8 Height property

Syntax:

AccuTerm.Height

Data type: long

Description:

This is the application window height in pixels.

2.3.1.1.9 LargeIcons property

Syntax:

AccuTerm.LargeIcons

Data type: boolean

Description:

Set to True (non-zero) to show large icons in the toolbar, otherwise small icons are used.

2.3.1.1.10 LayoutFilename property

Syntax:

AccuTerm.LayoutFilename

Data type: string

Description:

This is the file name of the currently open layout file, or null if no layout is open. This property is readonly.

2.3.1.1.11 Left property

Syntax:

AccuTerm.Left

Data type: long

AccuTerm 7 Automation 95

Description:

This is the horizontal position of the application window in pixels.

2.3.1.1.12 Menu property

Syntax:

Set

menu_object = AccuTerm.Menu

Data type: menu object

Description:

This returns a reference to the application

object, which may be used to customize AccuTerm’s menus and toolbars.

See also:

Menu Object

2.3.1.1.13 NoCloseWarning property

Syntax:

AccuTerm.NoCloseWarning

Data type: integer

Description:

Set to True (non-zero) to suppress the disconnect warning when closing a session.

2.3.1.1.14 PhoneBookName property

Syntax:

AccuTerm.PhoneBookName

Data type: string

Description:

This is the file name of the Auto Dialer phone directory.

2.3.1.1.15 ProductLicenseType property

Syntax:

AccuTerm.ProductLicenseType

Data type: integer

Description:

This read-only property returns the product license type: 1=single user, 2=site license, 3=enterprise license, 9=demonstration version.

96 AccuTerm 7 Help

2.3.1.1.16 ProductName property

Syntax:

AccuTerm.ProductName

Data type: string

Description:

This read-only property returns the string “ACCUTERM/WIN32”.

2.3.1.1.17 ProductRelease property

Syntax:

AccuTerm.ProductRelease

Data type: string

Description:

This read-only property returns the current release of AccuTerm 7.

2.3.1.1.18 ProductSerialNumber property

Syntax:

AccuTerm.ProductSerialNumber

Data type: long

Description:

This read-only property returns the serial number of AccuTerm 7.

2.3.1.1.19 RecentListSize property

Syntax:

AccuTerm.RecentListSize

Data type: integer

Description:

Specifies the number of entries in the recent file list.

2.3.1.1.20 RegisteredCompany property

Syntax:

AccuTerm.RegisteredCompany

Data type: string

Description:

This read-only property returns the registered company name.

AccuTerm 7 Automation 97

2.3.1.1.21 RegisteredLocation property

Syntax:

AccuTerm.RegisteredLocation

Data type: string

Description:

This read-only property returns the registered location.

2.3.1.1.22 RegisteredUser property

Syntax:

AccuTerm.RegisteredUser

Data type: string

Description:

This read-only property returns the registered user name.

2.3.1.1.23 SessionBarVisible property

Syntax:

AccuTerm.SessionBarVisible

Data type: integer

Description:

Set to True (non-zero) to display AccuTerm’s session bar, otherwise set to False (zero).

2.3.1.1.24 Sessions property

Syntax:

AccuTerm.Sessions

Data type: collection of session objects

Description:

Returns a reference to the

Sessions

collection. This collection has one member for each open session.

The first session is

Sessions(0)

2.3.1.1.25 SingleInstance property

Syntax:

AccuTerm.SingleInstance

Data type: integer

Description:

Set to True (non-zero) to allow only one instance of AccuTerm. To allow multiple instances, set to False

(zero).

98 AccuTerm 7 Help

2.3.1.1.26 StatusLineVisible property

Syntax:

AccuTerm.StatusLineVisible

Data type: integer

Description:

Set to True (non-zero) to display AccuTerm’s status line, otherwise set to False (zero).

2.3.1.1.27 ToolbarVisible property

Syntax:

AccuTerm.ToolbarVisible

Data type: integer

Description:

Set to True (non-zero) to display AccuTerm’s tool bar, otherwise set to False (zero).

2.3.1.1.28 Top property

Syntax:

AccuTerm.Top

Data type: long

Description:

This is the vertical position of the application window in pixels.

2.3.1.1.29 TrackKeyboardState property

Syntax:

AccuTerm.TrackKeyboardState

Data type: integer

Description:

If this property is True, AccuTerm tracks the state of the CapsLock and ScrollLock keys. When tracking is enabled, the state of these keys is saved and restored when the user switches to and from the

AccuTerm application.

2.3.1.1.30 Visible property

Syntax:

AccuTerm.Visible

Data type: boolean

Description:

Set to True (non-zero) to make AccuTerm’s main window visible. Set to False to hide AccuTerm’s main window.

AccuTerm 7 Automation 99

2.3.1.1.31 Width property

Syntax:

AccuTerm.Width

Data type: long

Description:

This is the application window width in pixels.

2.3.1.1.32 WindowState property

Syntax:

AccuTerm.WindowState

Data type: integer

Description:

This is the state of AccuTerm’s main window. Set to 0 for normal, 1 for minimized or 2 for maximized.

See also:

Session WindowState property

2.3.1.2

AccuTerm methods

2.3.1.2.1 Activate method

Syntax:

AccuTerm.Activate

Description:

Makes AccuTerm the active application.

See also:

Session Activate method

2.3.1.2.2 Arrange method

Syntax:

AccuTerm.Arrange

[

style

]

Description:

Arranges AccuTerm session windows. Set

style

to 0 for cascade, 1 for tile horizontal, 2 for tile vertical and 3 to arrange icons.

2.3.1.2.3 Close method

Syntax:

AccuTerm.Close

[

prompt

]

100 AccuTerm 7 Help

Description:

Closes AccuTerm. If

prompt

is True (non-zero) and any changes have been made to session configuration settings, the user will be prompted save the changed settings.

This method is the same as the Terminate method, but is not available when using late binding.

See also:

Terminate method

Session Close method

2.3.1.2.4 Hide method

Syntax:

AccuTerm.Hide

Description:

This method makes AccuTerm’s main window invisible.

See also:

Session Hide method

2.3.1.2.5 Move method

Syntax:

AccuTerm.Move

left [

top [

width [

height ]]]

Description:

Repositions and resizes AccuTerm’s main window. The positions and dimensions are specified in pixels.

See also:

Session Move method

2.3.1.2.6 OpenLayout method

Syntax:

AccuTerm.OpenLayout

filename

Description:

This method opens the specified layout file. When using this method to open a layout file, any script attached to the layout file is ignored.

2.3.1.2.7 Resize method

Syntax:

AccuTerm.Resize

width,height

Description:

Resizes AccuTerm’s main window. The dimensions are specified in pixels.

See also:

Session Resize method

AccuTerm 7 Automation 101

2.3.1.2.8 SaveLayout method

Syntax:

AccuTerm.SaveLayout [

filename]

Description:

This method saves the current layout in the specified layout file. If

filename

is not specified, the currently open layout file is used. If there is no currently open layout file, the user is prompted for a file name.

2.3.1.2.9 SettingsDialog method

Syntax:

AccuTerm.SettingsDialog

[

InitSel

, [

Categories

]]

Description:

This method displays AccuTerm's Settings dialog box. You can specify the initially selected item

InitSel

(see table below), and a list of

Categories

to show in the categories tree. The

Categories

list is a string with a single letter for each main category to display. Letters which may be used for

InitSel

Categories

are:

Category code

Tab code

(2K2)

2.3.2 The Menu Object

Both the

AccuTerm

object and each session object contain a

object. The menu object is the root object of AccuTerm’s menu structure. When no sessions are open, the menu object member of the

AccuTerm object is the operational menu. When any session is open, the menu object member of the active session is the operational menu. The menu object contains a number of

MnuBand objects, which

contain

Menu properties

See also:

AccuTerm Menu property

Session Menu property

AccuTerm 7 Automation 103

2.3.2.1

Menu properties

2.3.2.1.1 Count property

Syntax:

menu

Count

Data type: integer

Description:

This read-only property is the number of

MnuBand objects contained in the menu.

2.3.2.1.2 Item property

Syntax:

menu

Item

(

toolID

)

Data type:

MnuTool

object

Description:

This array property returns a reference to a

MnuTool object for the specified

toolID

. Each menu item, toolbar button, and status bar field has a

toolID

that identifies the tool (see

Customizing the Menu and

Toolbar for more information). You can use this property to customize menu tool properties from a script.

2.3.2.1.3 MnuBands property

Syntax:

menu.MnuBands

(

index

)

Data type: array of

MnuBand

objects

Description:

This read-only property array returns a

MnuBand object corresponding to the specified one-based index.

2.3.2.2

The MnuBand Object

Menu object contains zero or more

MnuBand objects. Examples of

MnuBand

objects are the main menu, the toolbar, the status bar and popup menus. A

MnuBand

object contains zero or more

MnuTool

objects.

MnuBand properties

104 AccuTerm 7 Help

2.3.2.2.1 MnuBand properties

2.3.2.2.1.1 BandType property

Syntax:

mnuband.BandType

Data type: integer

Description:

This property is the type of band: 0 = toolbar, 1 = main menu, 2 = popup menu, 3 = status bar, 4 = session bar.

2.3.2.2.1.2 Caption property (MnuBand)

Syntax:

mnuband

Caption

Data type: string

Description:

This property is the type of band: 0 = toolbar or status bar, 1 = main menu, 2 = popup menu or submenu.

2.3.2.2.1.3 Count property (MnuBand)

Syntax:

mnuband

Count

Data type: integer

Description:

This read-only property is the number of

MnuTool objects contained in the band.

2.3.2.2.1.4 DockingArea property

Syntax:

mnuband

DockingArea

Data type: integer

Description:

This property specifies the position of the toolbar or status bar: 1 = top, 2 = bottom, 4 = left, 8 = right.

2.3.2.2.1.5 MnuTools property

Syntax:

mnuband

MnuTools

(

index

)

Data type: array of

MnuTool

objects

Description:

AccuTerm 7 Automation 105

This read-only property array returns a

MnuTool object corresponding to the specified one-based index.

2.3.2.2.1.6 Name property

Syntax:

mnuband

Name

Data type: string

Description:

This read-only property is the name of the

MnuBand object.

2.3.2.2.1.7 Visible property (MnuBand)

Syntax:

mnuband

Visible

Data type: boolean

Description:

This property is True if the band is visible.

2.3.2.3

The MnuTool Object

The

MnuTool

object is at the lowest level of the

Menu object hierarchy, and contains properties for the

caption, icon, state and action of a menu item, toolbar button or status bar field.

MnuTool properties

2.3.2.3.1 MnuTool properties

2.3.2.3.1.1 Action property

Syntax:

mnutool

Action

Data type: string

Description:

This property contains the action to perform when the menu item or button is clicked. All built-in menu items have a default action associated with them, but an optional action can be specified by setting this property. Set this property to null to perform the default action. Otherwise, to execute a macro, enclose the macro statement in square brackets (

[ ]

). To transmit a character sequence to the host, set this property to the desired sequence.

106 AccuTerm 7 Help

2.3.2.3.1.2 Caption property (MnuTool)

Syntax:

mnutool

Caption

Data type: string

Description:

This property is the caption displayed in the higher-level menu item. The caption is not displayed in a toolbar.

2.3.2.3.1.3 Checked property

Syntax:

mnutool

Checked

Data type: boolean

Description:

Set this property to True to display a checked box next to the caption in popup menus or sub-menus.

2.3.2.3.1.4 Enabled property

Syntax:

mnutool

Enabled

Data type: integer

Description:

Set this property to True to enable a menu item. If this property is False, the item is disabled and is displayed in a gray color.

2.3.2.3.1.5 ToolID property

Syntax:

mnutool

ToolID

Data type: long

Description:

This property is the tool ID.

2.3.2.3.1.6 ToolTipText property

Syntax:

mnutool

ToolTipText

Data type: string

AccuTerm 7 Automation 107

Description:

This property is the text which is displayed in a floating window when the cursor is paused over a menu item or toolbar button.

2.3.2.3.1.7 Visible property (MnuTool)

Syntax:

mnutool

Visible

Data type: boolean

Description:

This property is True if the tool (menu item or toolbar button) is visible.

2.3.3 The ScreenBlock Object

The

ScreenBlock

object is created by the

Session.GetBlock

method, and is used to preserve and

restore the contents of a portion of the terminal screen. The

Session.SetBlock

method restores the

contents of the

ScreenBlock

object back onto the terminal screen.

See also:

GetBlock method

SetBlock method

2.3.4 The Server Object

The Server object, in conjunction with the FTSERVER host program, provides a simple method for performing common host database operations, including reading and writing files, executing commands, calling BASIC subroutines and converting data. The Server object can be used in any ActiveX enabled client application, such as Microsoft Word, Excel, and Visual Basic.

Server methods

108 AccuTerm 7 Help

WriteItem method

Server properties

AccountName property

ErrorMode property

LastError property

LastErrorMessage property

MDName property

ServerID property

ServerName property

UnicodeDelimiters property

UserName property

2.3.4.1

Server properties

2.3.4.1.1 AccountName property

Syntax:

Server.AccountName

Data type: string

Description:

Returns the name of the account the server object is connected to.

2.3.4.1.2 ErrorMode property

Syntax:

Server.ErrorMode

Data type: integer

Description:

Set to 0 to ignore errors, 1 to raise an error to the calling application, 2 to display error message dialog box

2.3.4.1.3 LastError property

Syntax:

Server.LastError

Data type: integer

Description:

Returns any error number from the previous operation, or zero if no error.

2.3.4.1.4 LastErrorMessage property

Syntax:

Server.LastErrorMessage

AccuTerm 7 Automation 109

Data type: string

Description:

Returns any error message from the previous operation, or null if no error.

2.3.4.1.5 MDName property

Syntax:

Server.MDName

Data type: string

Description:

Returns the file name of the master dictionary (MD or VOC).

2.3.4.1.6 ServerID property

Syntax:

Server.ServerID

Data type: string

Description:

Returns a unique identifier for the server object.

2.3.4.1.7 ServerName property

Syntax:

Server.ServerName

Data type: string

Description:

Returns the server name assigned using FTSETUP.

2.3.4.1.8 UnicodeDelimiters property

Syntax:

Server.UnicodeDelimiters

Data type: integer

Description:

Set to 1 to convert system delimiter characters to Unicode, or 0 to use traditional character values for system delimiters. When Unicode delimiters are specified, AM is U+F8FE, VM is U+F8FD and SVM is

U+F8FC.

2.3.4.1.9 UserName property

Syntax:

Server.UserName

110 AccuTerm 7 Help

Data type: string

Description:

Returns the name of the user logged on to the host.

2.3.4.2

Server methods

2.3.4.2.1 AddItem Method

Syntax:

Server.AddItem

file, ID, data

Description:

Writes a new item to the Pick database. If the item already exists, error 223 is returned.

2.3.4.2.2 CallSub method

Syntax:

Result = Server.CallSub (

SubName

[

function

[

data

]]

)

Data type: string

Description:

Calls a BASIC subroutine (

SubName

) passing

function

and

data

as arguments. The BASIC subroutine must accept 4 arguments: Function, Data, ErrorCode, ErrorMessage. The returned value is stored in the

Data argument before the subroutine returns. If an error occurs, the subroutine must set the ErrorCode argument to a non-zero value, and place the error message text in the ErrorMessage argument.

2.3.4.2.3 Connect method

Syntax:

Result = Server.Connect(

[

ServerName

]

)

Data type: boolean

Description:

Connects the server object to an AccuTerm session in server mode. If the optional

ServerName

is specified, then the object is connected to the specified server; otherwise, the first session which is in server mode is used.

2.3.4.2.4 DeleteItem method

Syntax:

Server.DeleteItem

file, ID

Description:

Deletes an item from the Pick database. If the item is locked by another process, error 235 is returned.

AccuTerm 7 Automation 111

2.3.4.2.5 Disconnect method

Syntax:

Server.Disconnect

Description:

Disconnects the server object.

2.3.4.2.6 Download method (Server)

Syntax:

Server.Download

SourceFile, SourceIDs, TargetFolder

[

Protocol

[

Binary

[

Overwrite

]]]

Description:

Uses the AccuTerm FT program to download files from the host to the PC.

SourceFile

is the host file name;

SourceIDs

is a list of item-IDs, an asterisk (*) for all items, or an open parenthesis followed by the name of a saved list. Separate IDs with

CR LF

;

TargetFolder

is the destination directory.

Protocol is 1 for

Kermit (default) or 0 for ASCII protocol. If

Binary is zero (default) attribute marks are translated into

CR LF

Overwrite is non-zero to allow existing files to be overwritten (default is no overwrite).

2.3.4.2.7 Execute method

Syntax:

Result = Server.Execute(

command

[

data

[

capture

]]

)

Data type: string

Description:

Executes a TCL

command

on the host system.

Data

is passed as “stacked input” to the command. If

capture is non-zero, the result of the command is returned, otherwise, the return value is empty.

2.3.4.2.8 Export method

Syntax:

Server.Export

SourceFile, SourceIDs, TargetFile, TargetFields

[

Header

[

Explode

[

Protocol

[

Delimiter

[

Overwrite

]]]]]

Description:

This method uses the AccuTerm FTD program to download a file from the MultiValue host to the PC.

SourceFile

is the host file name.

SourceIDs

is a list of item-IDs, an asterisk (*) for all items, or an open parenthesis followed by the name of a saved list. Separate IDs with

CR LF

;

TargetFile

is the destination file. If the destination file has a supported extension (.XLS, .WK1, .WKS, .WB1, .SYM, .DB2, .DBF), the resulting file will be exported in the native format for that file extension.

TargetFields

is a list of fields to include in the destination file; use asterisk (*) for all fields. Separate field names with

CR LF

. If

Header is non-zero, the first line of the exported file will be a “header”. If

Explode is non-zero, single values are repeated for items with multiple values.

Protocol is 1 for Kermit (default) or 0 for ASCII protocol. If the destination file does not have a supported extension, then

delimiter is used to specify Tab (0, default) or

Comma (1) delimited ASCII file.

Overwrite is non-zero to allow existing files to be overwritten (default is no overwrite).

112 AccuTerm 7 Help

2.3.4.2.9 FileExists method

Syntax:

Result = Server.

FileExists( file )

Data type: integer

Description:

Returns 1 if file exists on the host account, or 0 if it does not exist.

2.3.4.2.10 IConv method

Syntax:

Result = Server.IConv(

data, code)

Data type: string

Description:

Performs an “input conversion” on

data

. Conversion to be performed is

code

2.3.4.2.11 Import method

Syntax:

Server.Import

SourceFile, TargetFile, Reserved1, Fields

[

Header

[

Skip

[

AutoID

[

AutoIDPrefix

[

AutoIDStart

[

Protocol

[

Delimiter

[

Overwrite

]]]]]]]]

Description:

This method uses the AccuTerm FTD program to upload a file from the PC to the MultiValue host.

SourceFile

is the PC file name.

TargetFile

is the destination file name. If the source file has a supported extension (.XLS, .WK1, .WKS, .WB1, .SYM, .DB2, .DBF), the file will be imported from the native format for that file extension.

Reserved1

is reserved for future use and should be passed as a null string.

Fields

is a list of fields to be imported (dictionary names or attribute numbers, or asterisk (*) for all fields). Separate field names with

CR LF

. If

Header is non-zero, the first line of the imported file is treated as a “header”.

Skip is the number of “header” lines in the source file to skip. If

AutoID is non-zero, then the target item-IDs will be generated by concatenating

AutoIDPrefix to the item sequence starting with

AutoIDStart

Protocol is 1 for Kermit (default) or 0 for ASCII protocol. If the source file does not have a supported extension, then

delimiter is used to specify Tab (0, default) or Comma (1) delimited ASCII file.

Overwrite is non-zero to allow existing items to be overwritten (default is no overwrite).

2.3.4.2.12 IsConnected method

Syntax:

Result = Server.IsConnected(

)

Data type: boolean

Description:

Returns TRUE if server object is connected to the host and the host is running the server application; otherwise returns FALSE.

AccuTerm 7 Automation 113

2.3.4.2.13 ItemExists function

Syntax:

Result = Server.

ItemExists( file , ID )

Data type: integer

Description:

Returns 1 if item exists in the specified file, or 0 if it does not exist or the file cannot be opened.

2.3.4.2.14 OConv method

Syntax:

Result = Server.OConv(

data, code)

Data type: string

Description:

Performs an “output conversion” on

data

. Conversion to be performed is

code

2.3.4.2.15 ReadItem method

Syntax:

Result = Server.ReadItem(

file, ID

[

attr

[

value

[

subvalue

[

locked

]]]]

)

Data type: string

Description:

Reads an item from the MultiValue database and returns the item, attribute, value or sub-value. If the optional

locked

parameter is non-zero, the item is left locked after the read (same as MV/BASIC READU statement). Error 260 is returned if the item was already locked by another process.

2.3.4.2.16 Readnext method

Syntax:

Result = Server.Readnext(

file, attr

[

value

[

subvalue

]]

)

Data type: string

Description:

Reads the next item from the Pick database using the current select list and returns the specified attribute, value or sub-value. If the list is exhausted,

LastError

will be set to –1.

2.3.4.2.17 Upload method (Server)

Syntax:

Server.Upload

SourceFolder, SourceFiles, TargetFile

[

Protocol

[

Binary

[

Overwrite

]]]

Description:

Uses the AccuTerm FT program to upload files from the PC to the host.

SourceFolder

is the PC directory where the files are uploaded from;

SourceFiles

is a list of file names separated by

CR LF

TargetFile

is the destination file.

Protocol is 1 for Kermit (default) or 0 for ASCII protocol. If

Binary is

114 AccuTerm 7 Help

zero (default) attribute marks are translated into

CR LF

Overwrite is non-zero to allow existing files to be overwritten (default is no overwrite).

2.3.4.2.18 UnlockItem method

Syntax:

Server.UnlockItem

[

file,

[

]]

Description:

Unlocks an item locked by the

ReadItem

function. If

file

and

are null, unlocks all items locked by the process.

2.3.4.2.19 WriteItem method

Syntax:

Server.WriteItem

file, ID, data

[

attr

[

value

[

subvalue

[

KeepLocked

]]]]

Description:

Writes an item, attribute, value or sub-value to the Pick database. If the optional

KeepLocked

parameter is non-zero, the item is left locked after the writing (same as MV/BASIC WRITEU statement).

2.3.5 The Session Object

When you use AccuTerm, you create "sessions" to communicate with host computer systems.

AccuTerm’s multiple document interface (MDI) allows you to create as many sessions as you desire, all connected to different host systems (or more than one session to a single host). AccuTerm’s

Session object gives you access to session properties such as port, font, screen colors, etc.) and allows you to invoke session methods (create, delete, input, output, etc.)

Predefined Session Objects

The currently active session may be accessed using the

ActiveSession

object. When a script is invoked from a function key, menu, toolbar button, the host computer system, or from DDE, you can access the session which invoked the script by referencing the

InitSession

object. The

InitSession

object is only valid in the context of a script running in the AccuTerm application.

Creating a New Session

There are two ways to create a new session. First, you can declare a

Session

object variable, and use the

New

keyword with the

Set

statement to create the new session:

Dim S as Session

Set S = New Session

These statements will create a new session. All session properties will be set to their default values.You

access the properties and methods of the session using the

Session

object variable

An alternate way of creating a new session is to use the

Add

method of the

Sessions

collection object as described above.

Session properties

Ansi8Bit property

AnsiAppCursor property

AnsiAppKeypad property

BackgroundPictureFile property

BackgroundPictureMode property

BackgroundTransparency property

Baud property

BkspSendsDel

BoldFont property

BreakKeyAction property

BytesIn property

BytesOut property

Caption property

CaptureFileName property

CaptureMode property

CaptureSource property

Changed property

Charset property

ClientCertificateID property

ConnectTimeout property

CopySelMode property

CursorType property

DataBits property

DefaultCaptureDir property

DefaultXferDir property

DefaultXferMode property

DefaultXferOverwrite property

Device property

DeviceLicenseMode property

DialStatus property

DisableAppMode property

HostCertificateValidation property

HostKeyFingerprint property

HostKeyValidation property

HostName property

HostPort property

AccuTerm 7 Automation 115

116 AccuTerm 7 Help

HostTermType property hWnd property

Icon property

InputMode property

KeepaliveInterval property

KermitCRC property

KermitEOL property

KermitErrRetry property

KermitInitRetry property

KermitQuote property

KermitRept property

KermitTimeout property

Left property

LegibleFont property

LockBaudRate property

LockFKeys property

LockKeyboard property

MapUpperFKeys property

OverrideModemConfig property

PasteEOFChar property

PasteEOFMode property

PasteEOLChar property

PasteEOLMode property

PhoneBookName property

Port property

PrinterColorMode property

PrinterFontBold property

PrinterFontItalic property

PrinterFontName property

PrinterFontSize property

PrinterMode property

PrinterName property

PrinterOrientation property

PrinterPaperSize property

PrinterPaperSource property

PrinterTimeout property

PrintJobEject property

PrintScreenBackground property

PrintScreenEject property

ScreenPrintAdapterScript property

ScreenPrinterName property

ScreenPrintMode property

ScreenPrintOrientation property

ScreenPrintPaperSize property

ScreenPrintPaperSource property

SlavePrintAdapterScript property

SlavePrinterName property

SlavePrintMode property

SSHUseOnlyPreferredCipher property

TelnetBinary property

TelnetBypass property

TelnetKeepaliveIsNOP property

TermType property

TextFileEncoding property

XmodemTimeout property

ZmodemAuto property

ZmodemTimeout property

Session methods

ClearSelection method

AccuTerm 7 Automation 117

118 AccuTerm 7 Help

MouseTableLoad method

MouseTableReset method

Session events

AccuTerm 7 Automation 119

2.3.5.1

Session properties

2.3.5.1.1 Ansi8Bit property

Syntax:

session.Ansi8Bit

Data type: boolean

Description:

If this setting is non-zero, AccuTerm sends 8 bit control codes. Othewise the eqivalent 7-bit escape sequence is sent. This property is only effective when AccuTerm is emulating one of the VT terminals.

2.3.5.1.2 AnsiAppCursor property

Syntax:

session.AnsiAppCursor

Data type: boolean

Description:

If this setting is non-zero, AccuTerm sends "application codes" instead of "cursor codes" when cursor keys are pressed. This property is only effective when AccuTerm is emulating one of the VT terminals.

2.3.5.1.3 AnsiAppKeypad property

Syntax:

session.AnsiAppKeypad

Data type: boolean

Description:

If this setting is non-zero, AccuTerm sends "application codes" instead of numeric characters when key on the numeric keypad are pressed. This property is only effective when AccuTerm is emulating one of the VT terminals.

2.3.5.1.4 Answerback property

Syntax:

session.Answerback

Data type: string

Description:

This is the string that AccuTerm returns to the host system when the host requests the "answerback message".

2.3.5.1.5 AsciiDelay property

Syntax:

session

.AsciiDelay

120 AccuTerm 7 Help

Data type: integer

Description:

Specifies the interline delay used for ASCII file uploads in milliseconds.

2.3.5.1.6 AsciiEOL property

Syntax:

session

.AsciiEOL

Data type: integer

Description:

Specifies the line ending sequence for ASCII file uploads. Set to 0 for

, 1 for

or 2 for

2.3.5.1.7 AutoAnswer property

Syntax:

session.AutoAnswer

Data type: boolean

Description:

If this setting is non-zero, AccuTerm will answer incoming calls when the session is connected to a modem.

2.3.5.1.8 AutoClose property (Session)

Syntax:

session.AutoClose

Data type: boolean

Description:

If this setting is non-zero, AccuTerm will close the session when it becomes "disconnected" (modem disconnects or host system drops network connection).

2.3.5.1.9 BackgroundPictureFile property

Syntax:

session.BackgroundPictureFile

Data type: string

Description:

This is the name of an image file that is used for the session background.

See also:

BackgroundPictureMode property

BackgroundTransparency property

AccuTerm 7 Automation 121

2.3.5.1.10 BackgroundPictureMode property

Syntax:

session.BackgroundPictureMode

Data type: integer

Description:

This property controls how the background picture is scaled: 0 - picture is stretched to fit screen size.

This may alter the picture's aspect ratio; 1 - picture is scaled so that its longest dimension fills the screen. The area not filled by the picture is black; 2 - picture is scaled so that its shortest dimension fills the screen. The longer dimension is cropped.

See also:

BackgroundPictureFile property

BackgroundTransparency property

2.3.5.1.11 BackgroundTransparency property

Syntax:

session.BackgroundTransparency

Data type: integer

Description:

The BackgroundTransparency property specifies the transparency of the background color or the opacity of the background picture, as a percentage. 100% means that the picture is used as the background,

0% means that the background color is used. Values in between blend the background picture and background color.

See also:

BackgroundPictureFile property

BackgroundPictureMode property

2.3.5.1.12 Baud property

Syntax:

session.Baud

Data type: integer

Description:

This is the baud rate used by the serial port attached to the session. This property is only meaningful when the communication device type is "Serial Port". Acceptable baud rates are atBaud300

, atBaud1200

atBaud2400

atBaud9600

atBaud14400

atBaud19200

atBaud38400

atBaud57600 and atBaud115200

2.3.5.1.13 BkspSendsDel property

Syntax:

session.BkspSendsDel

122 AccuTerm 7 Help

Data type: boolean

Description:

If this setting is True (non-zero), pressing the Backspace key causes AccuTerm to send the

DEL

control code. Otherwise, AccuTerm sends the

control code.

2.3.5.1.14 BoldFont property

Syntax:

session.BoldFont

Data type: boolean

Description:

Set to True (non-zero) if terminal font is bold, False (zero) if font is normal.

2.3.5.1.15 BreakKeyAction property

Syntax:

session

BreakKeyAction

Data type: integer

Description:

This property specifies the action to take when the

CTRL+BREAK

key is pressed. The exact interpretation of this property depends on the connection type.

0 - default action - send normal BREAK signal or character

1 - no break key

2 - send normal break (telnet BREAK command or SSH BREAK command)

3 - send alternate break (telnet IP command or SSH SIGINT signal)

256+

break_char

- send

break_char

character (ASCII code)

2.3.5.1.16 BytesIn property

Syntax:

session.BytesIn

Data type: long

Description:

This read-only property returns the number of bytes received from the host since the session was opened.

2.3.5.1.17 BytesOut property

Syntax:

session.BytesOut

Data type: long

Description:

This read-only property returns the number of bytes transmitted to the host since the session was opened.

2.3.5.1.18 CapsLock property

Syntax:

session

.CapsLock

Data type: boolean

Description:

Set to True (non-zero) to set the state of the CapsLock key; set to False (zero) to reset the CapsLock key state.

2.3.5.1.19 Caption property

Syntax:

session.Caption

Data type: string

Description:

Set or returns the session caption (title).

2.3.5.1.20 CaptureFileName property

Syntax:

session.CaptureFileName

Data type: string

Description:

The name of the file name used in the last capture operation. This property is read-only.

2.3.5.1.21 CaptureMode property

Syntax:

session.CaptureMode

Data type: integer

Description:

The current capture mode (0 to create a new file, 1 to overwrite an existing file, 2 to append to existing file, or 3 to capture to the clipboard instead of a file). If capture mode has 128 added to it, this indicates that control characters are being filtered from the captured data. This property is read-only.

2.3.5.1.22 CaptureSource property

Syntax:

session.CaptureSource

AccuTerm 7 Automation 123

124 AccuTerm 7 Help

Data type: integer

Description:

The current capture source (1 to capture received data, 2 to capture printed data). This property is readonly.

2.3.5.1.23 Changed property

Syntax:

session.Changed

Data type: integer

Description:

Non-zero if the settings for the session have been modified. Changing this property to zero prevents the warning about saving changes when the session is closed.

2.3.5.1.24 Charset property

Syntax:

session.Charset

Data type: string

Description:

The character set used by the host. The only valid values are NULL for the default character set for the selected terminal emulation, or "NATIVE" if the host uses the current 8-bit (non-Unicode) Windows character set.

2.3.5.1.25 ClientCertificateID property

Syntax:

session.ClientCertificateID

Data type: string

Description:

If an SSL/Telnet host requires the client to authenticate using a certificate, this property contains the name and/or hash of the desired client certificate. The client certificate must be installed in the current user's "MY" certificate store.

2.3.5.1.26 Col & Row properties

Syntax:

session.Col

session.Row

Data type: integer

Description:

The current cursor column or row. The leftmost column is zero and the topmost row is zero. Also see the

Locate method .

AccuTerm 7 Automation 125

2.3.5.1.27 Color property

Syntax:

session.Color

Data type: integer

Description:

This is the foreground/background color index used when text is displayed using the

SetText

method.

To determine the color index, select the foreground and background colors from the following table, and add the indices of each to form the correct color index:

Color

Black

Dark Blue

Dark Green

Turquoise

Dark Red

Purple

Olive

Light Grey

Dark Grey

Blue

Green

Cyan

Red

Magenta

Yellow

White

Foreground Background

112

128

144

160

176

192

208

224

240

Note: the actual colors may be different if the palette has been modified!

2.3.5.1.28 Colors() property

Syntax:

session.Colors( index )

Data type: integer

Description:

This array maps foreground and background colors (using the color

index

described above) to visual attribute combinations. The

index

to the

Colors()

array is the attribute code shown in the following table:

Index Attribute Description

0 normal

Index Attribute Description

22 dim reverse blink

126 AccuTerm 7 Help

Index Attribute Description

4 blank blink reverse reverse blank reverse blink underline underline blink underline reverse underline reverse blink dim dim blink dim reverse

Index Attribute Description

46 dim underline dim underline blink dim underline reverse dim underline reverse blink bright bright blink bright reverse bright reverse blink bright underline bright underline blink bright underline reverse bright underline reverse blink

The value of this property may include a border effect style which is associated with the visual attribute.

The border effect styles are combined with the foreground and background color as follows: none = fg + bg inset = fb + bg + 16384 raised = fg + bg - 32768 flat = fg + bg - 16384

2.3.5.1.29 Cols & Rows properties

Syntax:

session.Cols

session.Rows

Data type: integer

Description:

The current number of columns or rows. These are read-only properties. Changing the screen mode between normal or extended mode (see

ExtMode

NormMode

methods and

ScrMode

property), or changing the value of the

ExtCols

ExtRows

NormCols

NormRows

properties may affect the

Cols

and

Rows

properties.

2.3.5.1.30 Connected property

Syntax:

session.Connected

Data type: boolean

Description:

This read-only property reflects the connection status of the session. For serial connections, it reflects the state of the CD signal; for network connections, it is non-zero if the network connection is OK.

2.3.5.1.31 ConnectTimeout property

Syntax:

session.ConnectTimeout

AccuTerm 7 Automation 127

Data type: integer

Description:

This property is the number of seconds to wait when attempting to make a connection before a timeout error occurs.

2.3.5.1.32 CopyPasteShortcut property

Syntax:

session

CopyPasteShortcut

Data type: integer

Description:

Set to 0 for no shortcut, 1 to use

CTRL+INS

SHIFT+INS

, or 2 to use

CTRL+C

CTRL+V

for Copy / Paste shortcuts.

2.3.5.1.33 CopySelMode property

Syntax:

session

CopySelMode

Data type: integer

Description:

Set to 1 to clear the selection rectangle after copying the screen selection to the clipboard. Set to 0 to retain selection rectangle.

2.3.5.1.34 CursorType property

Syntax:

session.CursorType

Data type: boolean

Description:

Set to True (non-zero) if cursor shown as a block, False (zero) if cursor shown as an underline.

2.3.5.1.35 CustomMouseTable property (Session)

Syntax:

session

.CustomMouseTable

Data type: string

Description:

This is the file name of the custom mouse table file for the session. The initial value of this property is the global mouse table file.See

Mouse Pattern Matching for more information on using a custom mouse

table.

128 AccuTerm 7 Help

2.3.5.1.36 DataBits property

Syntax:

session.DataBits

Data type: integer

Description:

This is the number of data bits used by the serial port attached to the session. This property is only meaningful when the communication device type is atDevSERIAL

or atDevMODEM

. Acceptable values are

7 or 8. After changing this property, use the

Reset

method for the change to take effect.

2.3.5.1.37 DefaultCaptureDir property

Syntax:

session

DefaultCaptureDir

Data type: string

Description:

This is the default destination directory used for file capture operations which do not specify a directory.

2.3.5.1.38 DefaultXferDir property

Syntax:

session.DefaultXferDir

Data type: string

Description:

This is the default destination directory used for file transfer operations which do not specify a directory.

2.3.5.1.39 DefaultXferMode property

Syntax:

session.DefaultXferMode

Data type: integer

Description:

This is default transfer mode: 0 for text, 1 for binary.

2.3.5.1.40 DefaultXferOverwrite property

Syntax:

session.DefaultXferOverwrite

Data type: integer

Description:

This is default overwrite setting for received files. Set to True (non-zero) to allow overwrites, else set to

False (zero). This property only applies to ASCII and Xmodem downloads.

AccuTerm 7 Automation 129

2.3.5.1.41 Device property

Syntax:

session.Device

Data type: integer

Description:

The communications device type attached to the session. The device type may be atDevNONE

for no device (disconnects session), atDevSERIAL

atDevTELNET

atDevSSH

or atDevMODEM

2.3.5.1.42 DeviceLicenseMode property

Syntax:

session

DeviceLicenseMode

Data type: integer

Description:

If this setting is non-zero, "device licensing" negotiation between AccuTerm and the host system is enabled. When device licensing has been successfully negotiated, multiple AccuTerm connections

(sessions) to the host system consume only one user license.

To enable device license negotiation, set this value to 1 if the device license response requires a

termination character, or 3 if the response requires no termination character.

Device licensing is supported for UniVerse, UniData and QM host systems. The host system must have device licensing enabled (this is often an extra-charge item).

2.3.5.1.43 DialStatus property

Syntax:

session.DialStatus

Data type: integer

Description:

This read-only property reflects the status of the last

Dial

HangUp

method. Status codes are described in the following table:

Status Description

Not connected (successful hang-up).

Connected (successful dial).

Unable to initialize modem.

Requested number is busy.

Requested number did not answer.

Unable to connect.

Unable to hang-up.

Modem is in use.

130 AccuTerm 7 Help

Status Description

Invalid phone number.

Billing rejected.

No dial tone.

2.3.5.1.44 DisableAppMode property

Syntax:

session.DisableAppMode

Data type: boolean

Description:

Setting this property to True (non-zero) prevents AccuTerm from entering "keypad application mode" or

"cursor application mode" when running one of the VT emulations. Set to False to allow application mode.

2.3.5.1.45 Duplex property

Syntax:

session.Duplex

Data type: integer

Description:

This property sets the communications duplex mode to local (no communication to or from host: atDuplexLOCAL)

, full (remote echo: atDuplexFULL

) or half (local echo: atDuplexHALF

2.3.5.1.46 ExtCols & ExtRows properties

Syntax:

session.ExtCols

session.ExtRows

Data type: integer

Description:

These properties define the terminal screen dimensions when the terminal is placed into "extended mode", also known as "132 column mode".

2.3.5.1.47 ExtMode method

Syntax:

session.ExtMode

Description:

Causes the session to switch to extended (132 column) mode.

2.3.5.1.48 FileName property

Syntax:

session.FileName

Data type: string

Description:

This is the name of the configuration file opened by the session. If there is no configuration file, then this property is NULL. If you assign a new name to this property, the session will be re-initialized with the settings from the new file.

2.3.5.1.49 FKeys() property

Syntax:

session.FKeys( index )

Data type: string

Description:

This array contains the programmed function and editing key strings. The

index

is formed by combining

(adding) the modifier value with the virtual key number. The special modifier for the function key button bar caption can be combined with one of the standard modifiers to retrieve or store the caption & tooltip text.

The string value of the programmed key is binary, and might not contain printable characters.

Modifier Shift Ctrl Alt

1000 no yes no no no no

2000

3000

10000

Modifier

4000

5000

Shift no yes

Ctrl no no

Alt yes yes no yes no yes yes no

6000

7000 no yes yes yes retrieve the function key caption and tip string yes yes

F10

F11

F12

F13

F14

F15

F16

Virtual Key Number

F1 112

113

114

115

116

117

118

119

120

121

122

123

124

125

126

127

Virtual Key Number

Backspace 8

Tab

Insert

Delete

Home

End

Page Up

Page Down 34

Left 37

Right

Down

Escape

Enter 13

Keypad Enter 253

AccuTerm 7 Automation 131

132 AccuTerm 7 Help

See also:

Settings FKeys() property

2.3.5.1.50 FontName property

Syntax:

session.FontName

Data type: string

Description:

This is the name of the terminal font used by the session.

2.3.5.1.51 FontSize property

Syntax:

session.FontSize

Data type: single

Description:

This is the size of the terminal font in points.

2.3.5.1.52 GmodeEnable property

Syntax:

session.GmodeEnable

Data type: boolean

Description:

Set to True (non-zero) if Tektronix graphics mode is enabled for the session; otherwise set to False

(zero).

2.3.5.1.53 Handshake property

Syntax:

session.Handshake

Data type: integer

Description:

This is the handshake (flow control) method used by the serial port attached to the session. This property is only meaningful when the communications device type is atDevSERIAL

or atDevMODEM

Acceptable handshake settings are atHandshakeNONE

atHandshakeXON

atHandshakeXIO

, atHandshakeRTS

or atHandshakeDTR

AccuTerm 7 Automation 133

2.3.5.1.54 Height property (Session)

Syntax:

session.Height

Data type: long

Description:

This is the session window height in pixels.

2.3.5.1.55 HistoryRows property

Syntax:

session.HistoryRows

Data type: integer

Description:

This is the number of rows allocated for the session history buffer. If a buffer is allocated, each time a line is scrolled off the screen, the line is placed in the history buffer. Likewise, whenever the screen is cleared, the contents of the screen before clearing is copied to the history buffer.

2.3.5.1.56 HostCertificateValidation property

Syntax:

session.HostCertificateValidation

Data type: long

Description:

This property determines how the host certificate is validated when connecting using SSL/Telnet. Set this value to 0 if no validation is desired or -1 for strict validation. Otherwise, this is a bit mask with the following values:

1 = host certificate must be signed by a trusted certificate authority

2 = host certificate name must match host name

4 = host certificate must not be expired

8 = host certificate must not be revoked

16 = certificate must be valid for server authentication

2.3.5.1.57 HostKeyFingerprint property

Syntax:

session.HostKeyFingerprint

Data type: string

Description:

This property contains the hash (fingerprint) of the SSH host key.

134 AccuTerm 7 Help

2.3.5.1.58 HostKeyValidation property

Syntax:

session.HostKeyValidation

Data type: long

Description:

When using an SSH connection, set this property to 0 to ignore the host's public key, 1 if the host key should be trusted if it has not yet been set, 2 to confirm any change in the host key, or 3 if the key must match the key fingerprint specified in the

HostKeyFingerprint

property.

2.3.5.1.59 HostName property

Syntax:

session.HostName

Data type: string

Description:

This is the name of the host computer system which a session is connected to. This property is only meaningful when the communications device type is Telnet or Secure Shell. You can use the host IP address in place of the host name. After changing this property, use the

Reset

method for the change to take effect.

2.3.5.1.60 HostPort property

Syntax:

session.HostPort

Data type: string

Description:

For Telnet connections, this is the host TCP/IP port number assigned for Telnet services (default port is

23). For Secure Shell connections, it is the TCP/IP port assigned for SSH services (default port is 22).

2.3.5.1.61 HostTermType property

Syntax:

session.HostTermType

Data type: string

Description:

For Telnet and Secure Shell connections, this is the terminal type sent to the host when initiating the connection. This setting is only needed if AccuTerm’s default terminal type is not compatible with the host terminal names.

2.3.5.1.62 hWnd property

Syntax:

session.hWnd

AccuTerm 7 Automation 135

Data type: long

Description:

This read-only value is the window handle for the session’s terminal screen. This handle may be used in

Windows API calls in conjunction with the

Declare

statement.

2.3.5.1.63 Icon property

Syntax:

session.Icon

Data type: string

Description:

This is the name of the icon file used for the session.

2.3.5.1.64 ID property

Syntax:

session.ID

Data type: string

Description:

This is the unique session ID.

2.3.5.1.65 InputMode property

Syntax:

session.InputMode

Data type: integer

Description:

This specifies how received data is processed by the terminal session. If the

InputMode

property is set to 0 (normal), any received data is immediately processed by the terminal emulator. Use this mode when the script is not concerned with the data stream. Setting the mode to 1 (synchronous) allows the terminal emulator to process all data which the script has processed. That is, all received data examined by a

WaitFor

method or

Input

method is also processed by the emulator. Finally, setting the mode to 2

(disconnected) disconnects the terminal emulator from the received data stream. It is up to the script to pass any data to the emulator using the

Emulate

method. If a session was created with the

Sessions.

Add

method, the initial

InputMode

setting may be specified as an argument.

2.3.5.1.66 KeepaliveInterval property

Syntax:

session

KeepaliveInterval

Data type: long

Description:

If this setting is non-zero, AccuTerm will send a special "keepalive" message periodically to maintain the

136 AccuTerm 7 Help

connection (some hosts and routers automatically disconnect when they detect an idle connection.)

This setting is in seconds. Note: enabling k eepalives when connecting to older versions of D3/NT may

cause the error log on the host to fill up.)

2.3.5.1.67 KermitCRC property

Syntax:

session.KermitCRC

Data type: integer

Description:

Set to True (non-zero) to enable CRC block checking, else set to False (zero) to use checksum block checking. If this option is enabled, and the host Kermit supports this option, then a 16 bit CRC is used to verify packet integrity.

2.3.5.1.68 KermitEOL property

Syntax:

session.KermitEOL

Data type: integer

Description:

Specifies the ASCII character to be sent at the end of each Kermit packet. Usually 13 (

), but may be

10 (

) for some hosts.

2.3.5.1.69 KermitErrRetry property

Syntax:

session.KermitErrRetry

Data type: integer

Description:

Specifies the number of times Kermit will retry during a file transfer before the transfer is aborted.

2.3.5.1.70 KermitInitRetry property

Syntax:

session.KermitInitRetry

Data type: integer

Description:

Specifies the number of times Kermit will retry when initiating a file transfer before the transfer is aborted.

2.3.5.1.71 KermitQuote property

Syntax:

session.KermitQuote

AccuTerm 7 Automation 137

Data type: integer

Description:

Set to True (non-zero) to enable the "eighth bit quoting" option, else set to False (zero). If this option is enabled, and the host Kermit supports this option, then any characters which have the eighth bit set are

"quoted" using a sequence of characters which do not have the eighth bit set. This option is useful for connections which do not support eight bit data.

2.3.5.1.72 KermitRept property

Syntax:

session.KermitRept

Data type: integer

Description:

Set to True (non-zero) to enable the run length encoding data compression option, else set to False

(zero). If this option is enabled, and the host Kermit supports this option, then repeated sequences of any character are encoded to compress the data.

2.3.5.1.73 KermitTimeout property

Syntax:

session.KermitTimeout

Data type: integer

Description:

Specifies the number of seconds before Kermit file transfer operations time out.

2.3.5.1.74 Left property (Session)

Syntax:

session.Left

Data type: long

Description:

This is the horizontal position of the session window relative to the upper-left corner of the inside of

AccuTerm’s main window. This value is in pixels.

2.3.5.1.75 LegibleFont property

Syntax:

session.LegibleFont

Data type: boolean

Description:

Set to True (non-zero) to keep fonts legible when scaling fonts to fit screen; otherwise set to False

(zero).

138 AccuTerm 7 Help

2.3.5.1.76 LockBaudRate property

Syntax:

session.LockBaudRate

Data type: boolean

Description:

Set to True (non-zero) to lock the modem to the specified baud rate; otherwise set to False (zero). Note: not all modems support this setting.

2.3.5.1.77 LockFKeys property

Syntax:

session

LockFKeys

Data type: integer

Description:

Set to 0 for unlocked function keys (host can reset or reprogram keys), 1 to lock from reset (host can reprogram keys, but not reset them) or 2 to lock from programming (host cannot reset or reprogram function keys).

2.3.5.1.78 LockKeyboard property

Syntax:

session.LockKeyboard

Data type: boolean

Description:

Set to True (non-zero) to prevent keystrokes from being sent to the host system; otherwise set to False

(zero).

2.3.5.1.79 MapUpperFKeys property

Syntax:

session.MapUpperFKeys

Data type: boolean

Description:

Setting this property to True (non-zero) causes AccuTerm to map

Ctrl+F1

through

Ctrl+F10

F11

F20

This is the default behavior, since the PC keyboard does not have keys

F13

F20

2.3.5.1.80 Menu property (Session)

Syntax:

Set

menu_object = session.Menu

Data type: menu object

AccuTerm 7 Automation 139

Description:

This returns a reference to the session

object, which may be used to customize AccuTerm’s menus and toolbars.

See also:

Menu Object

2.3.5.1.81 MessageRows property

Syntax:

session.MessageRows

Data type: integer

Description:

This property sets the number of message rows and status lines for the session. The value must be between 0 and 3. Note that some emulations do not support any status or message rows, and some only support a single status line. Others support up to 3 lines. For more information, see

Status Lines .

2.3.5.1.82 MouseEnable property

Syntax:

session.MouseEnable

Data type: boolean

Description:

Set to True (non-zero) to enable the ESC STX "1" / ESC STX "2"AccuTerm mouse-on command; otherwise set to False (zero).

2.3.5.1.83 NoAutoWrap property

Syntax:

session

NoAutoWrap

Data type: boolean

Description:

Set to True (non-zero) to disable automatic line wrap at end of line.

2.3.5.1.84 NormCols & NormRows properties

Syntax:

session.NormCols

session.NormRows

Data type: integer

Description:

These properties define the terminal screen dimensions when the terminal is placed into "normal mode", also known as "80 column mode".

140 AccuTerm 7 Help

2.3.5.1.85 NormMode method

Syntax:

session.NormMode

Description:

Causes the session to switch to normal (80 column) mode.

2.3.5.1.86 OnLine property

Syntax:

session.OnLine

Data type: integer

Description:

Setting this property to True (non-zero) initiates the connection to the host. Setting it to False terminates the connection.

2.3.5.1.87 OverrideModemConfig property

Syntax:

session.OverrideModemConfig

Data type: boolean

Description:

Set to True (non-zero) to override modem Control Panel settings for baud rate, data bits, stop bits, parity and handshake with current session settings for these properties; otherwise set to False (zero).

2.3.5.1.88 Page property

Syntax:

session.Page

Data type: integer

Description:

This specifies the number of the current video page for the session. The value must be between 0 and the number of pages allocated for the session minus 1 (see

Pages

property).

2.3.5.1.89 Pages property

Syntax:

session.Pages

Data type: integer

Description:

This specifies the number of video pages for the session. The value must be between 1 and 25.

AccuTerm 7 Automation 141

2.3.5.1.90 Palette() property

Syntax:

session.Palette( index )

Data type: OLE_COLOR

Description:

This array contains the color values for the 16 palette entries used to display text on the terminal screen.

The

Color property assigns foreground (text) and background colors based on these 16 colors. You can

use the

RGB()

function to produce an OLE_COLOR from separate red, green and blue values. The red, green and blue values must be in the range of 0 to 255.

Palette entry

Color

Black

Dark Blue

Dark Green

Turquoise

Dark Red

Purple

Olive

Light Grey

Dark Grey

Blue

Green

Cyan

Red

Magenta

Yellow

White

An additional 6 palette entries exist for drawing borders (see

Visual Styles

). These are:

Palette entry

Used for flat outer border flat inner border shadow outer border shadow inner border highlight outer border highlight inner border

2.3.5.1.91 Parity property

Syntax:

session.Parity

Data type: integer

142 AccuTerm 7 Help

Description:

This is the parity setting used by the serial port attached to the session. This property is only meaningful when the communication device type is atDevSERIAL

or atDevMODEM

. Acceptable values are atParityNONE

, atParityEVEN

, atParityODD

, atParityMARK

and atParitySPACE

. After changing this property, use the

Reset

method for the change to take effect.

2.3.5.1.92 PasteEOFChar property

Syntax:

session.PasteEOFChar

Data type: integer

Description:

This is the ASCII character which is transmitted to the host at the end of paste operation. If this value is zero, no character will be transmitted.

2.3.5.1.93 PasteEOFMode property

Syntax:

session.PasteEOFMode

Data type: integer

Description:

Set to 0 if no character is transmitted at the end of a paste operation. Set to 1 if a

SUB

control code is transmitted. Set to 2 to use the character defined by the

PasteEOFChar

property.

2.3.5.1.94 PasteEOLChar property

Syntax:

session.PasteEOLChar

Data type: integer

Description:

This is the ASCII character which is transmitted to the host at the end of each line in a paste operaton. If this value is zero, no character will be transmitted.

2.3.5.1.95 PasteEOLMode property

Syntax:

session.PasteEOLMode

Data type: integer

Description:

Set to 0 if a

is transmitted at the end of each line of a paste operation. Set to 1 if a

is transmitted.

Set to 2 if a

CR+ LF

is transmitted. Set to 3 if a

TAB

is transmitted. Set to 4 if no character is transmitted.

Set to 5 to use the character defined by the

PasteEOLChar

property. If you want to suppress the end-ofline character after the last line, add 128 to this value.

AccuTerm 7 Automation 143

2.3.5.1.96 Port property

Syntax:

session.Port

Data type: integer

Description:

Specifies the COM port number attached to the session. This property is only meaningful when the communication device type is atDevSERIAL

. Acceptable values are from 1 to 127. After changing this property, use the

Reset

method for the change to take effect.

2.3.5.1.97 PrinterColorMode property

Syntax:

session

PrinterColorMode

Data type: integer

Description:

If this property is non-zero and the

ScreenPrintMode

property is non-zero (Graphics mode), the screen is printed in color; otherwise the screen is printed in black and white. This property has no effect when the

ScreenPrintMode

property is zero (Text mode).

2.3.5.1.98 PrinterFontBold property

Syntax:

session

PrinterFontBold

Data type: boolean

Description:

Set this property to True (non-zero) to print using boldface. This property affects slave (or Aux) print jobs when the

SlavePrintMode

property is 1 (Graphics mode). This property has no effect when the

SlavePrintMode

property is zero (Text mode).

2.3.5.1.99 PrinterFontItalic property

Syntax:

session

PrinterFontItalic

Data type: boolean

Description:

Set this property to True (non-zero) to print using italics. This property affects slave (or Aux) print jobs when the

SlavePrintMode

property is 1 (Graphics mode). This property has no effect when the

SlavePrintMode

property is zero (Text mode).

2.3.5.1.100 PrinterFontName property

Syntax:

session

PrinterFontName

144 AccuTerm 7 Help

Data type: string

Description:

Set this property to the name of the font to use for slave (or Aux) print jobs when the

SlavePrintMode property is 1 (Graphics mode). This property has no effect when the

SlavePrintMode

property is zero

(Text mode).

2.3.5.1.101 PrinterFontSize property

Syntax:

session

PrinterFontSize

Data type: single

Description:

Set this property to the size (in points) of the font to use for slave (or Aux) print jobs when the

SlavePrintMode

property is 1 (Graphics mode). This property has no effect when the

SlavePrintMode property is zero (Text mode).

2.3.5.1.102 PrinterMode property

Syntax:

session

PrinterMode

Data type: integer

Description:

This is the state of the auxiliary printer: 0 if printer is off ( atPrinterOff

), 1 if printer is auto-print mode ( atPrinterOn

), 2 if the printer is in transparent print mode ( atPrinterTransparent

2.3.5.1.103 PrinterName property

Syntax:

session

PrinterName

session

SlavePrinterName

Data type: string

Description:

This is the name of the printer used by the session for slave (or Aux) printer output. It may be set to null

("") to indicate the current Windows default printer, or "no printer" to disable slave printing.

See also:

ScreenPrinterName property

2.3.5.1.104 PrinterOrientation property

Syntax:

session

PrinterOrientation

Data type: integer

AccuTerm 7 Automation 145

Description:

Set this property to 0 use the default page orientation, 1 for portrait or 2 for landscape. This property applies only to slave (or Aux) print jobs and only when the

SlavePrintMode

property is 1 (Graphics mode). This property has no effect when the

SlavePrintMode

property is zero (Text mode).

2.3.5.1.105 PrinterPaperSize property

Syntax:

session

PrinterPaperSize

Data type: integer

Description:

Set this property to 0 use the default paper size for the printer. Otherwise use a paper size from the table below. This property applies only to slave (or Aux) print jobs and only when the

SlavePrintMode

property is non-zero (Graphics mode). This property has no effect when the

SlavePrintMode

property is zero (Text mode).

1 Letter 8 1/2 x 11 in

3 Tabloid 11 x 17 in

5 Legal 8 1/2 x 14 in

7 Executive 7 1/4 x 10 1/2 in

9 A4 210 x 297 mm

11 A5 148 x 210 mm

13 B5 (JIS) 182 x 257 mm

15 Quarto 215 x 275 mm

17 11x17 in

19 Envelope #9 3 7/8 x 8 7/8

21 Envelope #11 4 1/2 x 10 3/8

23 Envelope #14 5 x 11 1/2

25 D size sheet

27 Envelope DL 110 x 220mm

29 Envelope C3 324 x 458 mm

31 Envelope C6 114 x 162 mm

33 Envelope B4 250 x 353 mm

35 Envelope B6 176 x 125 mm

37 Envelope Monarch 3.875 x 7.5 in

39 US Std Fanfold 14 7/8 x 11 in

41 German Legal Fanfold 8 1/2 x 13 in

2 Letter Small 8 1/2 x 11 in

4 Ledger 17 x 11 in

6 Statement 5 1/2 x 8 1/2 in

8 A3 297 x 420 mm

10 A4 Small 210 x 297 mm

12 B4 (JIS) 250 x 354

14 Folio 8 1/2 x 13 in

16 10x14 in

18 Note 8 1/2 x 11 in

20 Envelope #10 4 1/8 x 9 1/2

22 Envelope #12 4 \276 x 11

24 C size sheet

26 E size sheet

28 Envelope C5 162 x 229 mm

30 Envelope C4 229 x 324 mm

32 Envelope C65 114 x 229 mm

34 Envelope B5 176 x 250 mm

36 Envelope 110 x 230 mm

38 6 3/4 Envelope 3 5/8 x 6 1/2 in

40 German Std Fanfold 8 1/2 x 12 in

146 AccuTerm 7 Help

2.3.5.1.106 PrinterPaperSource property

Syntax:

session

PrinterPaperSource

Data type: integer

Description:

Set this property to 0 use the default paper source for the printer. Otherwise use a paper source from the table below. This property applies only to slave (or Aux) print jobs and only when the

SlavePrintMode property is 1 (Graphics mode). This property has no effect when the

SlavePrintMode

property is zero

(Text mode).

Upper tray

Lower tray

Middle tray

Manual feed

Envelope feeder

Envelope manual

Auto

Tractor

2.3.5.1.107 PrinterTimeout property

Syntax:

session

PrinterTimeout

Data type: integer

Description:

This property specifies the number of seconds of inactivity before a print job is closed.

2.3.5.1.108 PrintJobEject property

Syntax:

session

PrintJobEject

Data type: integer

Description:

This property specifies if a page is ejected before or after a print job. Set this property to 0 for no page ejects, 1 to eject page before print job, 2 to eject page after print job or 3 to eject page before and after print job.

2.3.5.1.109 PrintScreenBackground property

Syntax:

session

PrintScreenBackground

Data type: boolean

AccuTerm 7 Automation 147

Description:

Set to True (non-zero) to print the screen background when using the Print Screen command and the

ScreenPrintMode

property is non-zero (Graphics mode); otherwise set to False (zero). This property has no effect when the

ScreenPrintMode

property is zero (Text mode).

2.3.5.1.110 PrintScreenEject property

Syntax:

session

PrintScreenEject

Data type: integer

Description:

This property specifies if a page is ejected before or after a print screen. Set this property to 0 for no page ejects, 1 to eject page before print screen, 2 to eject page after print screen or 3 to eject page before and after print screen.

2.3.5.1.111 ProtectAttr property

Syntax:

session

ProtectAttr

Data type: integer

Description:

Visual attribute number assigned to "protected fields" under Wyse/ADDS emulation. See

Colors

() property for a list of attribute numbers.

2.3.5.1.112 Settings method

Syntax:

With

session.Settings

. . . statements

End With

Data type: settings object

Description:

This object is used to set session settings as a block. It is intended to be used in a

With

Settings . . . End With

structure. When used in this manner, all of the settings which are modified are applied to the session when the

End With

statement is executed. This prevents errors when certain settings depend on others (such as

Port

and

Baud

) and also improves performance. Most of the

Session

properties may be set using this object.

Note: when using the

Settings

object from a .NET language, call the

Apply

method just before

End

With

due to the due to the way objects are freed in the .NET environment.

2.3.5.1.113 ScaleFont property

Syntax:

session

ScaleFont

148 AccuTerm 7 Help

Data type: boolean

Description:

Set to True (non-zero) to enable automatic font scaling; otherwise set to False (zero).

2.3.5.1.114 ScreenPrintAdapterScript property

Syntax:

session

ScreenPrintAdapterScript

Data type: string

Description:

This is the name of the print adapter script file to use for screen printing. Print adapter scripts are used to process the print job using an external program, such as Print Wizard. To use the print adapter script, the

ScreenPrintMode

property must be set to 2. See

Screen Printer Settings for more information on

print adapters.

2.3.5.1.115 ScreenPrinterName property

Syntax:

session

ScreenPrinterName

Data type: string

Description:

This is the name of the printer used by the session for screen printing. It may be set to null ("") to indicate the current Windows default printer, or "no printer" to disable screen printing.

See also:

SlavePrinterName property

2.3.5.1.116 ScreenPrintMode property

Syntax:

session

ScreenPrintMode

Data type: integer

Description:

Set to 0 for text mode, 1 for graphics mode or 2 to use the print adapter script specified by the

ScreenPrintAdapterScript

property. When this property is 1, the

PrinterColorMode

and

PrintScreenBackground

properties affect how the screen is printed.

2.3.5.1.117 ScreenPrintOrientation property

Syntax:

session

ScreenPrintOrientation

Data type: integer

Description:

AccuTerm 7 Automation 149

Set this property to 0 use the default page orientation, 1 for portrait or 2 for landscape. This property applies only to screen printing and only when the

ScreenPrintMode

property is 1 (Graphics mode). This

property has no effect when the

ScreenPrintMode

property is zero (Text mode).

2.3.5.1.118 ScreenPrintPaperSize property

Syntax:

session

ScreenPrintPaperSize

Data type: integer

Description:

Set this property to 0 use the default paper size for the printer. Otherwise use a paper size from the table shown in the

PrinterPaperSize

property. This property applies only when the

ScreenPrintMode

property is non-zero (Graphics mode). This property has no effect when the

ScreenPrintMode

property is zero (Text mode).

2.3.5.1.119 ScreenPrintPaperSource property

Syntax:

session

ScreenPrintPaperSource

Data type: integer

Description:

Set this property to 0 use the default paper source for the printer. Otherwise use a paper source from the table shown in the

PrinterPaperSource

property. This property applies only to screen printing and only when the

ScreenPrintMode

property is 1 (Graphics mode). This property has no effect when the

ScreenPrintMode

property is zero (Text mode).

2.3.5.1.120 ScrMode property

Syntax:

session

ScrMode

Data type: integer

Description:

Set to zero for normal (80 column) mode, 1 for extended (132 column) mode.

2.3.5.1.121 ScrollMode property

Syntax:

session

ScrollMode

Data type: integer

Description:

This controls the appearance of the vertical scroll bar: 0=no scroll bar (scroll bar is only visible if the current number of Rows will not fit in the current window size), 1=always show scroll bar, and

2=automatically show scroll bar when cursor is positioned near right border of window.

150 AccuTerm 7 Help

2.3.5.1.122 Selection property

Syntax:

session

Selection

Data type: string

Description:

Returns the current selection, if any. Lines are separated by

CR LF

. If there is no current selection, returns null ("").

See also:

Select method

GetSelection method

SetSelection method

2.3.5.1.123 ShowErrs property

Syntax:

session

ShowErrs

Data type: boolean

Description:

Set to True (non-zero) to enable notification of communications errors; otherwise set to False (zero).

2.3.5.1.124 SlavePrintAdapterScript property

Syntax:

session

SlavePrintAdapterScript

Data type: string

Description:

This is the name of the print adapter script file to use for slave (Aux) print jobs. Print adapter scripts are used to process the print job using an external program, such as Print Wizard. To use the print adapter script, the

SlavePrintMode

property must be set to 2. See

Slave Printer Settings

for more information on print adapters.

2.3.5.1.125 SlavePrinterName property

Syntax:

session

PrinterName

session

SlavePrinterName

Data type: string

Description:

This is the name of the printer used by the session for slave (or Aux) printer output. It may be set to null

("") to indicate the current Windows default printer, or "no printer" to disable slave printing.

See also:

AccuTerm 7 Automation 151

ScreenPrinterName property

2.3.5.1.126 SlavePrintMode property

Syntax:

session

SlavePrintMode

Data type: integer

Description:

Set to 0 for text mode, 1 for graphics mode or 2 to use the print adapter script specified in the

SlavePrintAdapterScript

property. When this property is 1, the

PrinterFont…

PrinterOrientation

PrinterPaperSize

and

PrinterPaperSource

properties affect how the slave (Aux) print job is printed.

Print adapter scripts are used to process the print job using an external program, such as PrintWizard.

See

Slave Printer Settings for more information on print adapters.

2.3.5.1.127 Sound property

Syntax:

session

Sound

Data type: string

Description:

This property may be used to specify a custom sound for the terminal beep. Set this property to null to use the default sound. Set to a valid WAVE, MP3 or MIDI file name to play the specified wave file. Set to

“SystemDefault”, “SystemHand”, “SystemExclamation” or “SystemAsterisk” to use the sound associated with a system event (as defined in the Control Panel Sounds applet). Set to frequency,

duration to use a true “beep” at the specified frequency (Hz) and duration (ms).

2.3.5.1.128 SSHAuth property

Syntax:

session

SSHAuth

Data type: integer

Description:

This property may be used to select the authentication method which will be used by a Secure Shell

(ssh) session to authenticate a user to the host. Available authentication methods are: public key (2), password (3) and interactive (7). Use zero (0) for the default authentication method (password).

2.3.5.1.129 SSHCipher property

Syntax:

session

SSHCipher

Data type: integer

Description:

This property may be used to select a cipher to be used to encrypt a Secure Shell (ssh) session.

Available ciphers are: Triple DES (3), Blowfish (6), 128 bit AES (7) and 256 bit AES (8). Use zero (0) for

152 AccuTerm 7 Help

the default cipher (Triple DES for SSH1 or 128 bit AES for SSH2).

2.3.5.1.130 SSHKey property

Syntax:

session

SSHKey

Data type: string

Description:

This property contains the name of the SSH private key file. If no path is included, AccuTerm's default key folder will be used to read the key file.

2.3.5.1.131 SSHUseOnlyPreferredCipher property

Syntax:

session

SSHUseOnlyPreferredCipher

Data type: boolean

Description:

Set to True (non-zero) to require that the cipher used for an SSH connection is the cipher specified by the

SSHCipher

property. If the host system does not accept the preferred cipher, the connection is

aborted.

2.3.5.1.132 SSHVersion property

Syntax:

session

SSHVersion

Data type: integer

Description:

This property may be used to select the desired SSH protocol version. Set this property to zero (0) for automatic protocol selection. Set to 1 for SSH version 1 or set to 2 for SSH version 2. When automatic protocol selection is used, AccuTerm selects the highest protocol version supported by the host.

2.3.5.1.133 StopBits property

Syntax:

session

StopBits

Data type: integer

Description:

This is the number of stop bits used by the serial port attached to the session. This property is only meaningful when the communication device type is atDevSERIAL

or atDevMODEM

. Acceptable values are

1 or 2. After changing this property, use the

Reset

method for the change to take effect.

AccuTerm 7 Automation 153

2.3.5.1.134 Strip8th property

Syntax:

session

Strip8th

Data type: boolean

Description:

Set to True (non-zero) to cause AccuTerm to truncate received data to 7 bits; otherwise set to False

(zero).

2.3.5.1.135 TcpIdn property

Syntax:

session

TcpIdn

Data type: boolean

Description:

Set this property to True (non-zero) to enable Internationalized Domain Names (IDN) for the host name. I

DN relies upon a standardized mechanism known as "Punycode" for encoding Unicode domain names using only the ASCII characters that are permitted by the global DNS system.

2.3.5.1.136 TcpNoDelay property

Syntax:

session

TcpNoDelay

Data type: boolean

Description:

Normally, the TCP network stack delays outbound network messages for a short time in order to

"coalesce" multiple small messages into a single packet. When this setting is True (non-zero),

AccuTerm will send each message as soon as possible. Setting this option may improve throughput, especially when running in AccuTerm's GUI environment and during file transfers, at the expense of increased network traffic.

2.3.5.1.137 TelnetBinary property

Syntax:

session

TelnetBinary

Data type: boolean

Description:

Set to True (non-zero) to enable Telnet binary communication mode; otherwise set to False (zero) for text communication mode.

2.3.5.1.138 TelnetBypass property

Syntax:

session

TelnetBypass

154 AccuTerm 7 Help

Data type: boolean

Description:

Set to True (non-zero) to bypass initial option negotiation; otherwise set to False (zero) for normal negotiation. This is required for certain hosts like D3 which do not implement the complete Telnet protocol.

2.3.5.1.139 TelnetKeepaliveIsNOP property

Syntax:

session

TelnetKeepaliveIsNOP

Data type: boolean

Description:

Set to True (non-zero) to send Telnet NOP command for keepalives; otherwise, sends Telnet DMARK command for keepalives.

2.3.5.1.140 TermType property

Syntax:

session

TermType

Data type: integer

Description:

This is the terminal emulation setting for the session. Possible values are: atTermTTY atTermVPA2 atTermVP60 atTermP60 atTermA2E atTermWY50 atTermWY60 atTermVT52 atTermVT100 atTermVT220 atTermVT320 atTermVT420 atTermLinux atTermSCO atTermANSI atTermPICKMON atTermP30 atTermTEK atTermTEK4100 basic TTY

ADDS Viewpoint A2

ADDS Viewpoint 60

ProComm Viewpoint 60

ADDS Viewpoint A2 Enhanced

Wyse 50

Wyse 60

DEC VT-52

DEC VT-100

DEC VT-220

DEC VT-320

DEC VT-420

Linux console

SCO console

ANSI BBS

Pick PC Monitor

MDIS P30

Tektronix 4014

Tektronix 4100

AccuTerm 7 Automation 155

2.3.5.1.141 TextFileEncoding property

TextFileEncoding property

Syntax:

session.TextFileEncoding

Data type: integer

Description:

Sets the encoding to use for dow nloaded or captured text files. Set to 1 for ANSI, 2 for Unicode, 3 for UTF-8 or 0 for raw

(no encoding).

2.3.5.1.142 Top property (Session)

Syntax:

session

Top

Data type: long

Description:

This is the vertical position of the session window relative to the upper-left corner of the workspace area of AccuTerm’s main window. This value is in pixels.

2.3.5.1.143 Visible property (Session)

Syntax:

session

Visible

Data type: boolean

Description:

Set to True (non-zero) to make the session window visible. Set to False to hide the session window.

2.3.5.1.144 Width property (Session)

Syntax:

session

Width

Data type: long

Description:

This is the session window width in pixels.

2.3.5.1.145 WindowState property (Session)

Syntax:

session

WindowState

156 AccuTerm 7 Help

Data type: integer

Description:

This is the state of the session window. Set to 0 for normal, 1 for minimized or 2 for maximized.

2.3.5.1.146 XferBytes property

Syntax:

session

XferBytes

Data type: long

Description:

This read-only property is the number of bytes transferred as a result of the last file transfer operation.

2.3.5.1.147 XferFiles property

Syntax:

session

XferFiles

Data type: long

Description:

This read-only property is the number of files transferred as a result of the last file transfer operation.

2.3.5.1.148 XferStatus property

Syntax:

session

XferStatus

Data type: integer

Description:

This read-only property reflects the status of the last

Upload

Download

method. Status codes are described in the following table:

Status

-1

Description

File transfer in progress.

File transfer successful.

Invalid source file or invalid destination directory.

File transfer aborted by user.

Destination file already exists.

File transfer timed out.

File transfer protocol failure.

X/Y/ZModem require 8 data bits.

X/YModem require hardware flow control.

Destination file is write protected.

AccuTerm 7 Automation 157

2.3.5.1.149 XmodemTimeout property

Syntax:

session.XmodemTimeout

Data type: integer

Description:

Specifies the number of seconds before Xmodem file transfer operations time out.

2.3.5.1.150 YmodemTimeout property

Syntax:

session.YmodemTimeout

Data type: integer

Description:

Specifies the number of seconds before Ymodem file transfer operations time out.

2.3.5.1.151 ZmodemAuto property

Syntax:

session.ZmodemAuto

Data type: integer

Description:

Set to True (non-zero) to enable automatic Zmodem downloads, otherwise set to False (zero).

2.3.5.1.152 ZmodemTimeout property

Syntax:

session.ZmodemTimeout

Data type: integer

Description:

Specifies the number of seconds before Zmodem file transfer operations time out.

2.3.5.2

Session methods

2.3.5.2.1 Activate method (Session)

Syntax:

session.Activate

Description:

Makes the session the "active" session. There is no return value.

158 AccuTerm 7 Help

2.3.5.2.2 Break method

Syntax:

session.Break

Description:

Sends a "break" signal to the host connected to the session. There is no return value.

2.3.5.2.3 Capture method

Syntax:

session.Capture filename , source , mode

Description:

Initiates or terminates data capture mode. If

source

is zero, capture mode for session is terminated. Set

source

to 1 to initiate capture of received data, 2 to initiate capture of printed data. Set

mode

to 0 to create a new file, 1 to overwrite an existing file, 2 to append to existing file, or 3 to capture to the clipboard instead of a file. Add 128 to

mode

to capture text only (filters out control characters). If

source

is zero or

mode

is 3 or 131, then

filename

is ignored, otherwise it is the name of the file where captured data is saved.

2.3.5.2.4 CaptureEnd method

Syntax:

session.CaptureEnd

Description:

Terminates any capture operation and closes the capture file.

2.3.5.2.5 Clear method

Syntax:

session.Clear

[

left

[

top

[

right

[

bottom

[

color

]]]]]

Description:

Clears block of text from session screen to specified background color. Default coordinates are the upper left and lower right corners of the screen. To specify

color

, use the color index described under

Color property .

2.3.5.2.6 ClearSelection method

Syntax:

session.ClearSelection

Description:

This removes any selection rectangle from the session screen. There is no return value.

This method is the same as the Deselect method.

AccuTerm 7 Automation 159

2.3.5.2.7 Close method (Session)

Syntax:

session.Close [

prompt

]

Description:

This closes the session. If

prompt

= 1 or 3, and If any session settings have been modified subsequent to loading or saving the session, the user will be prompted whether to save the settings. If

prompt

= 2 or

3, and the session is connected via a network or dialup connection, the user will be prompted to disconnect. If

prompt

is zero, the session is closed without prompting.

This method is the same as the Terminate method, but is not available when using late binding.

2.3.5.2.8 Copy method

Syntax:

session.Copy

[

left

[

top

[

right

[

bottom

]]]]

Description:

Copies a block of text from session screen to the clipboard. Default coordinates are the upper left and lower right corners of the screen or the current selection if one is present. Negative row numbers will copy from the history buffer; row –1 is the last history row, etc.

2.3.5.2.9 CopyHistory method

Syntax:

session.CopyHistory

[

left

[

top

[

right

[

bottom

]]]]

Description:

Copies a block of text from session history screen to the clipboard. Default coordinates are the upper left and lower right corners of the history screen.

2.3.5.2.10 Delete method

Syntax:

session.Delete

Description:

This deletes (closes) the session. There is no return value.

2.3.5.2.11 Deselect method

Syntax:

session.Deselect

Description:

This removes any selection rectangle from the session screen. There is no return value.

This method is the same as the ClearSelection method.

160 AccuTerm 7 Help

2.3.5.2.12 Dial method

Syntax:

result = session.Dial( PhoneNumber )

Description:

Uses the Auto-Dialer to dial a specified phone number. The return value specifies the result of the dialing operation. See the

DialStatus

property for a description of the return codes. This method only works if the

Device

property is atDevModem

2.3.5.2.13 Download method

Syntax:

result = session.Download(target , protocol ,

binary

[

overwrite

]

)

Description:

Downloads a file from a host system to the user’s PC.

Target

is the name of the destination file (ASCII or XModem protocol), or the name of the destination directory (Kermit, YModem or ZModem protocol).

Protocol

is atProtocolASCII, atProtocolKermit, atProtocolXmodem, atProtocolYmodem

or atProtocolZmodem

Binary

is True (non-zero) for binary transfer mode, False (zero) for text transfer mode.

Overwrite

must be atProtect

or atOverwrite

, and is only meaningful for ASCII and Xmodem downloads.

2.3.5.2.14 Emulate method

Syntax:

session.Emulate text

Description:

Causes the terminal emulator to process the specified text, including control codes and escape sequences.

2.3.5.2.15 GetBlock method

Syntax:

Set

scrblk = session.GetBlock (left , top , right ,

bottom ,

[

page

]

)

Description:

Creates a

ScreenBlock

object containing the contents of the specified block. The returned object contains all text, attribute, color, protect and character set information contained within the block.

Default

page

is the current page. This method, when used with the

SetBlock

method, may be used to effect "windowing". The return value of this method must be assigned to a variable which has been declared as type

ScreenBlock

See also:

ScreenBlock object

AccuTerm 7 Automation 161

2.3.5.2.16 GetSelection method

Syntax:

sel = session.GetSelection ( left , top , right , bottom )

Description:

Gets the coordinates of the selection rectangle on the session screen. The return value

sel

is True (nonzero) if a selection is present; otherwise it is False (zero).

See also:

SetSelection method

Selection property

2.3.5.2.17 GetText method

Syntax:

text = session.GetText (

[

col

[

row

[

cols

[

mode

]]]]

)

Description:

Returns the text contents of a row on the terminal screen. Default col and row is the current cursor location. Default number of columns is to the end of the row. Use zero for mode to return all normal characters on the row, including protected characters. Use 1 to return non-protected characters only.

Add 2 to include line-drawing character and special symbols (Unicode). Non-negative row numbers refer to the active (non-history) area of the terminal screen (zero is the first data row of the active screen).

Negative row numbers refer to history rows (row -1 is the last history row).

2.3.5.2.18 Hangup method

Syntax:

result = session.Hangup()

Description:

Uses the Auto-Dialer to disconnect (hangup) a modem call. The return value specifies the result of the hangup operation. See the

DialStatus

property for a description of the return codes.

2.3.5.2.19 Hide method (Session)

Syntax:

session.Hide

Description:

This method makes the session window invisible.

2.3.5.2.20 Input method

Syntax:

result = session.Input(

[

mode

[

maxlen

[

timeout

]]]

)

Description:

This method accepts input from the communications device attached to the session. If

mode

is 0

(default), raw data is returned, up to

maxlen

characters or until

timeout

seconds have passed. If

mode

162 AccuTerm 7 Help

1, a "line" of data is returned, up to

maxlen

characters or until

timeout

seconds have passed. A "line" is terminated by a

CR+ LF

LF+ CR

. The terminator is not returned as part of the input. Default values for

maxlen

and

timeout

are 80 and 30 respectively.

This method is not available when using late binding; use the ReadText method instead.

2.3.5.2.21 LoadImage method

Syntax:

session.LoadImage filename , col , row

[

width

[

height

[

preserveaspect

[

borderstyle

] ] ] ]

Description:

Creates an image on the terminal screen at the location specified by

col

and

row

Filename

specifies the name or URL of the image file. Image file formats supported are BMP, JPEG, GIF, PCD, PCX, PICT,

PNG, PSD, TARGA, TIFF, WBMP, XBM, XPM and Windows Metafile. If

width

and

height

are specified, then the image is scaled to fit the specified area; otherwise the image is displayed in its actual dimensions. If

preserveaspect

is non-zero, then the aspect ratio of the original image is preserved by reducing either width or height. To enclose the image in a border, specify

borderstyle

of 0 for none, 1 for simple, 2 for raised or 3 for inset. Multiple images may be loaded on the terminal screen. Images are considered "protected" data; a "clear un-protected characters" command will not clear images from the terminal screen.

2.3.5.2.22 Locate method

Syntax:

session.Locate col , row

[

page

]

Description:

Moves the cursor to the specified screen location and optionally changes pages.

2.3.5.2.23 MouseTableAdd method

Syntax:

session.MouseTableAdd button

[

pattern

[

click

[

dblclk

]]]

Description:

Adds an entry to the mouse pattern table for the session. The mouse pattern table is used to associate patterns on the screen with responses to be sent to the host when the mouse is clicked.

Button

is 1 for left button, 2 for right button and 3 for middle button.

Pattern

is a string containing a "regular expression" describing the pattern to be matched.

Click

is a string, and is sent to the host when the specified button is clicked over the pattern.

Dblclk

is the response if the button is double-clicked over the pattern. See

Mouse Pattern Matching

for more information on using a custom mouse table.

2.3.5.2.24 MouseTableLoad method

Syntax:

session.MouseTableLoad filename

Description:

AccuTerm 7 Automation 163

Loads a mouse pattern table from a file. See

Mouse Pattern Matching

for more information on using a custom mouse table.

2.3.5.2.25 MouseTableReset method

Syntax:

session.MouseTableReset

Description:

Clears the mouse pattern table.

2.3.5.2.26 Move method (Session)

Syntax:

session.Move left [

top [

width [

height ]]]

Description:

Repositions and resizes the session window. The positions and dimensions are specified in pixels, and are relative to the upper-left corner of the workspace area in AccuTerm’s main window.

2.3.5.2.27 Output method

Syntax:

session.Output expr

Description:

This method transmits data to the host using the communications device attached to the session.

Transmits

expr

(a string expression) to the connected host computer.

This method is the same as the WriteText method.

2.3.5.2.28 Paste method

Syntax:

session.Paste

[

filename

]

Description:

Copies the text contents of the clipboard (or file if

filename

is specified) to the host.

2.3.5.2.29 PlayMidi method

Syntax:

session.PlayMidi filename

Description:

Plays the media file specified by

filename

Filename

may specify a local file or a URL. WAVE, MP3 and

MIDI media files are supported.

164 AccuTerm 7 Help

2.3.5.2.30 PlayWave method

Syntax:

session.PlayWave filename

Description:

Plays the media file specified by

filename

Filename

may specify a local file or a URL. WAVE, MP3 and

MIDI media files are supported.

2.3.5.2.31 PrinterClose method

Syntax:

session

PrinterClose

Description:

Closes the current print job.

2.3.5.2.32 PrinterOff method

Syntax:

session

PrinterOff

Description:

Turns off the slave (or Aux) printer.

2.3.5.2.33 PrinterOn method

Syntax:

session

PrinterOn

[

mode

]

Description:

Turns on the slave (or Aux) printer. If

mode

is zero (default), printer is in "copy" mode (data is displayed on both the screen and printer). Otherwise, printer is in "transparent" mode (data is sent to the printer only, not the screen).

2.3.5.2.34 PrintScreen method

Syntax:

session

PrintScreen

Description:

Prints the text screen to the printer.

2.3.5.2.35 ReadText method

Syntax:

result = session.ReadText(

[

mode

[

maxlen

[

timeout

]]]

)

Description:

This method accepts input from the communications device attached to the session. If

mode

is 0

(default), raw data is returned, up to

maxlen

characters or until

timeout

seconds have passed. If

mode

AccuTerm 7 Automation 165

1, a "line" of data is returned, up to

maxlen

characters or until

timeout

seconds have passed. A "line" is terminated by a

CR+ LF

LF+ CR

. The terminator is not returned as part of the input. Default values for

maxlen

and

timeout

are 80 and 30 respectively.

This method is the same as the Input method, and is available when using late binding.

2.3.5.2.36 Reset method

Syntax:

session.Reset

[

mode

]

Description:

Resets the terminal (

mode

= 1 or atResetTerminal

), the communication device (

mode

= 2 or atResetComm

), both (default,

mode

= 0 or atResetAll

) or closes the connection (

mode

= 3 or atCloseComm

). Note: you may need to reset the communication device after changing certain device related properties in order for the changes to take effect.

2.3.5.2.37 ResetComm method

Syntax:

session.ResetComm

Description:

Resets the communication device. Note: you may need to reset the communication device after

changing certain device related properties in order for the changes to tak e effect.

2.3.5.2.38 ResetTerm method

Syntax:

session.ResetTerm

Description:

Resets the terminal emulator for session (clears screen, resets protect mode, unlocks keyboard, etc.)

2.3.5.2.39 Resize method (Session)

Syntax:

session.Resize width,height

Description:

Resizes a session window. The dimensions are specified in pixels.

2.3.5.2.40 Save method

Syntax:

session

Save

[

filename

]

Description:

Saves the session configuration. If

filename

is not specified, the original file name is used. If there is no file name for the session, the user will be prompted for a file name.

166 AccuTerm 7 Help

2.3.5.2.41 SaveAs method

Syntax:

session

SaveAs

Description:

Saves the session configuration prompting for file name.

2.3.5.2.42 ScrollHistory method

Syntax:

session

ScrollHistory

cmd

Description:

This method manipulates the history scroll position.

Cmd

= atScrlHistLineUp

(0) to scroll the history up one line; atScrlHistLineDown

(1) to scroll the history down one line, atScrlHistPageUp

(2) to scroll up one page, atScrlHistPageDown

(3) to scroll down one page, atScrlHistTop

(6) to scroll to the top

(first line) of the history, atScrlHistBottom

(7) to scroll to the bottom (live screen).

2.3.5.2.43 Select method

Syntax:

session.Select

[

left

[

top

[

right

[

bottom

]]]]

Description:

Places a selection rectangle on the session screen. Defaults are upper left corner and lower right corner of screen.

This is the same as the SetSelection method, but is not available when using late binding.

See also:

Selection property

2.3.5.2.44 SetBlock method

Syntax:

session.SetBlock ScreenBlock , left , top ,

[

page

]

Description:

Copies the contents of

ScreenBlock

object

ScreenBlock

to the specified location on the screen. The copied block contains all text, attribute, color, protect and character set information. Default

page

is the current page. This method must be used with the

GetBlock

method, and may be used to effect

"windowing".

See also:

ScreenBlock object

2.3.5.2.45 SetExtension method

Syntax:

session.SetExtension leadin, terminator

AccuTerm 7 Automation 167

Description:

leadin

is not NULL, then this method enables the session

Extension

event. This event may be used to extend the functionality of AccuTerm’s emulation engine. The

leadin

string specifies one or more "leadin" character codes, which, when preceded by the

ESC

control code, signal the start of an "extended" function. Receipt of one of the characters in the

terminator

string signals the end of the "extended" function. If

terminator

is NULL, then the next character after one of the

leadin

characters signals the end of the "extended" function. When the

Extension

event is fired, the string beginning with the

leadin

character and ending with the

terminator

character is passed to the event handler. If leadin is NULL, then the

Extension

event is disabled. Note: only characters which form invalid terminal escape

sequences should be used for

leadin

, otherwise the extension will not function.

2.3.5.2.46 SetSelection method

Syntax:

session.SetSelection

[

left

[

top

[

right

[

bottom

]]]]

Description:

Places a selection rectangle on the session screen. Defaults are upper left corner and lower right corner of screen.

This is the same as the Select method, and is available when using late binding.

See also:

GetSelection method

Selection property

2.3.5.2.47 SetText method

Syntax:

session.SetText text

[

col

[

row

[

color

]]]

)

Description:

Copies

text

(a string expression) to the specified location on the session screen. Default location is the current cursor location. Default color is last color used, or value assigned to the

Color

property. The cursor location is updated by this method.

2.3.5.2.48 Show method (Session)

Syntax:

session

Show

Description:

Makes the session window visible.

2.3.5.2.49 Terminate method (Session)

Syntax:

session.Terminate

[

prompt

]

Description:

This closes the session. If

prompt

= 1 or 3, and If any session settings have been modified subsequent

168 AccuTerm 7 Help

to loading or saving the session, the user will be prompted whether to save the settings. If

prompt

= 2 or

3, and the session is connected via a network or dialup connection, the user will be prompted to disconnect.

This method is the same as the Close method, and is available when using late binding.

2.3.5.2.50 UnloadImage method

Syntax:

session.UnloadImage

[

filename

]

Description:

Removes an image created with the

LoadImage

method from the terminal screen. The image to be removed is identified by

filename

. If

filename

is not specified, the all images are removed.

2.3.5.2.51 Upload method

Syntax:

result = session.Upload(source , protocol , binary

[

overwrite

]

)

Description:

Uploads a file from the user’s PC to the connected host system.

Source

is the name of the source file(s)

(Kermit, Ymodem and Zmodem may use wild-card characters in

source

Protocol

is atProtocolASCII

, atProtocolKermit

atProtocolXmodem

atProtocolYmodem

or atProtocolZmodem

Binary

is True

(non-zero) for binary transfer mode, False (zero) for text transfer mode.

Overwrite

is meaningful for

Zmodem only and must be atProtect

atOverwrite

atAppend

atNewer

atUpdate

or atResume

2.3.5.2.52 WaitFor method

Syntax:

result = session.WaitFor(mode, timeout, string1

[ , ... ,

string10])

Description:

This method causes AccuTerm to wait for one or more strings to be received from the host system.

Returns the index of the string first matched, or zero (0) if no string matched within

timeout

seconds. If

mode

is zero, a case-sensitive comparison is performed, otherwise the comparison is case-insensitive.

Up to ten target strings may be specified.

For the

WaitFor

method to work properly, the session

InputMode

property should be set to 1 or 2.

Otherwise, the terminal emulation process may process characters received from the host before the

WaitFor

function has a chance to examine them.

2.3.5.2.53 WriteText method

Syntax:

session.WriteText expr

Description:

This method transmits data to the host using the communications device attached to the session.

Transmits

expr

(a string expression) to the connected host computer.

AccuTerm 7 Automation 169

This method is the same as the Output method.

2.3.5.3

Session events

2.3.5.3.1 DataReady event

Syntax:

object_DataReady()

Description:

This event is fired when the session’s

InputMode

property is non-zero, and data has been received from the host and is ready to be read using the

Input

method.

2.3.5.3.2 Extension event

Syntax:

object_Extension(text as String)

Description:

This event is fired when one of the extension prefix and suffix characters have been received by the emulation engine. This event is used to extend the functionality of the emulation engine. Use the

SetExtension

method to specify the prefix and suffix characters.

2.3.6 The Sessions Collection

You can create (open) a new

session , and you can access any opened session by using the

Sessions collection. The

Sessions

collection acts like an array of

Session

objects with one element for each open session.

The

Sessions

collection is used to access any open session by using an array reference:

Set obj = Sessions(

index) returns a

Session

object for session

index

. Session indexes are numbered from zero; the first open session is

Sessions(0)

. The last session is

Sessions(Sessions.Count() – 1)

Sessions methods

Sessions.Add method

Sessions.Count method

2.3.6.1

Sessions methods

2.3.6.1.1 Add method

Syntax:

Set

object = Sessions.Add

(

[

filename

[

state

[

mode

[

hidden

]]]]

)

Description:

The

Sessions.Add

method creates and initializes a new session. The return value is a

Session

object:

All arguments are optional:

170 AccuTerm 7 Help

filename state mode hidden object

configuration file name used to initialize session.

initial window state (0 = normal, 1 = minimized, 2 = maximized) input mode (0 = normal, 1 = synchronous, 2 = disconnected)

0 if new session is initially visible, 1 if hidden session object created by this method

2.3.6.1.2 AddClone method

Syntax:

Set

object = Sessions.AddClone

(

session

[

state

[

mode

[

hidden

]]]]

)

Description:

The

Sessions.AddClone

method creates and initializes a new session from an existing session. The return value is a

Session

object. Except for the

session

argument, arguments are optional:

session

source session from which the clone is made.

state mode hidden object

initial window state (0 = normal, 1 = minimized, 2 = maximized) input mode (0 = normal, 1 = synchronous, 2 = disconnected)

0 if new session is initially visible, 1 if hidden session object created by this method

2.3.6.1.3 Count method

Syntax:

count = Sessions.Count()

Description:

The

Sessions.Count

method returns the number of open sessions.

2.3.7 The Settings Object

The

Settings

method of the

Session

object returns a reference to a temporary

Settings

object. This temporary object is used to retrieve or modify a number of properties as a group. When changing multiple properties, using the

Settings

object improves efficiency.

Nearly all of the properties of the

Settings

object are identical to properties of the

Session

object or to properties of the

AccuTerm

object. Certain properties of the

Settings

object (and all methods of this object) should not be used in scripts or in automation. These properties and methods are noted, and they should only be used when using the AccuTerm Emulator Control in another (custom) application.

The recommended way to use the

Settings

object is in a

With Session.Settings … End With construct.

Note: when using the

Settings

object from a .NET language, call the

Apply

method just before

End

With

due to the way objects are freed in the .NET environment.

Settings properties

Ansi8Bit property

AnsiAppCursor property

AnsiAppKeypad property

Answerback property

AsciiDelay property

AsciiEOL property

AttributeMask property

AutoAnswer property

BackgroundPictureFile property

BackgroundPictureMode property

BackgroundTransparency property

Baud property

BkspSendsDel property

BoldFont property

BreakKeyAction property

Changed property

(do not use in scripts)

Charset property

ClientCertificateID property

Colors() property

ConnectTimeout property

CopySelMode property

CursorType property

DataBits property

DefaultCaptureDir property

DefaultTextEncoding property

DefaultXferDir property

DefaultXferMode property

DefaultXferOverwrite property

Device property

DeviceLicenseMode property

DisableAppMode property

HostCertificateValidation property

HostKeyFingerprint property

HostKeyValidation property

HostName property

HostPort property

HostTermType property

KeepaliveInterval property

KermitCRC property

KermitEOL property

KermitErrRetry property

KermitInitRetry property

KermitQuote property

KermitRept property

KermitTimeout property

LegibleFont property

LockBaudRate property

LockFKeys property

MapUpperFKeys property

AccuTerm 7 Automation 171

172 AccuTerm 7 Help

OverrideModemConfig property

Pages property

Palette() property

Parity property

PasteEOFChar property

PasteEOFMode property

PasteEOLChar property

PasteEOLMode property

Port property

PrinterColorMode property

PrinterFontBold property

PrinterFontItalic property

PrinterFontName property

PrinterFontSize property

PrinterName property

PrinterOrientation property

PrinterPaperSize property

PrinterPaperSource property

PrinterTimeout property

PrintJobEject property

PrintScreenBackground property

PrintScreenEject property

ProtectAttr property

ScaleFont property

ScreenPrintAdapterScript property

ScreenPrinterName property

ScreenPrintMode property

ScreenPrintOrientation property

ScreenPrintPaperSize property

ScreenPrintPaperSource property

ScrMode property

ScrollMode property

SlavePrintAdapterScript property

SlavePrinterName property

SlavePrintMode property

Sound property

SSHAuth property

SSHCipher property

SSHUseOnlyPreferredCipher property

TelnetBinary property

TelnetBypass property

TelnetKeepaliveIsNOP property

TermType property

AccuTerm 7 Automation 173

XmodemTimeout property

YmodemTimeout property

ZmodemAuto property

ZmodemTimeout property

Settings methods (do not use in scripts)

ReadProperties method

Save method

WriteProperties method

2.3.7.1

Settings methods

2.3.7.1.1 Apply method

do not use in scripts

Syntax:

settings.Apply

Description:

The Apply method applies any changed properties to the emulator.

2.3.7.1.2 Dialog method

do not use in scripts

Syntax:

settings.Dialog

[

Title

, [

InitSel

, [

Categories

]]]

Description:

This method displays the emulator settings dialog box which will allow the user to modify most settings.

You can specify an optional

Title

for the dialog, as well as the initially selected item

InitSel

, and a list of

Categories

which are displayed. The

Categories

list is a string with a single letter for each category to show in the dialog. If the

categories

argument is null, all categories are shown. Sub-categories for

Connection (D1...D7), Colors (C0...C2) and Printer (P1...P2) are also possible, if only a specific settings panel is desired.

Category code

Initial selection

2.3.8 AccuTerm constants

Description:

The following constants may be used in setting many of AccuTerm’s properties.

AccuTerm 7 Automation 205

Device constants atDevNONE = 0 atDevSERIAL = 1 atDevPICLAN = 2 atDevTELNET = 3 atDevMODEM = 4 atDevSSH = 5

Serial port constants atBaud300 = 0 atBaud1200 = 1 atBaud2400 = 2 atBaud4800 = 3 atBaud9600 = 4 atBaud14400 = 5 atBaud19200 = 6 atBaud38400 = 7 atBaud57600 = 8 atBaud115200 = 9 atParityNONE = 0 atParityODD = 1 atParityEVEN = 2 atParityMARK = 3 atParitySPACE = 4 atHandshakeNONE = 0 atHandshakeXON = 1 atHandshakeRTS = 2 atHandshakeDTR = 3 atHandshakeXIO

= 4

Duplex mode constants atDuplexFULL

= 0 atDuplexHALF

= 1 atDuplexLOCAL

= 2

Terminal type constants atTermTTY = 0 atTermVPA2

= 1 atTermVP60

= 2 atTermP60

= 3 atTermA2E

= 4 atTermWY50

= 5

No communications device selected.

C ommunications device is a serial port.

C ommunications device is a PicLan network connection.

C ommunications device is a TCP/IP Telent network connection.

C ommunications device is a modem.

C ommunications device is a TCP/IP Secure Shell connection.

Baud rate is 300 bps.

Baud rate is 1200 bps.

Baud rate is 2400 bps.

Baud rate is 4800 bps.

Baud rate is 9600 bps.

Baud rate is 14,400 bps.

Baud rate is 19,200 bps.

Baud rate is 38,400 bps.

Baud rate is 57,600 bps.

Baud rate is 115,200 bps.

No parity checking

Use odd parity

Use even parity

Use mark parity

Use space parity

Do not use any flow control (handshake)

Use Xon/Xoff (software) flow control (inbound)

Use RTS/CTS (hardware) flow control

Use DTR/DSR (hardware) flow control

Xon/Xoff handshake (bidirectional)

Full duplex (host performs echo)

Half duplex (local echo)

Local mode

TTY emulation

ADDS Viewpoint A2 emulation

ADDS Viewpoint 60 emulation

Procomm ADDS Viewpoint 60 emulation

ADDS Viewpoint A2 Enhanced emulation

Wyse 50 emulation

206 AccuTerm 7 Help

atTermWY60

= 6 atTermVT52

= 7 atTermVT220

= 8 atTermANSI

= 9 atTermPICKMON

= 10 atTermTEK

= 11 atTermVT100

= 12 atTermVT320

= 13 atTermVT420

= 14 atTermSCO

= 15 atTermLinux

= 16 atTermTEK4100

= 17 atTermP30

= 18

File transfer constants atProtocolASCII

= 0 atProtocolKermit

= 1 atProtocolXmodem

= 2 atProtocolYmodem

= 3 atProtocolZmodem

= 4 atProtect

= 0 atOverwrite

= 1 atAppend

= 2 atNewer

= 3 atUpdate atResume

= 4

= 5

Wyse 60 emulation

DEC VT52 emulation

DEC VT220 emulation

ANSI BBS emulation

Pick PC Monitor (console) emulation

Tektronix 4014 emulation

DEC VT100ulation

DEC VT320 emulation

DEC VT420 emulation

SCO Console emulation

Linux Console emulation

Tektronix 4100 emulation

Prism 30 emulation use ASCII file transfer protocol use Kermit file transfer protocol use Xmodem file transfer protocol use Ymodem file transfer protocol use Zmodem file transfer protocol do not overwrite existing file (Zmodem upload only) overwrite existing file (Zmodem upload only) append to existing file (Zmodem upload only) overwrite existing file only when uploaded file is newer

(Zmodem upload only) overwrite existing file, but ignore non-existing file (Zmodem upload only)

Zmodem crash recovery

Reset constants atResetAll

= 0 atResetTerminal atResetComm

= 2

= 1

Reset connection and terminal

Reset terminal only

Reset connection only

Printer constants atPrinterOff atPrinterOn

= 0

= 1

Turn printer off

Auto-print mode atPrinterTransparent

= 2 Transparent print mode

History scroll constants atScrlHistLineUp

= 0 atScrlHistLineDown

= 1 atScrlHistPageUp

= 2 atScrlHistPageDown

= 3 atScrlHistTop

= 6

Scroll history to previous line

Scroll history to next line

Scroll history to previous page

Scroll history to next page

Scroll history to beginning

atScrlHistBottom

= 7 Scroll history to end

AccuTerm 7 Automation 207

208 AccuTerm 7 Help

2.4 Mouse Support

Under normal conditions, clicking the left mouse button on the terminal screen will remove an active selection rectangle from the screen if there is one. Otherwise, a left-click is ignored. If you hold the left button down for about a half-second, you AccuTerm enters "selection mode" and you can drag the mouse to select an area of the screen. The selected area is enclosed with a dotted line.

If you click the terminal screen with the right mouse button, AccuTerm's context menu is shown. The context menu is a quick way to access common functions like copy & paste.

AccuTerm supports extended mouse functions which can used to add mouse functionality to your character-based applications. Two mouse extensions are provided: host mouse reporting, and mouse

pattern matching. The first requires modifications to the application program so that it can tell AccuTerm to send mouse clicks back to the host, as well as interpret the click information that AccuTerm sends back. The second uses a local pattern table. When AccuTerm recognizes a pattern under the mouse, it executes an action defined for the recognized pattern. Using mouse pattern matching generally does not require modifications to the host application.

Host mouse reporting

To use host mouse reporting you need to enable mouse support in

Mouse Settings

. When the application wants AccuTerm to send mouse events, it needs to enable mouse input by sending a special escape sequence (see AccuTerm Programming - Mouse Functions). The mouse cursor changes to a pointing hand when mouse input is enabled. When it no longer wants to receive mouse events, it needs to disable mouse input by sending a different escape sequence. When mouse input is enabled,

AccuTerm sends a report to the host whenever a mouse button is clicked on the terminal screen. The report indicates the character position of the click, the mouse button (left, right or center), and whether the a single-click or double-click has occurred.

Mouse pattern matching

To use mouse pattern matching you need to create a mouse pattern file, then tell AccuTerm to use the table by entering the file name in

Mouse Settings

. Alternatively, the pattern table can be loaded dynamically using special escape sequences (see AccuTerm Programming - Mouse Functions).

The mouse pattern file is a tab delimited text file (ANSI character set). Each line in the file is an defines a pattern to match and the action for a click or double-click if a match is found. The patterns are regular

expressions as are commonly used in many programming languages. Mouse pattern files are typically stored in the AccuTerm program directory (C:\Program Files\Atwin71).

Note: the Tab delimiters are important in this file. Using a word processor lik e Microsoft Word with formatting mark s visible is recommended!

Each line in the mouse pattern file is made up of four fields separated by tabs:

button <tab> pattern <tab> click <tab> dblclk

The pattern file can contain up to 128 lines. Each line specifies the mouse

button

, the

pattern

, the action to take on a

click

and the action to take on a double click (

dblclk

). The fields of each entry are separated by a

TAB

character. The mouse button is a single digit: 1 = left, 2 = right, 3 = center. Pattern and response strings are described below.

Patterns

AccuTerm 7 Automation 209

The pattern field is a "regular expression", similar to the regular expressions used by the Linux grep

command: symbol

[

list]

{

list]

}

any other char

description matches any character beginning of line end of line any characters in

list

(

list

can include a range of characters such as

0-9

) any characters not in

list

any alpha character digit (

0-9

) any alpha or numeric character zero or one of the preceding item zero or more of the preceding item one or more of the preceding item marker for the beginning of the word to return if the pattern matches marker for the end of the word to return if the pattern matches causes the next character in the pattern string to be used literally; for example, \. matches a dot matches itself

Actions

Action strings are encoded using the function key format (see

Keyboard Programming ). Just like

function keys, if the action string is enclosed in square brackets (

[ ]

), AccuTerm treats the text between the brackets as a VBA script and executes it. If the action string is of the form

name]

AccuTerm will display the context menu identified by

name

, which can be a custom context menu (see

Customizing the Menu and Toolbar ). For example, the action string

[*reports]

will display the popup menu named “reports”. If the action string is not enclosed in brackets, it is transmitted to the host, after performing token substitutions as described below.

Tokens

Certain special tokens are permitted in the action string, whether it is enclosed in brackets (VBA script) or not. These tokens are useful for returning information to the host, or for passing as arguments to to the script. These special tokens are:

%WORD%

%COL%

%ROW%

replaced by the "word" which matched the pattern.

The beginning and ending of "word" in the pattern are marked with the

{

and

}

symbols.

replaced by the zero-based character column where the mouse was clicked.

replaced by the zero-based screen row where the mouse was clicked.

210 AccuTerm 7 Help

%BEG%

%END%

%MOVE%

replaced by the zero-based character column where the matched word begins.

replaced by the zero-based character column where the matched word ends.

replaced by the cursor movement commands required to position the cursor to the location of the mouse click. This is basically a string of up, down, left and right cursor position commands.

replaced by the percent (%) character.

Examples

(todo)

AccuTerm 7 Reference 211

3 AccuTerm 7 Reference

3.1 AccuTerm Programming

AccuTerm 7 supports many "private" commands which may be sent by host application programs.

These commands allow for remote control of file transfer and data capture, executing DOS or Windows programs, enabling the mouse, displaying images, playing sounds, executing VBA scripts, and programming the function and keypad keys. These commands are valid in all terminal types.

External Program Execution

ESC STX

command

Executes the Windows command line

command

, then returns to AccuTerm emulation mode immediately. Command is executed concurrently with the terminal session.

Command

may also be the file name of a document that is registered with Windows. If command is a document file name, the program associated with the specified file is used to open the file.

For example, if the file name ends in ".doc", Microsoft Word is used to open the specified document file. You can also use this function to open a URL in the default browser (be sure to include the http:// prefix in the URL):

EQU ESC TO CHAR(27), STX TO CHAR(2), CR TO CHAR(13)

CMD = "calc.exe"

PRINT ESC:STX:'<':CMD:CR:

ESC STX

command

Executes the Windows command line

command

and suspends the terminal session until the command completes. See above for details.

Note: when using this function, you often need the host program to wait until the command terminates. If you require this functionality, then you should send the

ESC STX

command immediately following the

ESC STX

command, and then wait for input. AccuTerm will not process the

ESC STX

until the command terminates. After the command completes,

ESC

STX

transmits AccuTerm's licensing information back to the host, thus the input is satisfied and the host program can continue execution:

EQU ESC TO CHAR(27), STX TO CHAR(2), CR TO CHAR(13)

CMD = "notepad.exe"

PRINT ESC:STX:'>':CMD:CR:

PRINT ESC:STX:'I':

INPUT JUNK

Mouse Functions

ESC STX

Disable mouse input; turns off mouse cursor.

ESC STX

Enable mouse input; turns on mouse cursor. Transmits mouse location whenever a mouse button is pressed. Both single and double clicks are supported. A single-click will always precede a double-click. Note: this command is ignored unless host mouse reporting is

212 AccuTerm 7 Help

enabled in the Mouse Settings.

The format of the mouse click report depends on whether the current terminal type uses

ASCII or ANSI-style function keys. The report is designed to look like a function key, followed by the click position. For terminal types with ASCII-style function keys, the report is:

STX b

ccc.rr

where

indicates which mouse button was pressed (

=left click,

=right click,

= center click,

=left double click,

=right double click,

=center double click),

ccc

is the three digit column of the mouse cursor and

is the two digit row of the mouse cursor (both in decimal,

000.00

is the upper left corner).

For terminal types with ANSI-style function keys, the report is:

ESC

[

n ~

ESC

[

;

c R

where

indicates which mouse button was pressed (101=left click, 102=right click, 103

=center click, 111=left double click, 112=right double click, 113=center double click),

is the row of the mouse cursor and

is the column of the mouse cursor (both in decimal, where 1;1 is the upper left corner). If the terminal is using 8-bit control codes, AccuTerm sends

CSI

instead of

ESC

[

. in this report.

Note: if the mouse is click ed on an image that is displayed on the terminal screen, the location in the above reports is replaced by the image file name.

ESC STX

SystemBuilder compatibility mode; turns on mouse cursor. Transmits mouse location whenever a mouse button is pressed. Note: this command is ignored unless host mouse

reporting is enabled in the Mouse Settings.

STX

CR b

;

c ;

r CR b

indicates which mouse button was pressed (1 = left, 2 = right, 4 = center),

is the column of the mouse cursor and

is the row of the mouse cursor (both in decimal, 0;0 is the upper left corner).

ESC STX

Resets the mouse pattern table used for mouse pattern matching.

ESC STX

button

pattern

click

dblclk

Adds an entry to the mouse pattern table used for mouse pattern matching. See Mouse

Support for more information about using mouse pattern matching.

Data Transfer

ESC STX

p o m x ;

path

Download file from host to PC. Protocol

may be

(ASCII),

(Kermit),

(Xmodem),

(

Ymodem) or

(Zmodem); overwrite

may be

(overwrite) or

(no overwrite) or, if protocol is

, overwrite may be

; transfer mode

may be

(text) or

(binary); translate mode

AccuTerm 7 Reference 213

ESC STX

p m x ; path

Upload file from PC to host. Protocol

may be

(ASCII),

(Kermit),

(Xmodem),

(Ymodem) or

(Zmodem); transfer mode

may be

(text) or

(binary); translate mode

may be

to enable character set translation or

to disable translation.

Path

is the drive, directory and file name of the file to send to the host. Wildcard characters (

) are valid when using Kermit, Ymodem or Zmodem protocols.

Note: the upload command is typically used by applications which implement the host side of the file transfer protocol to automatically start the corresponding client protocol. This command only affects the client (AccuTerm) side of the process.

ESC STX

may be

to enable character set translation or

to disable translation.

Path

is the drive, directory and file name of the file being received. When using Kermit, Ymodem or Zmodem protocols, only drive and directory need be specified, as the file name is included in the transfer protocol; however if the file name is specified here, it overrides the file name included in the transfer protocol.

Note: the download command is typically used by applications which implement the host side of the file transfer protocol to automatically start the corresponding client protocol. This command only affects the client (AccuTerm) side of the process.

Returns status of last file transfer. The format of the status message is:

Status:

s files f bytes b

where

is the number of files transferred,

is the number of bytes transferred, and

is the transfer status:

= transfer successful

= unable to open file

= transfer aborted by operator

= file already exists

= terminated due to timeout

= terminated due to corrupted data

= invalid packet type

= terminated by remote program

= 8 data bits required for protocol

= software flow control not allowed for protocol

= destination file is write protected

ESC STX

p t ;

path

Begin capture. Mode

may be

(overwrite),

(append),

(new file only) or

(clipboard).

Source

may be

to capture printed data or null to capture received data.

may be

(text) to capture text only (filters out control characters) or null for no filtering.

Path

is the drive, directory and file name where the captured data is to be stored. All characters received (or printed) are stored in the file (or clipboard) until capturing is disabled (via local or remote command). Note: when capturing to the clipboard,

path

is ignored.

ESC STX

C X

End capture. The file containing the captured data is closed.

214 AccuTerm 7 Help

ESC STX

path

Send clipboard or file to host. If

path

is null, the contents of the clipboard are sent, otherwise the specified file is sent. Each line is terminated as specified in the ASCII file transfer settings. A

SUB

(

CTRL+ Z

) is sent after the last line.

Status and Control

ESC STX

Returns AccuTerm release, serial number, type and licensee information. Message format is:

ACCUTERM/WIN

rel serial type licensee...

where

rel

is the AccuTerm release number,

serial

is the program serial number,

type

SINGLE

SITE

CORP

DEALER

DEMO

, and

licensee

is the name under which the program has been licensed.

ESC STX

Returns a string indicating the platform, product type, license type, capabilities and automation services. Message format is:

platform * product * license * capabilities * services

where

platform

(Win32);

product

= AccuTerm (standard version),

= AccuTerm

Internet Edition,

= AccuTerm Emulator ActiveX Control,

= AccuTerm Lite; release number,

serial

is the program serial number,

license

= single user,

= site,

= enterprise,

= developer,

= internet,

= component,

= evaluation;

capabilities

is a string of letters indicating the various capabilities where:

A = ASCII protocol supported

B = Border effects (visual styles) enabled

C = Capture supported

D = Download supported

E = Execute command supported

F = On-the-fly character set conversion supported during file transfers

G = GUI supported

H = Server mode supported

I = Image display supported

J = Screen save & restore supported

K = Kermit protocol supported

L = Background image supported

M = Query status supported

O = Object Bridge supported

P = Packetized messages supported

Q = Message integrity checks supported

R = Reliable connection

S = Scripting supported

T = File transfer error info supported

U = Upload supported

V = Host capabilities command supported

W = Synchronous scripts supported

AccuTerm 7 Reference 215

X = File conversion supported

Y = Printer control & status query supported

services

is a string of letters indicating which automation services are available (

= Object

Bridge,

= file converter,

= GUI).

ESC STX

host-capabilities

buffer-size

Informs AccuTerm of any special host program capabilities.

host-capabilities

is a string of letters indicating various host features:

D = host programs use tag notation for system delimiters

C = host supports message checksums

M = host supports message length check

buffer-size

is optional, and specifies the maximum packet size that the client can send to host.

ESC STX

% 0

Returns the program directory, followed by

CR.

This is normally the directory where

AccuTerm is installed, except in the case of AccuTerm Internet Edition, the directory returned is the one containing the Internet Explorer exe file.

ESC STX

% 1

Returns the current directory (usually from the shortcut "start in" field), followed by

CR.

ESC STX

% 2

Returns the directory containing AccuTerm's atwin71.ini file, followed by

CR.

ESC STX

% 3

Returns the directory containing AccuTerm's emulator DLL, followed by

CR.

ESC STX

Terminates the current AccuTerm session. If only one session exists, then AccuTerm is terminated also.

ESC STX

Saves the current session settings to disk. If no session file name exists, then one will be prompted for.

ESC STX

Sets the

CapsLock

key state to "On"

ESC STX

Sets the

CapsLock

key state to "Off"

Terminal Screen

ESC STX

Selects extended (132 column) screen size as defined by the extended columns and rows in the screen settings.

ESC STX

216 AccuTerm 7 Help

Selects normal (80 column) screen size as defined by the normal columns and rows in the screen settings.

ESC STX

color

Sets the foreground (text) color to

color

. This command overrides the foreground color assigned by the last visual attribute selected.

ESC STX

color

Sets the background color to

color

. This command overrides the background color assigned by the last visual attribute selected.

Color Display

0 Black

Dark Blue

Dark Green

Turqoise

Dark Red

Purple

Olive

Light Gray

Dark Grey

Blue

Green

Cyan

Red

Magenta

Yellow

White

Note: the actual display color may vary from the color shown in the table, since it is

possible to modify the palette (see Color Settings).

ESC STX

x1 , y1 , x2 , y2 ,

fill

border

Draw rectangle.

x1, y1

is the upper-left corner and

x2, y2

is the lower-right corner.

Coordinates are in character columns and rows. The upper-left corner of the screen is (0,0).

The rectangle can be filled using either a visual attribute or a background color. To fill with a visual attribute,

fill

A63

. The attribute number is formed by adding the following values:

0 = normal

1 = invisible

2 = blinking

4 = reverse

8 = underline

16 = dim

32 = bright

To fill with a background color (as described above),

fill

...

B15

. To draw a border without filling the rectangle,

fill

. A border can be drawn around the rectangle.

Border

(no border),

(flat border),

(inset border) or

(raised border).

AccuTerm 7 Reference 217

ESC STX

, ID , col , row , width , height , page

Saves a copy of the specified screen block (text, colors and visual effects) and terminal state in memory and associates the block with the specified identifier (

) which can be an arbitrary alpha-numeric string (may not contain commas). Any number of screen blocks can be saved.

Col

and

row

specify the upper-left corner of the block. If either is omitted or null, zero is assumed.

Width

and

height

specify the size of the block. If

width

height

is omitted or null, the screen width or height is used.

Page

optionally specifies the terminal page for the block, and if omitted or null, the current page is used.

ESC STX

, ID , col , row , page , state

Restores the screen block associated with the specified identifier (

) to the screen.

Col

and

row

specify the upper-left corner of the destination. If either is omitted or null, the original position of the saved block is assumed.

Page

optionally specifies the terminal page for the destination, and if omitted or null, the current page is used.

State

optionally specifies whether the terminal state (cursor position, visual attribute, text color, etc.) is restored To restore the terminal state, pass

for this argument.

ESC STX

, ID

Deletes the screen block associated with the specified identifier (

) from memory.

ESC STX

yj,

ID CR

Queries status of a stored screen block. Sends a 0 or 1, followed by a

, indicating if a block of the specified identifier (

) exists in AccuTerm's screen block memory.

Keyboard

ESC STX

t s d k data CR

Program function and keypad keys. Type

may be

(normal function keys),

(control function keys),

(ALT function keys) or

(keypad keys). Both

and

are permitted when programming control-keypad keys. Shift

may be

(unshifted) or

(shifted). Destination

may be null (program key) or

(program function bar button caption). Key code

may be digits

: ; < = >

according to the following table.

Data

contains the function key data (or caption text). Normally, the key data is transmitted to the host when the programmed key is pressed. However, if

data

is enclosed in brackets (

[ ]

), then when the key is pressed, the key data will be interpreted as a VBA script statement and will be executed instead of being sent to the host.

Key

Code

Function key

F10

F11

Editing key

BKSP

TAB

INS

DEL

HOME

END

PGUP

PGDN

LEFT

RIGHT

218 AccuTerm 7 Help

;

F12 DOWN

ESC

ENTER

KPD ENTER

To enter control characters (and special prefix characters) in key data, use the notation shown in the following table:

Key sequence

CTRL

CTRL +

CTRL

CTRL +

CTRL

DELETE

ENQ

ACK

BEL

Control code

NUL

SOH

STX

ETX

EOT

DEL

AccuTerm notation

Key sequence

CTRL

CTRL +

CTRL

CTRL +

CTRL

[

CTRL

]

CTRL

NAK

SYN

ETB

CAN

SUB

ESC

Control code

DLE

DC1

DC2

DC3

DC4

AccuTerm notation

For example, to program the

END

key to send the word "END", followed by a carriage return, the following code could be used:

EQU ESC TO CHAR(27), STX TO CHAR(2), CR TO CHAR(13)

PRINT ESC:STX:'FKU5END^M':CR:

Printer

ESC STX

mode

Selects the printer mode:

mode

= 0 - turns off auto or transparent print

mode

= 1 - turns on auto (copy) print mode

mode

= 2 - turns on transparent print mode

mode

= X - turns off auto or transparent print and closes the print job immediately

Multimedia

ESC STX

, filename , col , row , width , height , aspect, border

Displays the image file

filename

at column

col

and row

row

Height

and

width

are optional; if specified (and not zero), the image is scaled to

height

rows and

width

columns. Otherwise,

AccuTerm 7 Reference 219

the original image size is used. If

aspect

is non-zero, the image aspect ratio is preserved

(the specified width or height is reduced to preserve the aspect ration).

Border

for no border,

for simple border,

for raised border or

for inset border style. Image file types supported include BMP, JPEG, GIF, PCD, PCX, PICT, PNG, PSD, TARGA, TIFF, WBMP,

XBM, XPM and Windows Metafile. Images are considered "protected" data; a "clear unprotected characters" command will not clear images from the terminal screen.

The image file does not need to be a local file; if an internet connection is available the filename can specify a URL instead of a local or network file.

Note: AccuTerm 7 uses the FreeImage Open Source image library.

ESC STX

, filename

Removes the displayed image file

filename

from the screen.

ESC STX

Clears all displayed images from the screen.

ESC STX

iB,

filename,scalemode,opacity

Loads an image to use as the screen background (wallpaper).

filename

- the path or URL of the image to use as the screen background.

scalemode

= 0 - picture is stretched to fit screen size. This may alter the picture's aspect ratio.

scalemode

= 1 - picture is scaled so that its longest dimension fills the screen. The area not filled by the picture is black.

scalemode

= 2 - picture is scaled so that its shortest dimension fill the screen. The longer dimension is cropped.

opacity

- specifies the opacity of the background image, as a percentage. 100 means that the picture is opaque. 0 means that the image is invisible (transparent) and the screen background color is used as the background. Any percentage in between blends the image with the screen background color.

To clear the background image, simply use

ESC STX

filename

ESC STX

filename CR

Plays sound file

filename

. The file does not need to be a local file; if an internet connection is available the filename can specify a URL instead of a local or network file. Supported sound file formats are WAVE, MIDI and MP3.

Scripting

ESC STX

statements

Executes VBA script

statements

. See Scripting for details on VBA scripting. Multiple statements may be executed; separate each statement with

control characters.

You can call subroutines or functions contained within the script loaded in the Main Script tab of the Script Editor window. For example, to call subroutine

FOO

, simply send:

ESC STX

P FOO

. You can execute a script stored in a script file (.atsc file) by using the Chain statement:

220 AccuTerm 7 Help

EQU ESC TO CHAR(27), STX TO CHAR(2), CR TO CHAR(13)

FILENAME = 'myscriptfile.atsc'

SCRIPT = 'Chain "':FILENAME:'"'

PRINT ESC:STX:'P':SCRIPT:CR:

ESC STX

statements CR

Executes VBA script

statements

(see above) except that the script is synchronized with the terminal state. This basically sets the session's

InputMode

property to 1 before the script starts and restores it once the script completes. This ensures that any characters received from the host will not be processed by the terminal emulator unless they are first processed in the script using

Input

WaitFor

functions. This has the effect of buffering any data, control codes or escape sequences received while the script is running. This is useful when changing

Session

properties such as screen sizes, terminal type, etc.

Note: in previous versions of AccuTerm, synchronization required adding a final

Output

method in the script and corresponding

INPUT

statement in the host program. However, this technique is not compatible with typeahead on the host and is less efficient than

ESC STX

and is no longer recommended.

AccuTerm 7 Reference 221

3.2 Wyse Programming

This topic describes the command sequences for programming the Wyse 50, Wyse 60 and ADDS

Viewpoint Enhanced terminal emulations. These three emulations use a common command set with a few differences. The differences are noted.

Operating Modes

ESC

Set mode

. This command is used to set many of the terminal's operating modes. The mode values and their function are shown in the

Wyse Operating Mode Table

ESC

Places terminal in local mode.

ESC

D F

Places terminal in full duplex mode.

ESC

D H

Places terminal in half duplex mode.

ESC

Disables auto scrolling. Normally if the cursor is moved down below the last line, the screen is scrolled up one line. If auto scrolling is disabled, the cursor moves to the top line and no scrolling takes place.

ESC

Enables auto scrolling.

ESC

Turns the monitor mode off.

ESC

Turns the monitor mode on.

ESC

Turns the local edit submode on. This command is not supported by AccuTerm and is ignored.

ESC

Turns the local edit submode off. This command is not supported by AccuTerm and is ignored.

ESC

Turns the insert mode on. In this mode, all characters sent to the screen are inserted into the line with any existing characters moved one column to the right.

ESC

Turns the insert mode off.

ESC

222 AccuTerm 7 Help

Lock keyboard.

ESC

EOT

Lock keyboard.

ESC

Unlock keyboard.

ESC

STX

Unlock keyboard.

If the graphics mode is enabled, this command puts the terminal in the Tektronix emulation mode. If the graphics mode is disabled, this command is ignored.

ESC

ESC FF

If the graphics mode is enabled, this command puts the terminal in the Tektronix emulation mode. If graphics mode is disabled, it sets a tab stop at the current cursor column.

ESC

% ! 0

Enters Tektronix 4100 graphics mode.

CAN

Exits from the Tektronix graphics emulation mode.

CAN

Turns on the cursor.

ETB

Turns off the cursor.

ESC

Exits from the Tektronix graphics emulation mode. If the terminal is not in the graphics emulation mode, it clears any tab stops at the current cursor column.

ESC

message

Displays a message in the host message line. The message string can be up to 46 characters in 80 column mode and 98 characters in the 132 column mode.

ESC

c ;

message

Programs the answerback message (up to 30 characters).

ESC

c <

Sends the answerback message to the host, followed by

ACK

. If no answerback message has been programmed, simply sends

ACK

ESC

c =

Erases the answerback message.

ESC

d /

End of line wrap on. When the cursor reaches the end of a line, it will wrap to the beginning

AccuTerm 7 Reference 223

of the next line.

ESC

d .

ESC

e &

Set

CapsLock

keyboard state.

ESC

e '

Clear

CapsLock

keyboard state.

ESC

e .

Do not clear screen when screen size changes.

ESC

e /

Clear screen when screen size changes.

ESC

^ 0

Normal display (light characters, dark background).

ESC

^ 1

Reverse display (dark characters, light background).

ESC

SPACE

Enhance mode off. If the current emulation is ADDS VPA2E, then the emulation will change to ADDS VPA2.

ESC

~ !

Enhance mode on. If the current emulation is ADDS VPA2, then the emulation will change to ADDS VPA2E.

ESC

~ "

Select Wyse 50 emulation.

ESC

~ %

Select ADDS VPA2E emulation.

ESC

~ 4

Select Wyse 60 emulation.

ESC

~ 6

Select VT-52 emulation.

ESC

~ 8

Select Viewpoint 60 emulation.

ESC

~ ;

End of line wrap off. When the cursor reaches the end of a line, it does not wrap to the beginning of the next line.

Select VT-100 emulation.

ESC

~ <

Select VT-220 7-bit emulation.

224 AccuTerm 7 Help

ESC

~ =

ESC

~ A

Select VT-220 8-bit emulation.

ESC

~ B

Select VT-320 7-bit emulation.

ESC

~ C

Select VT-320 8-bit emulation.

ESC

~ >

Select Tektronix 4014 emulation.

ESC

c V

ESC

c W

Save current session settings to disk. If no session file name exists, then one will be prompted for.

ESC

c X

Reset (reload session configuration file).

Character Set Selection

Wyse terminals have two character sets (primary and secondary) of 128 symbols each, and four font banks of 128 symbols. Each font bank can be assigned a pre-defined symbol set (like PC Multinational), and each character set can be assigned to one font bank.

By default, the native Wyse 50 symbol set is assigned to font banks 0, 2 and 3. The PC Multinational symbol set is assigned to font bank 1. Font bank 0 is assigned to the primary character set and font bank 1 is assigned to the secondary character set.

ESC

c D

Selects the primary character set. This is the default, and when selected, the primary character set is displayed for character codes 0 to 127, and the secondary character set is displayed for codes 128 to 255.

ESC

c E

Selects the secondary character set. When the secondary character set is selected, it is displayed for character codes 0 to 127 and again for codes 128 to 255.

ESC

c B

bank

Assigns font bank

bank

(0, 1, 2 or 3) to the primary character set.

ESC

c C

bank

Assigns font bank

bank

(0, 1, 2 or 3) to the secondary character set.

ESC

c @

bank set

Assigns pre-defined symbol set

set

to font bank

bank. Set

can be one of the following:

set

` symbol set

Native Wyse 50

AccuTerm 7 Reference 225

set

b symbol set

PC Multinational

US ASCII

DEC Graphics / ISO Latin-1

PC Standard

Cursor Positioning

Cursor right. If the cursor is on the last column of the line, the cursor will wrap to the next line, possibly scrolling the screen up.

ACK

Cursor right. If the cursor is on the last column of the line, the cursor will wrap to the next line, possibly scrolling the screen up.

Cursor left. If the cursor is at the beginning of the line, it is moved up to the last column of the previous line. If the cursor is at the home position, it is moved to the lower right hand corner of the screen.

NAK

ESC

Cursor left. Same as the

command.

Moves the cursor to the next programmed tab stop. For this command to work, tab stops must be programmed with the

ESC

1 command.

ESC

Move the cursor left to the previous tab stop.

Cursor down. If the cursor is on the last line of the screen and the "no scroll" mode is turned off, the screen will scroll up one line. Otherwise, the cursor will move to the top line of the screen.

Cursor up. If the cursor is at the top row, it is moved to the bottom row.

SUB

Cursor up. If the cursor is at the top row, it is moved to the bottom row.

ESC

Cursor up. If the cursor is at the top row, the screen is scrolled down.

Moves the cursor to the first column (column zero) of the current row.

Moves the cursor down one row and over to the first column (column zero).

DEL

226 AccuTerm 7 Help

Ignored.

ESC

{

Moves the cursor to the home position (upper left corner of the screen).

VT r

Moves cursor to row

, where

is a valid row code from the

Viewpoint Cursor Address Table

DLE c

Moves the cursor to column

where

is a valid column in the from the

Viewpoint Cursor

Address Table

ESC

r c

Moves the cursor to row

and column

and

are single byte cursor address codes from the

Wyse Cursor Address Table . Note that this command cannot position the cursor past

column 95.

ESC

r c

Moves the cursor to row

and column

where

and

are single byte cursor address codes from the

Wyse Cursor Address Table

. Note that this command cannot position the cursor past column 95.

ESC

rr R ccc C

Moves the cursor to row

and column

ccc

is the two digit decimal number of the row

(from row 1 at the top).

ccc

is the three digit decimal number of the column (from column 1 at the left). Note that this command can address the entire 132 column screen.

ESC

Moves the cursor to column

where

is a single byte column address from the

Wyse

Cursor Address Table . Note that this command cannot position the cursor past column 95.

ESC

[

Moves the cursor to row

where

is a single byte row address from the

Wyse Cursor

Address Table

ESC

]

Selects page 0.

ESC

}

Selects page 1.

ESC

n r c

Selects page

(pages numbered from 0) and positions the cursor to row

, column

and

are single byte cursor address codes from the

Wyse Cursor Address Table

. To select pages higher than 9, use CHAR(

+48).

ESC

Selects page

. Pages are numbered from 0 to 9.

AccuTerm 7 Reference 227

ESC

w C

Page forward. If currently on the last page, the first page is selected.

ESC

Page forward. If currently on the last page, the first page is selected.

ESC

w B

Page back. If currently on the first page, the last available page is selected.

ESC

Page back. If currently on the first page, the last available page is selected.

ESC

w @

n r c

Selects page

(pages numbered from 0) and positions the cursor to row

, column

and

are single byte cursor address codes from the

Wyse Cursor Address Table

. To select pages higher than 9, use CHAR(

+48).

ESC

A r

Splits screen horizontally at row

, where

is a valid row code from the

Wyse Cursor

Address Table

or from the

Viewpoint Cursor Address Table if in Viewpoint Enhanced mode.

ESC

1 r

Splits screen horizontally at row

and clear screen, where

is a valid row code from the

Wyse Cursor Address Table

or from the

Viewpoint Cursor Address Table if in Viewpoint

Enhanced mode.

ESC

Redefine screen as one window.

ESC

Redefine screen as one window and clear screen.

Erasing and Editing

SOH

Clears the screen and returns the cursor to the home position (upper left corner of the screen).

Clears the screen and returns the cursor to the home position (upper left corner of the screen). Turns off the protected mode.

SUB

Clears the screen and returns the cursor to the home position (upper left corner of the screen). If the terminal is in "protect mode", only unprotected characters are cleared.

ESC

;

Clears the screen and returns the cursor to the home position (upper left corner of the screen). If the terminal is in "protect mode", only unprotected characters are cleared.

228 AccuTerm 7 Help

ESC

Clears the screen and move the cursor to the home position (upper left corner of the screen). Both protected and unprotected characters are cleared. Turns off the protect mode.

ESC

Clears from the cursor position to the end of the current line. If the terminal is in "protect mode", only unprotected characters are cleared.

ESC

Clears from the cursor position to the end of the current line.

ESC

Clears from the cursor position to the end of the screen. If the terminal is in "protect mode", only unprotected characters are cleared.

ESC

Clears from the cursor position to the end of the screen. If the terminal is in "protect mode", only unprotected characters are cleared.

ESC

Clears from the cursor position to the end of the screen.

ESC

Clears the screen to protected spaces. Turns off the protect mode. "No scroll" mode is turned off (auto scroll).

ESC

Insert line. A blank line is inserted before the current line. The current line and all lines below are moved down one row. The bottom line of the screen is lost. The cursor is moved to the left most column of the inserted line.

ESC

Insert character. A blank is inserted at the current cursor position. All characters from the cursor position to the right are moved right one column.

ESC

Delete line. The current line is deleted. All lines below the current line are moved up one position. The bottom line is blank. The cursor is moved to the left most column.

ESC

Delete character. The character at the current cursor position is deleted. All characters to the right of the cursor are moved left one column and a blank is placed on the last column of the line.

ESC

c N

w h

Box rectangle. Current cursor location is upper left,

and

specify rectangle width and height.

ESC

c G

r c

Box rectangle. Current cursor location is one corner,

and

specify row and column of other corner.

AccuTerm 7 Reference 229

ESC

c F

r c x

Clear unprotected rectangle. Cursor location is one corner,

and

specify row and column of other corner. Rectangle is cleared to character

ESC

c H

r c x

Clear entire rectangle. Cursor location is one corner,

and

specify row and column of other corner. Rectangle is cleared to character

ESC

c ^ a sp P rr1 R ccc1 C rr2 R ccc2 C dp P rr3 R ccc3 C

Copy / swap / move rectangle. Action

is: 0 to swap, 1 to copy, 2 to move. Source page

, upper left corner

rr1

ccc1

; lower right corner

rr2

ccc2

; destination page

, upper left corner

rr3

ccc3

. All parameters are decimal numbers. Columns and rows are numbered from 1, pages are numbered from 0.

Video Attributes

Video attributes work differently in the Wyse 50 or Viewpoint Enhanced emulations than they do in the

Wyse 60 emulation. Under Wyse 60, the attributes are non-embedded. In other words, they do not take up a character position on the screen. Under Wyse 50 or Viewpoint Enhanced, the attribute takes up a space and changes all following characters to the end of the screen or until another attribute character is encountered.

Under Viewpoint Enhanced mode, a single non-embedded (takes up no space) "tagged" attribute may be assigned and used. This "tagged" attribute is also the "protect" attribute.

AccuTerm's Viewpoint Enhanced emulation supports most ADDS 4000 functions, including support for both non-embedded attributes like Wyse 60 and embedded attributes like Wyse 50.

ESC

Assigns the "tagged" video attribute.

is the video attribute code from the

Viewpoint

Attribute Code Table

Start tagged attribute. All characters received after this code are displayed with the currently assigned tagged attribute. If the tagged attribute is changed, the attribute of the displayed characters also changes.

End tagged attribute. All characters received after this code are displayed with the normal video attribute.

ESC

n a

Sets the video attribute for any of the four application display areas.

is the display field code and

is the attribute code from the

Wyse Attribute Code Table . The application

display field codes are:

Field (

) Display area

The main screen

The function key labeling line

The status line

230 AccuTerm 7 Help

Field (

) Display area

The host message field

ESC

Assign visual attribute. In Wyse 50 and ADDS VP mode, this command displays a space at the cursor position, then changes the visual attribute for all characters from this position until the end of the screen or until another attribute code is encountered. In Wyse 60 mode, this command selects the attribute for characters displayed after this command. The visual attribute is specified by the attribute code

from the

Wyse Attribute Code Table .

ESC

Assign visual attribute. This command selects the attribute for characters displayed after this command. The visual attribute is specified by the attribute code

from the

Wyse

Attribute Code Table

ESC

Assign line attribute. This is the same command as is used to assign visual attributes, but with different attribute codes. This sequence is used to specify character size for the current line. The line attribute code

is:

E attribute

normal size characters double-wide characters double-high characters, top double-high characters, bottom double-wide, double-high characters, top double-wide, double-high characters, bottom

ESC HT n

Assign line attribute (performs the same function as above using different attribute codes):

1 attribute

normal size characters double-wide characters double-wide, double-high characters, top double-wide, double-high characters, bottom

Protected Attributes

Protected attributes are used by some software applications to protect characters from being overwritten. If the terminal is running in its protected mode, the cursor cannot be positioned over protected characters and all non-protected characters can be cleared by using the "clear unprotected" command.

ESC

Enable protect mode and set "no scroll" mode.

AccuTerm 7 Reference 231

ESC

Disable protect mode and set "auto scroll".

ESC

)

Start protect mode. All characters sent after this sequence become protected characters until the protect mode is turned off.

Start protect mode.

ESC

(

Stop protect mode. All characters sent after this sequence are unprotected characters.

Stop protect mode.

ESC

Writes all unprotected attributes with a specified attribute where

is a valid attribute code from the

Wyse Attribute Code Table .

ESC

Replaces all unprotected characters with the character

ESC

;

ESC

SUB

Clears all unprotected characters.

ESC

Clears the screen to protected spaces. The protect mode is turned off and the auto scroll function is turned on.

ESC

Clears the entire cursor column to protected spaces.

ESC

Clears unprotected characters from the cursor position to the end of the current line.

Attributes are not cleared.

ESC

Clears unprotected characters from the cursor position to the end of the screen. Attributes are not cleared.

Line Graphics

ESC

Display a line graphic character at the current cursor position. The graphic character is specified by graphic character code

from the

Wyse Graphic Character Table . The line

graphics characters can be used for drawing simple boxes on the screen in text mode. It should not be confused with the Tektronix graphic mode which is much more sophisticated and capable of drawing pie charts, scientific diagrams, etc.

ESC

STX

232 AccuTerm 7 Help

Turn on line graphics mode. All characters received while the line graphics mode is on are interpreted as graphics characters according to the

Wyse Graphic Character Table .

ESC

ETX

Turn off line graphics mode.

Printer Control and Terminal Reports

ESC SPACE

Reports the terminal identification to the host computer. Sends

followed by a

ESC

Transmits the cursor address to the host computer. The cursor address is transmitted in 80 column format, followed by a

ESC

w `

Transmits the page number and cursor address to the host computer. The cursor address is transmitted in 80 column format, followed by a

ESC

Sends unprotected characters in the current row to the host computer, from the beginning of the row up to the cursor position. The row is terminated by a

ESC

Prints the entire screen to the printer port.

ESC

Sends the screen to the host computer, beginning with the upper-left corner, and ending at the cursor position. Each row except the last is terminated by a

control code. The last row is terminated by a

Sends the character at the current cursor position to the host computer.

ESC

Sends the current row to the host computer, from the beginning of the row, up to the cursor position. The row is terminated by a

Sends a message unprotected. This function is not supported by AccuTerm.

ESC

Sends all unprotected characters on the screen to the host computer, beginning with the upper-left corner, and ending at the cursor position. Each row except the last is terminated by a

control code. The last row is terminated by a

Sends the current cursor address to the host computer in 132 column format. No

is sent after the address.

ESC

AccuTerm 7 Reference 233

Sends a message. This function is not supported by AccuTerm.

DC2

Auto print mode. Characters are displayed and printed. This command will not function if the printer selection is set to "No printer".

DC4

Cancel auto or transparent print mode. Note: This command will not turn the printer off if it was turned on by the Viewpoint Enhanced transparent print or ANSI print commands.

CAN

Transparent print mode. Characters are printed, but not displayed.

ESC

Transparent print mode. Characters are printed, but not displayed.

ESC

Cancel transparent print mode.

ESC

d #

Transparent print mode. Characters are printed, but not displayed.

ESC

[ ? 5 i

Transparent print mode (ANSI). Characters are printed, but not displayed. When AccuTerm receives this command, it goes into transparent print mode until it receives the ANSI print off sequence below. This command is useful for printing graphics data to the printer. Since

AccuTerm requires the specific ANSI cancel command below to exit transparent print mode, there is less chance of a control character interrupting the graphic printing.

ESC

[ ? 4 i

Cancel transparent print mode (ANSI).

Programming Function Keys

The Wyse 50, Wyse 60 and Viewpoint Enhanced emulations support the ability to download function key values from the host computer. The function key programming consists of two steps, downloading the actual values which the key will send to the host whenever it is pressed or downloading a descriptive function key label that is displayed on the function key labeling line.

When programming the function keys or function key labels, all characters (including control characters) may be included in the sequence, except for the terminator (

DEL

for keys,

for labels).

To clear a programmed function key or label, send the same command used for programming the key or label, but omit the sequence.

ESC

k sequence

DEL

Program function key

to send

sequence

to host when pressed. The function key codes are specified in the

Wyse Function Key Table .

ESC

f label

Program function key label field

label

. The field codes are specified in the

Wyse

234 AccuTerm 7 Help

Function Key Table .

ESC

Z 0

k sequence

DEL

Program function or keypad key

to send

sequence

to host when pressed. The function and keypad key codes are specified in the

Wyse Function Key Table

ESC

z (

text

Sets the unshifted label line to

text

. If

text

is omitted, clears the unshifted label line.

ESC

z )

text

Sets the shifted label line to

text

. If

text

is omitted, clears the shifted label line.

ESC

f label

Program function key label field

label

. The function key field codes are specified in the

Viewpoint Function Key Table .

ESC

text CR

Sets the unshifted label line to

text

. If

text

is omitted, clears the unshifted label line.

ESC

k 0n sequence

Program function or keypad key

to send

sequence

to host when pressed. The function and keypad key codes are specified in the

Viewpoint Function Key Table .

ESC

c U

Clear all redefinable key definitions to their default values.

ESC

Z ~

Read programmable key definition for key

3.2.1 Wyse Tables

3.2.1.1

Wyse Operating Mode Table

The Wyse Operating Mode Table defines the operating mode (

) used by the Wyse emulations to set the terminal operating mode.

;

Function

Cursor off

Cursor on

Block cursor

Line cursor

Normal protect character

Reverse protect character

Dim protect character

Screen off

Screen on

80 column screen

132 column screen

Protect blink on

Protect invisible on

AccuTerm 7 Reference 235

Function

Protect underline on

Protect reverse on

Protect dim on

3.2.1.2

Wyse Cursor Address Table

The Wyse Cursor Address Table shows the character code used by the Wyse emulations to specify cursor column (

) or row (

Row (

) or column (

)

Code Row (

) or column (

)

SPACE

(

)

;

Code Row (

) or column (

)

[

]

Code

} z

{ x y v w

DEL

t u r s p q n o l m j k h i f g d e b c

` a

236 AccuTerm 7 Help

3.2.1.3

Wyse Attribute Code Table

The Wyse Attribute Code Table defines the attribute code character (

) used by the Wyse emulations to assign visual attributes.

Code (

) Attribute Type

Normal

Invisible

Blink

Invisible

Reverse

Reverse, invisible

Reverse, blink

Reverse, invisible

Underline

;

p q r s t u v w x y z

{

}

DEL

Underline, Invisible

Underline, blink

Underline, blink, invisible

Underline, reverse

Underline, reverse, invisible

Underline, reverse, blink

Underline, reverse, blink, invisible

Dim

Dim, invisible

Dim, blink

Dim, invisible

Dim, reverse

Dim, reverse, invisible

Dim, reverse, blink

Dim, reverse, blink, invisible

Dim, underline

Dim, underline, invisible

Dim, underline, blink

Dim, underline, blink, invisible

Dim, underline, reverse

Dim, underline, reverse, invisible

Dim, underline, reverse, blink

Dim, underline, reverse, blink, blank

3.2.1.4

Wyse Function Key Table

The Wyse Function Key Table defines the key code character (

) used by the Wyse emulations to program function and keypad keys. Also defines the field code character (

) used for programming function key labels.

AccuTerm 7 Reference 237

Key

F14

F15

F16

BKSP

TAB

INS

DEL

HOME

END

PGUP

PGDN

LEFT

RIGHT

DOWN

ESC

ENTER

KPD ENTER

F10

F11

F12

F13

Normal key code (k)

0 w

]

;

)

& p o

' m n k l i j g h e f c d a b

Shifted key code (k)

[

SPACE

;

Normal field (f)

]

[

Shifted field (f)

3.2.1.5

Wyse Key Code Table

The Wyse Key Code Table describes the default character sequence transmitted by the function, keypad and other special keys on the PC keyboard and the corresponding real terminal key.

Key

BKSP

SHIFT+BKSP

TAB

SHIFT+TAB

INS

SHIFT+INS

DEL

Terminal

Key

BKSP

SHIFT+BKSP

TAB

SHIFT+TAB

INS

SHIFT+INS

DEL

Sequence

ESC

238 AccuTerm 7 Help

Terminal

Key

DEL LINE

SHIFT+F2

SHIFT+F3

SHIFT+F4

SHIFT+F5

SHIFT+F6

SHIFT+F7

SHIFT+F8

SHIFT+F9

HOME

SHIFT+HOME

CLR LINE

CLR SCRN

PGUP

SHIFT+PGUP

PGDN

SHIFT+PGDN

LEFT

SHIFT+LEFT

RIGHT

SHIFT+RIGHT

SHIFT+UP

DOWN

SHIFT+DOWN

ESC

SHIFT+ESC

RETURN

SHIFT+ENTER

ENTER

SHIFT+ENTER

SHIFT+F1

F10

SHIFT+F10

F11

SHIFT+F11

F12

Key

SHIFT+DEL

SHIFT+F2

SHIFT+F3

SHIFT+F4

SHIFT+F5

SHIFT+F6

SHIFT+F7

SHIFT+F8

SHIFT+F9

HOME

SHIFT+HOME

END

SHIFT+END

PGUP

SHIFT+PGUP

PGDN

SHIFT+PGDN

LEFT

SHIFT+LEFT

RIGHT

SHIFT+RIGHT

SHIFT+UP

DOWN

SHIFT+DOWN

ESC

SHIFT+ESC

ENTER

SHIFT+ENTER

KPD ENTER

SHIFT+KPD ENTER

SHIFT+F1

F10

SHIFT+F10

F11

SHIFT+F11

F12

Sequence

ESC

SOH

ESC

{

ESC

SOH

AccuTerm 7 Reference 239

Key

SHIFT+F12

CTRL+F1

SHIFT+CTRL+F1

CTRL+F2

SHIFT+CTRL+F2

CTRL+F3

SHIFT+CTRL+F3

CTRL+F4

SHIFT+CTRL+F4

CTRL+F5

SHIFT+CTRL+F5

CTRL+F6

Terminal

Key

SHIFT+F12

F11

SHIFT+F11

F12

SHIFT+F12

F13

SHIFT+F13

F14

SHIFT+F14

F15

SHIFT+F15

F16

Sequence

SOH

3.2.1.6

Wyse Graphic Character Table

The Wyse Graphic Character Table defines the character code used for each of the line-drawing graphic characters used by the Wyse emulations.

3.2.2 Wyse Programming Notes

† Functions tagged with the single-dagger symbol are only valid in Wyse 50 or Wyse 60 emulation.

‡ Functions tagged with the double-dagger symbol are only valid in Viewpoint Enhanced emulation.

240 AccuTerm 7 Help

3.3 ADDS Programming

This topic describes the command sequences for programming the ADDS Viewpoint A2, Viewpoint 60 and Procomm VP60 terminal emulations. These emulations use a common command set with a few differences. The differences are noted.

Operating Modes

ESC

Status line off.

ESC

Status line on.

ESC

Screen display off.

ESC

ETB

Screen display on.

Turns off the cursor.

CAN

Turns on the cursor.

ESC

% ! 0

Enters Tektronix 4100 graphics mode.

CAN

If the graphics mode is enabled, this command puts the terminal in the Tektronix emulation mode. If the graphics mode is disabled, this command is ignored.

Exits from the Tektronix graphics emulation mode.

Cursor Positioning

ACK

Cursor right. If the cursor is on the last column of the line, the cursor will wrap to the next line, possibly scrolling the screen up.

NAK

Cursor down. If the cursor is on the last line of the screen and the "no scroll" mode is turned off, the screen will scroll up one line. Otherwise, the cursor will move to the top line

AccuTerm 7 Reference 241

of the screen.

SUB

Cursor up. If the cursor is at the top row, it is moved to the bottom row.

Moves the cursor to the first column (column zero) of the current row.

Moves cursor to row r, where r is a valid row code from the

Viewpoint Cursor Address Table

DLE c

Moves the cursor to column c where c is a valid column in the from the

Viewpoint Cursor

Address Table

ESC

r c

Moves the cursor to row r and column c where r and c are single byte cursor address codes from the

Wyse Cursor Address Table

. Note that this command cannot position the cursor past column 95.

Erasing and Editing

Clears the screen and returns the cursor to the home position (upper left corner of the screen). Turns off the protected mode.

ESC

Clears from the cursor position to the end of the current line.

ESC

Clears from the cursor position to the end of the screen.

ESC

Insert character. A blank is inserted at the current cursor position. All characters from the cursor position to the right are moved right one column.

ESC

Delete line. The current line is deleted. All lines below the current line are moved up one position. The bottom line is blank. The cursor is moved to the left most column.

ESC

Delete character. The character at the current cursor position is deleted. All characters to the right of the cursor are moved left one column and a blank is placed on the last column of the line.

242 AccuTerm 7 Help

Video Attributes

The Viewpoint A2, Viewpoint 60 and Procomm VP60 have different ways of programming video attributes.

The ADDS Viewpoint A2 terminal supports video attributes through the use of "tagged" characters.

When a character is received from the host, it is either "tagged" or "normal". Tagged characters are displayed with the currently assigned tagged video attribute. Only one attribute may be displayed on the screen at one time - all characters which are "tagged" are displayed using the current tag attribute.

Other emulations, including Viewpoint A2 Enhanced and ADDS 4000, allow multiple attributes to be displayed simultaneously.

Programming video attributes involves two separate steps. First, the tag attribute must be assigned.

Next, in order to display characters in the assigned tag attribute, a "start tag attribute" code must be sent. To send characters in the normal attribute, an "end tag attribute" code must be sent. These two steps are independent and can be executed in either order.

The ADDS Viewpoint 60 (and Procomm VP60) emulations use the same escape sequence as the

Viewpoint A2 but it is interpreted differently. Under ADDS Viewpoint 60 mode, the attribute takes up a space and changes all following characters to the end of the screen or until another attribute character is encountered. It works similar to the Wyse 50 video attributes. Under Procomm VP60, multiple visual attributes may be displayed at the same time, but the attribute character does not use a space on the screen, and does not affect any previously displayed characters. It works similar to the Wyse 60 video attributes.

End tagged attribute. All characters received after this code are displayed with the normal video attribute.

ESC

ADDS Viewpoint A2: Assign visual attribute. This command sets the current visual attribute. All characters which are “tagged” are displayed on this attribute. The attribute is specified by the attribute code a from the

Viewpoint Attribute Code Table .

ADDS Viewpoint 60: Assign visual attribute. This command is used to start a specific attribute. This command changes all characters from the current position until the end of the screen or until another attribute code character is encountered. The attribute uses a screen position. The attribute is specified by the attribute code a from the

Viewpoint

Attribute Code Table

Procomm VP60: Assign visual attribute. This command is used to start a specific attribute. The attribute does not use a screen position. All characters output after this command are displayed in the specified attribute. The attribute code is specified by the attribute code a from the

Viewpoint Attribute Code Table

Line Graphics

AccuTerm 7 Reference 243

ESC

Turn on line graphics mode. All characters received while the line graphics mode is on are interpreted as graphics characters according to the

Viewpoint 60 Graphic Character Table .

ESC

Turn off line graphics mode.

Printer Control

DC2

Auto (copy) print mode. Characters are displayed and printed. This command will be ignored if the current slave printer selection is "None".

DC4

Cancel auto or transparent print mode. Note: This command will not turn the printer off if it

was turned on by the Viewpoint Enhanced transparent print or ANSI print commands.

ESC

Transparent print mode. Characters are printed, but not displayed.

ESC

Cancel transparent print mode.

ESC

[ ? 5 i

AccuTerm requires the specific ANSI cancel command below to exit transparent print mode, there is less chance of a control character interrupting the graphic printing.

ESC

[ ? 4 i

Cancel transparent print mode (ANSI).

3.3.1 Viewpoint Tables

3.3.1.1

Viewpoint Cursor Address Table

The Viewpoint Cursor Address Table shows the character code used by the Viewpoint emulations to specify cursor column (

) or row (

Column (

) Code Column (

) Code

NUL

SOH

6 q

STX

ETX

EOT

ENQ

ACK

BEL

r s t u v w

244 AccuTerm 7 Help

Column (

) Code Column (

) Code

DLE

x y

DC1

DC2

Code

DC3

DC4

NAK

SYN

ETB

CAN

Row (

)

T G

SPACE

(

)

\ a b c d e f g h i

3.3.1.2

Viewpoint Attribute Code Table

The Viewpoint Attribute Code Table defines the attribute code character (

) used by the Viewpoint emulations to assign visual attributes.

Code (

) Attribute Type

Normal

` a b c

Dim

Normal Blinking

Dim Blinking

Reverse

Dim Reverse

Reverse Blinking

Dim Reverse Blinking

Underlined

Dim Underlined

Underlined Blinking

Dim Underline Blinking

AccuTerm 7 Reference 245

Code (

) Attribute Type

Invisible

3.3.1.3

Viewpoint Function Key Table

The Viewpoint Function Key Table defines the key code character (

) used by the Viewpoint emulations to program function and keypad keys.

INS

HOME

END

PGUP

PGDN

LEFT

RIGHT

DOWN

ESC

ENTER

KPD ENTER

Key

F10

F11

F12

F13

F14

F15

F16

BKSP

TAB

;

SPACE

Normal key code (

) Shifted key code (

)

NUL

SOH

STX

ETX

EOT

ENQ

ACK

BEL

DLE

DC1

DC2

DC3

DC4

NAK

SYN

ETB

CAN

SUB

ESC

[

3.3.1.4

Viewpoint Key Code Table

The Viewpoint Key Code Table describes the default character sequence transmitted by the function, keypad and other special keys on the PC keyboard and the corresponding real terminal key.

PC Key

BKSP

SHIFT+BKSP

Terminal Key

BKSP

SHIFT+BKSP

Sequence

246 AccuTerm 7 Help

PC Key

TAB

SHIFT+TAB

SHIFT+F2

SHIFT+F3

SHIFT+F4

SHIFT+F5

SHIFT+F6

SHIFT+F7

SHIFT+F8

SHIFT+F9

F10

INS

SHIFT+INS

DEL

SHIFT+DEL

HOME

SHIFT+HOME

END

SHIFT+END

PGUP

SHIFT+PGUP

PGDN

SHIFT+PGDN

LEFT

SHIFT+LEFT

RIGHT

SHIFT+RIGHT

SHIFT+UP

DOWN

SHIFT+DOWN

ESC

SHIFT+ESC

ENTER

SHIFT+ENTER

KPD ENTER

SHIFT+KPD ENTER

SHIFT+F1

Terminal Key

TAB

SHIFT+TAB

SHIFT+F2

SHIFT+F3

SHIFT+F4

SHIFT+F5

SHIFT+F6

SHIFT+F7

SHIFT+F8

SHIFT+F9

F10

INS

SHIFT+INS

DEL

DEL LINE

HOME

SHIFT+HOME

CLR LINE

CLR SCRN

PGUP

SHIFT+PGUP

PGDN

SHIFT+PGDN

LEFT

SHIFT+LEFT

RIGHT

SHIFT+RIGHT

SHIFT+UP

DOWN

SHIFT+DOWN

ESC

SHIFT+ESC

RETURN

SHIFT+ENTER

ENTER

SHIFT+ENTER

SHIFT+F1

Sequence

ESC

STX

(

STX

)

STX

ESC

SOH

ESC

NAK

ACK

SUB

ESC

STX

AccuTerm 7 Reference 247

PC Key

SHIFT+F10

F11

SHIFT+F11

F12

SHIFT+F12

CTRL+F1

SHIFT+CTRL+F1

CTRL+F2

SHIFT+CTRL+F2

CTRL+F3

SHIFT+CTRL+F3

CTRL+F4

SHIFT+CTRL+F4

CTRL+F5

SHIFT+CTRL+F5

CTRL+F6

SHIFT+CTRL+F6

Terminal Key

SHIFT+F10

F11

SHIFT+F11

F12

SHIFT+F12

F11

SHIFT+F11

F12

SHIFT+F12

F13

SHIFT+F13

F14

SHIFT+F14

F15

SHIFT+F15

F16

SHIFT+F16

Sequence

STX

;

STX

;

STX

STX SPACE CR

3.3.1.5

Viewpoint 60 Graphic Character Table

The Viewpoint 60 Graphic Character Table defines the character code used for each of the linedrawing graphic characters used by Viewpoint 60 emulation.

3.3.2 ADDS Programming Notes

Functions tagged with the diamond symbol are only valid in Viewpoint 60 or Procomm VP60 emulation.

248 AccuTerm 7 Help

3.4 ANSI Programming

The AccuTerm ANSI emulations provide VT52, VT100, VT220, VT320, VT420, SCO Console, Linux

Console and ANSI BBS emulations. The VT220, VT320 and VT420 emulations support international characters, 7 and 8 bit control codes, programmable function keys and a robust command set. VT100 supports 7 bit control codes and a subset of the VT220 command set.

The SCO Console emulation uses the PC (OEM) character set and supports programmable function keys and text and background colors.

The Linux Console emulation uses the ANSI character set, and includes support for programmable function keys, text and background colors, and mouse.

The ANSI BBS emulation supports the PC (OEM) character set and the attribute and cursor commands supported by the DOS ANSI.SYS device driver (AccuTerm does not use the ANSI.SYS driver). The

ANSI BBS emulation only supports 7 bit escape sequences.

When AccuTerm is emulating a VT220, VT320 or VT420 terminal snipor SCO or Linux Console, it will respond to 7-bit and 8-bit control codes (hex 00-1F and 80-9F). For convenience, command sequences which may use 8-bit control codes are documented using the 8-bit control code. For every 8-bit control code, an equivalent 7-bit escape sequence may also be used, as shown in the following table:

CSI

SS3

DCS

ESC

[

ESC

This chapter documents commands used by all of the ANSI emulations supported by AccuTerm. Not every command is valid for all ANSI emulations. Those commands which are only valid for certain emulations are shown with a reference note after the command definition. These reference are indicated by a superscript, and are VT100 1 , VT220 2 , VT320 3 , VT420 4 , ANSI BBS A , Linux Console L , and

SCO Console S .

The AccuTerm ANSI emulations operate in a variety of modes. Some of the default operating modes are determined by settings in the AccuTerm configuration. Most of these modes can be changed by commands received from the host. Operating modes which can be selected in the Settings dialog and saved in a configuration file are:

VT52, VT100, VT220, VT320, VT420, SCO Console, Linux Console or ANSI BBS emulation

80 (normal) or 132 (extended) columns

Automatic wrap at end of line

Send 7 or 8 bit control codes

Numeric keypad sends “application” codes instead of numbers

Cursor keys send “application” codes instead of cursor codes

AccuTerm 7 Reference 249

Backspace key sends

DEL

control code instead of

control code

The following operating modes are not determined by settings in the AccuTerm configuration, but may be changed by sending the appropriate ANSI command sequence:

Keyboard: default is unlocked.

Insert/Replace: default is replace.

Line feed / New line: default is line feed.

Origin: default is absolute.

Tabs: default is every 8 columns.

Cursor: default is on.

Print extent: default is full screen.

Printer form-feed: default is off.

Graphics mode: default is off.

AccuTerm VT220, VT320 and VT420 emulations support 5 character sets: ASCII, Multinational, ISO-

Latin1, Graphics and Scientific. The default character set assignment is G0=ASCII, G1=ASCII,

G2=Multinational and G3=ASCII. The GL set (hex 20-7E) defaults to G0 (ASCII) and the GR set (hex

A0-FE) defaults to G2 (Multinational).

Operating Modes

ESC

Hard reset. Re-reads AccuTerm configuration file, then resets all operating modes and character sets to their default values. Clears the screen and I/O buffer.

CSI

! p

Soft reset. Resets all operating modes and character sets to their default values.234

CSI

n + p

Secure reset. Re-reads AccuTerm configuration file, then resets all operating modes and character sets to their default values. Clears the screen and I/O buffer. If

is non-zero, then

AccuTerm responds by sending

CSI

n * q

back to the host. The value of

must be between 0 and 16383. 1234

ESC SPACE

Causes AccuTerm to send 7-bit control codes: 234

CSI

SS3

DCS

ESC

[

ESC

250 AccuTerm 7 Help

ESC SPACE

Causes AccuTerm to send 8-bit control codes

CSI

SS3

DCS

and

. 234

CSI

6 1 " p

Changes the emulation to VT100.234

CSI

6 2 ;

n " p

Changes the emulation to VT220. If

= 1, AccuTerm will equivalent send 7-bit escape sequences for control codes

CSI

SS3

DCS

and

; otherwise, 8-bit control codes will be sent.234

CSI

6 3 ;

n " p

Changes the emulation to VT320. If

= 1, AccuTerm will equivalent send 7-bit escape sequences for control codes

CSI

SS3

DCS

and

; otherwise, 8-bit control codes will be sent.234

CSI

6 4 ;

n " p

Changes the emulation to VT420. If

= 1, AccuTerm will equivalent send 7-bit escape sequences for control codes

CSI

SS3

DCS

and

; otherwise, 8-bit control codes will be sent.234

CSI

2 h

Locks the keyboard.

CSI

2 l

Unlocks the keyboard.

CSI

3 h

Enable display of control characters as symbols.

CSI

3 l

Disable display of control characters (execute control characters.

CSI

4 h

Insert mode on.

CSI

4 l

Insert mode off.

CSI

12 h

Full duplex (no local echo).

CSI

12 l

Half duplex (local echo).

CSI

20 h

Process

and

as "new line"; that is perform carriage return and line feed.

CSI

20 l

Process

and

as line feed.

AccuTerm 7 Reference 251

CSI

42 h

Changes emulation to Wyse 60.

CSI

? 1 h

Cursor keys return application codes.

CSI

? 1 l

Cursor keys return cursor codes.

CSI

? 2 l

Enter VT52 emulation mode.

CSI

? 3 h

Extended video mode (132 columns).

CSI

? 3 l

Normal video mode (80 columns).

CSI

? 5 h

Light background, dark text.

CSI

? 5 l

Dark background, light text.

CSI

? 6 h

Causes cursor positioning to be relative to the currently defined scrolling region.

CSI

? 6 l

Causes cursor positioning to be absolute (not relative).

CSI

? 7 h

Sets autowrap mode. When the cursor is on the last character of a line, receipt of another character causes the cursor to move to the first column of the next line.

CSI

? 7 l

Resets autowrap mode. The cursor will not move past the last column of the line upon receipt of another character.

CSI

? 9 h

CSI

0 $ ~

Status line off. 234

CSI

? 9 l

Status line on.234

CSI

1 $ ~

Display local status line. 234

CSI

2 $ ~

Display host-writable status line. 234

252 AccuTerm 7 Help

CSI

0 $ }

Data sent to screen's data area. 234

CSI

1 $ }

Data sent to host-writable status line. 234

CSI

? 18 h

Causes a form-feed character (hex 0C) to be sent to the printer after each print screen.

CSI

? 18 l

No character is sent to the printer after each print screen.

CSI

? 19 h

Print screen command causes the full screen to be printed.

CSI

? 19 l

Print screen command only prints the currently defined scrolling region.

CSI

? 25 h

Cursor on.

CSI

? 25 l

Cursor off.

CSI

? 38 h

ESC

Enters Tektronix 4014 graphics mode.

CSI

? 38 l

CAN

ESC

Exits Tektronix 4014 graphics mode.

CSI

? 66 h

Cursor keys return application codes. 234

CSI

? 66 l

Cursor keys return cursor codes. 234

CSI

? 67 h

Backspace keys sends

control code. 34

CSI

? 67 l

Backspace keys sends

DEL

control code. 34

CSI

? 69 h

Enables vertical split screen mode. 4

CSI

? 69 l

Disables vertical split screen mode. 4

CSI

? 95 h

AccuTerm 7 Reference 253

Do not clear screen when column mode changes. 34

CSI

? 95 l

Clear screen when column mode changes. 34

CSI

? 109 h

Set

CapsLock

keyboard state.

CSI

? 109 l

Clear

CapsLock

keyboard state.

ESC

% ! 0

Enters Tektronix 4100 graphics mode.

CSI

Select block cursor. 234

CSI

Select underscore cursor. 234

CSI

n $ |

Set number of columns to

. 34

CSI

n t

CSI

n * |

Set number of rows to

. 34

CSI

n , q

Sets the terminal ID returned in response to the DA1 command. Valid values for

are: 0 =

VT100, 1 = VT101, 2 = VT102, 5 = VT220 and 6 = VT320. 34

CSI

n * x

Selects if visual attributes which are modified by the DECCARA or DECRARA commands are contained within the rectangular area defined by the beginning and ending positions. If

= 0 or 1 then beginning and ending positions indicate locations in the character stream displayed on the screen; if

= 2, then the beginning and ending positions indicate the upper-left and lower-right corners of a rectangle. L

CSI

? 9 h

Enable mouse reporting. L

CSI

? 9 l

Disable mouse reporting. L

CSI

n = L

Set erase mode. If

= 0, new lines and clear screen are filled with the current background color. Otherwise, new lines and clear screen fill with the screen background color. S

ESC

254 AccuTerm 7 Help

Numeric pad returns application codes.

ESC

>Numeric pad returns numbers.

Character Set Selection

ESC

( B

Sets character set G0 to ASCII (default). 1234L

ESC

) B

Sets character set G1 to ASCII (default). 1234L

ESC

* B

Sets character set G2 to ASCII. 234L

ESC

+ B

Sets character set G3 to ASCII. 234L

ESC

( <

Sets character set G0 to UPSS (the character set selected in the terminal settings). 234L

ESC

) <

Sets character set G1 to UPSS (the character set selected in the terminal settings). 234L

ESC

* <

Sets character set G2 to UPSS (the character set selected in the terminal settings - this is the default). 234

ESC

+ <

Sets character set G3 to UPSS (the character set selected in the terminal settings). 234

ESC

( A

Sets character set G0 to ISO-Latin1. 1L

ESC

) A

Sets character set G1 to ISO-Latin1. 1L

ESC

- A

Sets character set G1 to ISO-Latin1. 234

ESC

. A

Sets character set G2 to ISO-Latin1.234

ESC

/ A

Sets character set G3 to ISO-Latin1.234

ESC

( 0

Sets character set G0 to graphics. 1234L

ESC

) 0

Sets character set G1 to graphics. 1234L

ESC

* 0

Sets character set G2 to graphics. 234

ESC

+ 0

Sets character set G3 to graphics. 234

ESC

( S

Sets character set G0 to scientific.234

ESC

) S

Sets character set G1 to scientific. 234

ESC

* S

Sets character set G2 to scientific. 234

ESC

+ S

Sets character set G3 to scientific. 234

ESC

( % 5

Sets character set G0 to Multinational. 1234

ESC

) % 5

Sets character set G1 to Multinational. 1234

ESC

* % 5

Sets character set G2 to Multinational. 234

ESC

+ % 5

Sets character set G3 to Multinational. 234

ESC

( K

ESC

( U

Sets character set G0 to codepage 437. L

ESC

) K

ESC

) U

Sets character set G1 to codepage 437. L

ESC

(

Sets character set G0 to codepage 437. LS

ESC

)

Sets character set G1 to codepage 437. LS

AccuTerm 7 Reference 255

256 AccuTerm 7 Help

ESC

(

Sets character set G0 to upper half of codepage 437. LS

ESC

)

Sets character set G1 to upper half of codepage 437. LS

Invoke character set G0 into GL (the GL set corresponds to character codes in the range of hex 20-7E); this is the default. 1234LS

Invoke character set G1 into GL. 1234LS

ESC

Invokes character set G1 into GR (the GR set corresponds to character codes in the range of hex A0-FE). 234

ESC

Invokes character set G2 into GL. 234

ESC

}

Invokes character set G2 into GR (default). 234

ESC

Invokes character set G3 into GL. 234

ESC

Invokes character set G3 into GR. 234

SS2

ESC

Invokes character set G2 into GL for the next character only. 234

SS3

ESC

Invokes character set G3 into GL for the next character only. 234

Cursor Positioning

Moves the cursor back one space. If the cursor is at the beginning of the line, no action occurs.

Moves the cursor to the next programmed tab stop. If there are no more tab stops, the cursor moves to the right margin.

Moves the cursor down one line. If the cursor is on the last line of the scrolling region, the screen will scroll up one line.

AccuTerm 7 Reference 257

Same as

Moves the cursor to the left margin of the current line.

NEL

ESC

Moves the cursor to the first column of the next line of the scrolling region. If the cursor is on the last line of the scrolling region, the screen will scroll up one line.

IND

ESC

Moves cursor down one line in the same column. If the cursor is on the last line of the scrolling region, the screen will scroll up one line.

CSI

n T

Moves cursor down

lines in the same column. If the cursor is moved to the last line of the scrolling region, the screen will scroll up. S

ESC

Moves the cursor up one line in the same column. If the cursor is on the first line of the scrolling region, the screen will scroll down one line.

CSI

n S

Moves the cursor up

lines in the same column. If the cursor is moved to the first line of the scrolling region, the screen will scroll down. S

CSI

n B

CSI

n e

Moves cursor down

lines in the same column.

CSI

n E

Moves cursor down

lines and to the first column. 1234LS

CSI

n A

Moves the cursor up

lines in the same column.

CSI

n F

Moves the cursor up

lines and to the first column. 1234LS

CSI

n D

Moves cursor left

columns.

CSI

n C

CSI

n a

Moves cursor right

columns.

CSI

line ; column H

CSI

line ; column f

Move cursor to line

line

, column

column

258 AccuTerm 7 Help

CSI

n d

Moves cursor to line

. 1234LS

CSI

n G

CSI

n `

Moves cursor to column

. 1234LS

HTS

ESC

CSI

0 W

Sets a tab stop at the column where the cursor is.

CSI

0 g

CSI

2 W

Clears a tab stop at the column where the cursor is. 1234LS

CSI

3 g

CSI

5 W

Clears all tab stops. 1234LS

CSI

? 5 W

Sets tab stops every 8th column. 234

CSI

n I

Move forward

tab stops. 234

CSI

n Z

Move backward

tab stops. 234

CSI

n V

CSI n SPACE

Display a preceding page. If

is 0 or 1, the previous page is displayed, otherwise

specifies the number of pages back to be displayed. 234

CSI

n U

CSI n SPACE

Displays a following page. If

is 0 or 1, the next page is displayed, otherwise

specifies the number of pages forward to be displayed. 234

CSI

SPACE

Display page

. 234

CSI

top ; bottom r

Set scrolling region. The first line of the scrolling region is set to

top

; the last line to

bottom

Default values for

top

and

bottom

are 1 and 24 respectively. Once the scrolling region is defined, if origin mode is set to relative, the cursor may be positioned into, but not out of, the scrolling region. 1234LS

ESC

CSI

ALS

Save state (cursor position, video attribute, character set, autowrap, origin mode and protect mode).

ESC

CSI

ALS

Restore state.

AccuTerm 7 Reference 259

CSI

left ; right s

Sets the left and right margins to define a horizontal scrolling region. This command only works when vertical split screen mode is enabled.

ESC

Move cursor left one column. If the cursor is at the left margin, all data within the margin scrolls right one column. The column that shifted past the right margin is lost. 4

ESC

Move cursor right one column. If the cursor is at the right margin, all data within the margin scrolls left one column. The column that shifted past the left margin is lost.4

ESC

Fill screen with upper-case “E”.

Erasing and Editing

CSI

0 J

Erases from the cursor to the end of the screen, including the cursor position.

CSI

1 J

Erases from the beginning of the screen to the cursor, including the cursor position.

CSI

2 J

Erases the entire screen (the cursor position is not moved).

CSI

0 K

Erases from the cursor to the end of the line, including the cursor position.

CSI

1 K

Erases from the beginning of the line to the cursor, including the cursor position.

CSI

2 K

Erases the entire line (the cursor is not moved).

CSI

? 0 J

Erases all unprotected characters from the cursor to the end of the screen, including the cursor position.

CSI

? 1 J

Erases all unprotected characters from the beginning of the screen to the cursor, including the cursor position.

CSI

? 2 J

Erases all unprotected characters on the entire screen (the cursor position is not moved).

CSI

? 0 K

Erases all unprotected characters from the cursor to the end of the line, including the cursor position.

260 AccuTerm 7 Help

CSI

? 1 K

Erases all unprotected characters from the beginning of the line to the cursor, including the cursor position.

CSI

? 2 K

Erases all unprotected characters on the line (the cursor is not moved).

CSI

n X

Erases

characters, beginning with the current cursor position. 234LS

CSI

n @

Insert

blank characters beginning at the current cursor position. 234LS

CSI

n L

Insert

blank lines beginning at the cursor line. 1234LS

CSI

n P

Delete

characters beginning at the current cursor position. 1234LS

CSI

n M

Delete

lines beginning at the cursor line. 1234LS

CSI

n ' }

Insert

columns into the scrolling region beginning at the column that has the cursor. 4

CSI

n ' ~

Delete

columns from the scrolling region beginning at the column that has the cursor. 4

CSI

top ; left ; bottom ; right ; attr1 ; … ; attrn $ r

Changes visual attributes in an area defined by

top

left

bottom

right

. The area to be changed is either a character stream or rectangle as defined by the DECSACE command.

See

ANSI Attribute Code Table

for the attribute codes. 4

CSI

top ; left ; bottom ; right ; attr1 ; … ; attrn $ t

Reverse visual attributes in an area defined by

top

left

bottom

right

. The area to be changed is either a character stream or rectangle as defined by the DECSACE command.

See

ANSI Attribute Code Table

for the attribute codes. 4

CSI

top ; left ; bottom ; right $ z

Erase characters in rectangle defined by

top

left

bottom

right

. 4

CSI

top ; left ; bottom ; right $ {

Erase unprotected characters in rectangle defined by

top

left

bottom

right

. 4

CSI

ch ; top ; left ; bottom ; right $ x

Fill rectangle defined by

top

left

bottom

right

with character

(ASCII code). 4

CSI

stop ; sleft ; sbottom ; sright ; spg ; dtop ; dleft ; dpg $ v

AccuTerm 7 Reference 261

Copy rectangle defined by

stop

sleft

sbottom

sright

, from page

spg

to page

dpg

at location

dtop

dleft

. 4

Video Attributes

CSI

n ;

...

Selects video attributes and/or character foreground and background colors according to the

ANSI Attribute Code Table

. Characters received after this command are displayed in the selected video attribute. If multiple parameters are used, their effects are cumulative (e.

g. 0;4;5 selects blinking-underlined). A parameter value of 0 resets all attributes.

CSI

0 " q

Unprotected mode. Characters received after this command are erasable using the “erase unprotected characters” command. 234

CSI

1 " q

Protected mode. Characters received after this command are not erasable using the “erase unprotected characters” command. 234

ESC

# 3

Double-high line top. Causes the line containing the cursor to display the top half of a double-high line. 1234

ESC

# 4

Double-high line bottom. Causes the line containing the cursor to display the bottom half of a double-high line. 1234

ESC

# 5

ESC

# 6

CSI

n F

Sets the current normal foreground color to

. Refer to “AccuTerm Programming” chapter for color values. S

CSI

n G

Double-width line. Causes the line containing the cursor to display double width characters.

1234

Sets the current normal background color to

. S

CSI

n H

Sets the current reverse foreground color to

. S

CSI

n I

Single-width line. Causes the line containing the cursor to display normal width characters.

1234

Sets the current reverse background color to

. S

262 AccuTerm 7 Help

ESC

] P

nrrggbb

Set Linux Console palette.

is a single hex digit indicating which palette entry to set;

rrggbb

are the hex RGB color values to be set. L

ESC

] R

Reset Linux Console palette. L

Printer Control

CSI

0 i

Prints the screen display. Either the full screen or scrolling region may be selected, and a form feed may be sent after printing (see Operating Modes section.

CSI

10 i

Prints the screen display ignoring the print extent in effect. 34

CSI

? 1 i

Prints the current cursor line.

CSI

5 i

Transparent print mode. Characters are printed, but not displayed.

CSI

? 5 i

Auto print mode. When the “Auto-print works just like a VT terminal” setting is enabled, a line is printed from the screen when the cursor moves off that line with an

, or

control code, or an autowrap occurs. Otherwise auto-print mode works just like Wyse autoprint mode.

CSI

4 i

CSI

? 4 i

Cancel transparent or auto print mode.

CSI

2 i

Send screen to host. 234

Terminal Reports

CSI

0 c

ESC

Request primary device attributes. Depending on the current emulation and terminal ID in effect, AccuTerm will respond: 1234L

VT100:

CSI

? 1 ; 2 c

VT220:

VT320:

CSI

? 6 2 ; 1 ; 2 ; 6 ; 8 c

CSI

? 6 3 ; 1 ; 2 ; 6 ; 8 c

VT420:

Linux:

CSI

? 6 4 ; 1 ; 2 ; 6 ; 8 c

CSI

? 6 c

CSI

> 0 c

Request secondary device attributes. AccuTerm will respond: 234

CSI

> 41 ; 4 ; 1 c

AccuTerm 7 Reference 263

CSI

= 0 c

Request tertiary device attributes. AccuTerm will respond (

xxxxxxxx

is the product serial number in hexadecimal): 234

DCS

! |1

xxxxxxxx

CSI

5 n

Request terminal status. AccuTerm will respond:

CSI

0 n

CSI

6 n

Request cursor position. AccuTerm will respond:

CSI

line ; column R

CSI

? 6 n

Request cursor position and page. AccuTerm will respond:

CSI

line ; column ; page R

CSI

? 1 5 n

Request printer status. If a printer is defined for the current configuration, AccuTerm will respond: 234

CSI

? 1 0 n

If no printer is defined the response will be:

CSI

? 1 3 n

CSI

? 2 5 n

Request status of user-defined keys. AccuTerm will respond: 234

CSI

? 2 0 n

CSI

? 2 6 n

Request keyboard status. AccuTerm will respond: 234

CSI

? 2 7 ; 0 ; 0 ; 0 n

CSI

? 5 5 n

Request locator status. If the mouse is currently enabled, AccuTerm will respond:234

CSI

? 5 0 n

If the mouse is not enabled, the response will be:

CSI

? 5 3 n

CSI

? 5 6 n

Request locator device type. If the mouse is currently enabled, AccuTerm will respond: 234

CSI

? 5 7 ; 1 n

If the mouse is not enabled, the response will be:

CSI

? 5 7 ; 0 n

CSI

? 6 2 n

Request macro space. AccuTerm will respond: 234

CSI

0 * {

CSI

? 6 3 ;

id n

264 AccuTerm 7 Help

Request memory checksum. AccuTerm will respond: 234

DCS

id ! ~ 0 0 0 0

CSI

? 7 5 n

Request data integrity. AccuTerm will respond: 234

CSI

? 7 0 n

CSI

" v

Request displayed extent. AccuTerm will respond: 34

CSI

rows ; columns ; 1 ; 1 ; page " w

CSI

n $ p

Request state of ANSI mode

. AccuTerm will respond: 34

CSI

n ; value $ y

CSI

n $ p

Request state of private mode

. AccuTerm will respond: 34

CSI

n ; value $ y

CSI

+ x

Request function key free memory. AccuTerm will respond: 34

CSI

804 ; 804 + y

CSI

1 $ w

Request cursor information report. AccuTerm will respond with a string encoded with the current cursor state including position, page, attribute and character set. The string returned can be use to restore the cursor state. The response string is:34

DCS

1 $ u

string

DCS

1 $ t

string

Restore cursor state. Use

string

returned from previous command. 34

CSI

2 $ w

Request tabstop report. AccuTerm will respond with a string encoded with the current tab settings. The string returned can be use to restore the tabs. The response string is: 34

DCS

2 $ u

string

DCS

2 $ t

string

Restore tabstops. Use

string

returned from previous command. 34

DCS

$ q

setting

Request setting.

Setting

is formed by taking the last one or two non-numeric characters of an ANSI command. The response is: 34

DCS

0 $ r

string

You can use the response

string

to restore the setting; Simply add

CSI

to the beginning of the string and send it back to the terminal.

CSI

1 $ u

Request terminal state. The complete terminal state (cursor position, character set,

AccuTerm 7 Reference 265

attributes, screen size, key lock, etc.) is encoded into a string and returned to the host.

You can use this string to restore the state later. The response is: 34

DCS

1 $ s

string

DCS

1 $ p

string

Restore terminal state.

String

is the value returned from the previous command. 34

Programming Function Keys

The AccuTerm VT220, VT320, VT420, Linux Console and SCO Console emulations support the ability to download up to 15 function key values (the shifted function keys

F20

) from the host computer. The following device control sequence is used to program the function keys.

DCS

n | key / value ;

...

key

value

is 1, old key definitions are replaced by new definitions; if

is 0, the definition of all 15 shifted function keys are cleared before loading any new definitions. The function key to be programmed is specified by

key

according to the

ANSI Function Key Table , and the

sequence for that key is specified by

value

Value

is specified in hexadecimal.

VT320 and VT420 emulations provide an extended method to program function and editing keys:

DCS

" x key / mod / 100 / value / 0 ;

...

The key to be programmed is specified by

key

according to the

ANSI Extended Key Table ,

and any modifier keys (

SHIFT

CTRL

, etc.) are specificed by

mod

, according to the same table. The sequence for the key is specified by

value

in hexadecimal.

In addition, the VT420 emulation has user-definable macros. Use the following command to define macros.

DCS

id ; dt ; fn ; en ! z value

Id is a macro identifier, which must be in the range of 0 to 63. If dt is 1, then all current macros are deleted before the new macro is defined. en specifies the encoding: 0 for ASCII text, 1 for hexadecimal. Value is the macro contents in the specified encoding format.

Invoking a macro has the same effect as if the terminal had received the macro contents from the host.

The following command may be use to invoke a defined macro:

CSI

id * z

The SCO Console emulation uses the following sequence to program function keys:

ESC

key delim value delim

key is a single ASCII character which designates which key to program. Function keys

F12

are selected by specifying

;

. For

SHIFT+F1

SHIFT+F12

use

. For

CTRL+F1

CTRL+F12

use

. For

CTRL+SHIFT+F1

CTRL+SHIFT+F12

use

. Delim is a single character delimiter which encloses value.

CSI

2 + z

Restores default values to programmed keys. 34

266 AccuTerm 7 Help

To program the Answerback message, use the following device control sequence:

DCS

1 v

value

Note: the “Map F11 through F20 …” check box in the k eyboard settings must be check ed to access programmed function k eys from

F13

F20

. When this item is check ed, function k eys

F11 - F20

are mapped onto the control function k eys; e.g.

F15

is mapped to

CTRL+F5

SHIFT+F13

is mapped to

CTRL+SHIFT+F3

VT-52 Escape Sequences

ESC

Cursor up.

ESC

Cursor down.

ESC

Cursor right.

ESC

Cursor left.

ESC

Enter line graphics mode.

ESC

Exit line graphics mode.

ESC

Cursor home.

ESC

Reverse line feed.

ESC

Erase from cursor to end of screen.

ESC

Erase from cursor to end of line.

ESC

Print cursor line.

ESC

]

Print screen.

ESC

Transparent print mode.

AccuTerm 7 Reference 267

ESC

Cancel transparent print mode.

ESC

Auto print mode.

ESC

Cancel auto print mode.

ESC

Keypad application mode on.

ESC

Keypad application mode off.

ESC

Enter VT220 mode.

ESC

Identify terminal.

ESC

line col

Cursor position.

3.4.1 ANSI Tables

3.4.1.1

ANSI Attribute Code Table

The ANSI Attribute Code Table defines the attribute code character (

) used by the ANSI emulations to assign visual attributes.

Code (

) Attribute type

Normal

Bold

Dim

Underline

Blinking

Reverse

Blank

Dim & Bold off

Underline off

Blinking off

Reverse off

Blank off

Black character

Red character

Green character

Yellow character

Blue character

Magenta character

268 AccuTerm 7 Help

Code (

) Attribute type

Cyan character

White character

Black background

Red background

Green background

Yellow background

Blue background

Magenta background

Cyan background

White background

3.4.1.2

ANSI Function Key Table

The ANSI Function Key Table defines the key code (

key

) used by the ANSI emulations to program function keys.

Key to program

F15

F16

F17

F18

F19

F20

F11

F12

F13

F14

F10

key

3.4.1.3

ANSI Extended Key Table

The ANSI Extended Key Table defines the key code (

key

) and modifier keys (

mod

) used by the ANSI emulations to program extended function and keypad keys.

Key to program

key

112

113

114

115

116

117

Modifier keys none

SHIFT

ALT

ALT+SHIFT

CTRL

SHIFT+CTRL

mod

AccuTerm 7 Reference 269

Key to program

DEL

HOME

END

PGUP

PGDN

LEFT

RIGHT

F10

F11

F12

BKSP

TAB

INS

DOWN

ESC

ENTER

KPD ENTER

key

118

119

120

121

122

123

110

108

Modifier keys

ALT+CTRL

ALT+CTRL+SHIFT

mod

3.4.1.4

ANSI Key Code Table

The ANSI Key Code Table describes the default character sequence transmitted by the function, keypad and other special keys on the PC keyboard and the corresponding real terminal key.

PC Key

BKSP

SHIFT+BKSP

TAB

SHIFT+TAB

INS

SHIFT+INS

DEL

SHIFT+DEL

HOME

SHIFT+HOME

END

SHIFT+END

PGUP

SHIFT+PGUP

PGDN

SHIFT+PGDN

LEFT

SHIFT+LEFT

Terminal Key

BKSP

SHIFT+BKSP

TAB

SHIFT+TAB

DEL

DEL LINE

HOME

SHIFT+HOME

PGUP

SHIFT+PGUP

PGDN

SHIFT+PGDN

LEFT

SHIFT+LEFT

Sequence

CSI

2 ~

CSI

2 ~

DEL

CSI

1 ~

CSI

1 ~

CSI

5 ~

CSI

5 ~

CSI

6 ~

CSI

6 ~

CSI

270 AccuTerm 7 Help

PC Key

RIGHT

F10

F11

F12

CTRL+F1

CTRL+F2

CTRL+F3

CTRL+F4

CTRL+F5

CTRL+F6

CTRL+F7

CTRL+F8

CTRL+F9

CTRL+F10

SHIFT+RIGHT

SHIFT+UP

DOWN

SHIFT+DOWN

ESC

SHIFT+ESC

ENTER

SHIFT+ENTER

KPD ENTER

SHIFT+KPD ENTER

Terminal Key

RIGHT

SHIFT+RIGHT

SHIFT+UP

DOWN

PF1

PF2

PF3

PF4

SHIFT+DOWN

ESC

SHIFT+ESC

RETURN

SHIFT+ENTER

ENTER

SHIFT+ENTER

F15

F16

F17

F18

F11

F12

F13

F14

F19

F20

F10

F11

F12

Note: when using 7 bit controls,

CSI

is sent as

ESC

[

and

SS3

is sent as

ESC

Sequence

CSI

ESC

SS3

CSI

1 7 ~

CSI

1 8 ~

CSI

1 9 ~

CSI

2 0 ~

CSI

2 1 ~

CSI

2 3 ~

CSI

2 4 ~

CSI

2 3 ~

CSI

2 4 ~

CSI

2 5 ~

CSI

2 6 ~

CSI

2 8 ~

CSI

2 9 ~

CSI

3 1 ~

CSI

3 2 ~

CSI

3 3 ~

CSI

3 4 ~

3.4.2 ANSI Programming Notes

Functions tagged with the following super-script symbols are only valid in the designated emulation:

1 - VT100

2 - VT220

3 - VT320

4 - VT420

A - ANSI BBS

L - Linux Console

S - SCO Console

AccuTerm 7 Reference 271

3.5 Pick PC Console Programming

The Pick Operating System on the IBM PC has its own terminal type for the system console (term type

). AccuTerm emulates the Pick PC console thus allowing you to use the same terminal codes for all your terminals in a Pick PC environment. The advantage of using this emulation is that it gives you direct access to legacy VGA colors and attributes.

Operating Modes

ESC

* Y

Set the video mode to 80 by 25 monochrome mode. This command is ignored by

AccuTerm.

ESC

* ]

Sets the video mode to 80 by 25 color. This command is ignored by AccuTerm.

If the graphics mode is enabled, this command puts the terminal in the Tektronix emulation mode. If the graphics mode is disabled, this command is ignored.

ESC

% ! 0

Enters Tektronix 4100 graphics mode.

Cursor Positioning

ESC

Cursor left. The cursor is moved left one position. If the cursor is at the first column, it is moved to the last column of the previous line.

ESC

DC3

Cursor right. Moves the cursor right one position. If the cursor is at the last column, it will wrap to the first column of the next line.

Cursor down. Moves the cursor down one row. If the cursor is on the last row of the screen and the terminal is not in protected mode, the screen scrolls up one line.

ESC

Cursor up. Moves the cursor up one row. If the cursor is at the top row and the terminal is not in protected mode, the screen is scrolled down one line.

Carriage return. Moves the cursor to the leftmost column of the current row.

ESC

STX

Cursor home. Moves the cursor to the upper left corner of the screen.

ESC

c r

This command positions the cursor to column

and row

and

are the binary cursor positions, numbered from 0 (top row, left column). For example, to position the cursor to column 10 row 10, you would send

ESC

LF LF

where

is the ASCII representation of

272 AccuTerm 7 Help

character 10.

Erasing and Editing

ESC

SOH

Clears the screen and moves the cursor to the upper left corner of the screen.

ESC

ETX

Clears from the cursor position to the end of the screen.

ESC

EOT

Clears from the cursor position to the end of the line.

ESC

* h

Insert character. A blank is inserted at the current cursor position. All characters from the cursor position to the right are moved right one column.

ESC

* i

Delete character. The character at the current cursor position is deleted. All characters to the right of the cursor are moved left one column and a blank is placed on the last column of the line.

ESC

* j

ESC

* k

Delete line. The current line is deleted. All lines below the current line are moved up one position. The bottom line is blank. The cursor is moved to the left most column.

Video Attributes

In Pick PC Console emulation there are several different ways to set the video attributes. The first is through escape sequences that start and stop individual attributes like "Underline", "Reverse", etc. The second is by sending the desired foreground and background colors. Note that the PC Console treats the "Dim" attribute as the protected attribute. To change video attributes, use the following escape sequences.

ESC

ENQ

Start blinking characters.

ESC

ACK

Stop blinking characters.

ESC

BEL

Start dim (protected) characters.

ESC

Stop dim (protected) characters.

AccuTerm 7 Reference 273

ESC

Start reverse video characters.

ESC

Stop reverse video characters.

ESC

Start underlined characters.

ESC

DLE

Stop underlined characters.

ESC

Sets the foreground/background attributes separately where

is the code from the

Console Color Code Table

Protected Attributes

The Pick PC Console emulation uses the dim attribute as the protected attribute. When the protect mode is enabled, the cursor is not allowed to move to any positions that contain protected characters, the auto scroll mode is turned off, and the clear screen functions clear only the un-protected characters.

ESC

Turn on the protected mode.

ESC

Turn off the protected mode.

ESC

BEL

Start protected (dim) characters.

ESC

Stop protected (dim) characters.

Printer Control

ESC

[ ? 5 i

ESC

DC1

Transparent print mode. Characters are printed, but not displayed. When AccuTerm receives this command, it goes into transparent print mode until it receives the ANSI print off sequence below. This command is useful for printing graphics data to the printer. Since

AccuTerm requires the specific ANSI cancel command below to exit transparent print mode,

there is less chance of a control character interrupting the graphic printing.

ESC

[ ? 4 i

ESC

DC2

Cancel transparent print mode.

3.5.1 PC Console Color Code Table

The PC Console Color Code Table defines the color code character (

) used by the Pick PC Console emulation to assign the foreground and background colors.

274 AccuTerm 7 Help

Color

White

Yellow

Magenta

Red

Cyan

Green

Blue

Black

(

Background

Bright foreground

)

;

Dim foreground

AccuTerm 7 Reference 275

3.6 ASCII Control Codes

ASCII Control Codes

The ASCII Control Codes chart lists the ASCII 7-bit control codes, along with their decimal and hexadecimal values and the keyboard keys used to produce the code. The ANSI 8-bit control codes are shown at the end of the table along with their 7-bit equivalents.

ASCII 7-bit control char

NUL

DEL

SUB

ESC

DC1

DC2

DC3

DC4

NAK

SYN

ETB

CAN

DLE

SOH

STX

ETX

EOT

ENQ

ACK

BEL

Decimal Hex

127

Key

CTRL+Q

CTRL+R

CTRL+S

CTRL+T

CTRL+U

CTRL+V

CTRL+W

CTRL+X

CTRL+Y

CTRL+Z

CTRL+[

CTRL+\

CTRL+]

CTRL+^

CTRL+_

CTRL+I

CTRL+J

CTRL+K

CTRL+L

CTRL+M

CTRL+N

CTRL+O

CTRL+P

CTRL+A

CTRL+B

CTRL+C

CTRL+D

CTRL+E

CTRL+F

CTRL+G

CTRL+H

ANSI 8-bit control char

IND

NEL

Decimal Hex

132

133

7-bit equivalent

276 AccuTerm 7 Help

CSI

OSC

APC

ASCII 7-bit control char

SSA

SS3

DCS

PU1

PU2

STS

CCH

SPA

EPA

PLD

PLU

SS2

ESA

HTS

HTJ

VTS

Decimal Hex

149

150

151

152

153

154

155

156

157

158

159

141

142

143

144

145

146

147

148

134

135

136

137

138

139

140

Key

ESC

[

ESC

AccuTerm 7 Reference 277

3.7 Customizing the Installation Process

The AccuTerm 7 installation process can be customized in several ways: default values can be supplied for any of the installation wizard prompts, the installer can run in "silent mode", you can supply your own files to be installed along with the AccuTerm 7 program files, and the MSI can be extracted to facilitate deployment using Active Directory and Group Policy.

The AccuTerm 7 installer is distributed as a single EXE file. The installer can be placed in any folder that is accessible to the user's PC: local hard drive, portable drive such as a USB drive, network share, CD-

ROM, etc. The EXE wraps an MSI install file and launches the MSI installer (msiexec) with appropriate options based on the install type selected.

Supplying default values for installation prompts

To supply default values for installation prompts, you need to create a text file called 'setup.ini' and place it in the same directory that the AccuTerm 7 installation EXE file resides. A sample 'setup.ini' file is shown below:

; Custom setup for AccuTerm 7.1

;

; Use atw71.exe /silent or /verysilent for a "quiet" unattended installation

;

; Items which can be defined:

[Defaults]

;MAINDIR=Program Files\Atwin71

;HOMEDIR=My Documents

;DESKTOPSHORTCUT=Y

;ALLUSERS=Y

;ACTIVATIONCODE=123456789-123456789

;AUTOACTIVATE=Y

;AUTOUPGRADE=Y or N or numeric value (see help)

;CUSTOMFEATURECODE=xxxx

;NAME=your name

;COMPANY=your company

;ADDRESS=your address

;LOCATION=your location

;CITY=your city

;STATE=your state

;ZIPCODE=zip or postal code

;COUNTRY=your country

;[email protected]

[CustomFiles]

;Main=folder containing extra files copied to the main program directory

;Images=folder containing extra image files copied to the Images sub directory

;Home=folder containing files to copy to the default “home” directory

[CustomShortcut]

;Name=name of shortcut

;Target=path to .exe, .atcf, .atly or .atsc file (can use %HOMEDIR% or %

MAINDIR% prefix for path)

;Icon=path to file containing icon (can use %HOMEDIR% or %MAINDIR% prefix for path)

;Index=n (index of icon, if icon is contained in an exe file with

278 AccuTerm 7 Help

multiple icons)

;State=n (initial window state: 1=normal, 2=minimized, 3=maximized)

To use the 'setup.ini' sample shown above, remove the leading ';' from any items you need to define, and enter the value you want to use after the equal sign. Remove the comment text from any lines that you define. Any items that are not defined will use the default for that setting.

The MainDir entry may begin with the text "Program Files" which will be replaced during the installation with the appropriate directory for program files (usually C:\Program Files or C:\Program Files (x86) ).

The HomeDir entry may begin with the text "My Documents" which will be replaced during installation with the public Documents directory (Normal install) or the current user's Documents directory (Personal install). Subdirectories are allowed.

In the [CustomShortcut] section, the Target and Icon entries may begin with the tokens %MAINDIR% and %HOMEDIR%. These tokens will be replaced with the appropriate directory during installation.

The

AUTOUPGRADE

item is used to skip the "AccuTerm 7 Upgrade" dialog that is shown on first use of

AccuTerm 7 when an earlier version of AccuTerm is detected. Set this item to "N" to suppress the dialog and ignore all previous settings and files. Set to "Y" to migrate all possible preferences and files from the earlier AccuTerm version. Set this item to a numeric value (a bit mask) to specify which category of settings or files are to be automatically migrated from the earlier version of AccuTerm. The values for each desired category can be added together to form the bit mask.

1 - migrate user's personal custom menu

2 - migrate application custom menu

4 - migrate settings from the current atwin.ini file

8 - migrate preferences (stored in the HKEY_CURRENT_USER section of the registry)

16 - migrate SSH keys

32 - migrate custom settings from the atwin.ini file

64 - migrate session files from program directory to home directory

128 - migrate the phone book

256 - migrate cfg, lyt, atcf, atly, script and image files found in the old program directory

Unattended Installation

The AccuTerm 7 installer uses command-line options to perform an unattended installation. To perform an unattended installation, you must indicate your acceptance of the software license agreement by including the /LICENSEACCEPTED=YES command-line option.

The "/SILENT" command-line option bypasses all of the installation prompts, but does display a progress bar during installation: atw71a.exe /SILENT /LICENSEACCEPTED=YES

The "/VERYSILENT" command-line option bypasses all of the prompts and does not display the progress bar: atw71a.exe /VERYSILENT /LICENSEACCEPTED=YES

If you intend to use the 'setup.ini' file to specify answers to the installation prompts during an unattended installation, you can include the following line in the [Defaults] section of the 'setup.ini' file to indicate

AccuTerm 7 Reference 279

your acceptance of the software license agreement. By including this line in 'setup.ini', you no longer need to include it on the command line.

LICENSEACCEPTED=YES

Installing user-supplied files

The AccuTerm 7 Installer can install user supplied files after installing the AccuTerm program files. To install user supplied files, create a sub-directory below the directory where the installation EXE resides called 'VARFILES'.

To copy user supplied files to the AccuTerm program directory, create a sub-directory under VARFILES called 'MAIN'. Place any files that need to be copied to the AccuTerm program directory in this directory.

Add the entry "Main=VARFILES\MAIN" in the [CustomFiles] section of setup.ini.

To copy user supplied image files to the AccuTerm program Images sub-directory, create a sub-directory under VARFILES called 'IMAGES' and place the image files in this sub-directory. Add the entry

"Images=VARFILES\IMAGES" in the [CustomFiles] section of setup.ini.

To copy user supplied files to the user's "home" directory (the directory where the session files are saved), create a sub-directory under VARFILES called 'HOME'. Place files to copy to the "home" directory in this directory. Add the entry "Home=VARFILES\HOME" in the [CustomFiles] section of setup.ini.

Note: in prior versions of AccuTerm, the VARFILES directory could contain a directory tree to copy to the program or home directories. Directory trees are no longer supported. Only individual files can be copied. Also, prior versions of AccuTerm allowed a user-specified secondary installation program to be executed during the install process. This is no longer supported.

Installing a pre-configured version of AccuTerm

It is possible to create a custom installation package that installs a pre-configured version of AccuTerm.

AccuTerm's initial state is defined by settings stored in the 'atwin71.ini' file in the AccuTerm program directory. Custom master menu/toolbar is defined by the 'menu71.ini' file in the AccuTerm program directory. Session settings are stored in session configuration files (.atcf files), stored in the user's (or public) "home" directory. By taking advantage of the ability of the AccuTerm installer to install user supplied files (see above) you can create a pre-configured installation package.

Here is a sample atwin71.ini file to use as a basis for your custom settings:

280 AccuTerm 7 Help

[Atwin]

Version=7.1

[Options]

ToolBar=True

StatusLine=True

SessionBar=True

SingleInstance=True

AutoClose=False

NoCloseWarning=False

NoConnectWizard=False

NoWelcomePage=False

LargeIcons=False

TrackKeyboardState=False

FuncBar=False

FuncBarStyle=0

FuncBarPos=0

TitleFormat=4

RecentListSize=4

[Path]

Capture=""

[Xfer]

DefaultDir=""

[Custom]

Icon=""

Title=""

Splash=""

Most of the 'atwin71.ini' settings are obvious. For those values which are not True/False, please refer to the property of the same name in the AccuTerm object. The [Custom] Icon and Splash settings are file names. These files are usually stored in the AccuTerm program directory - in that case you do not need to include a full path. You can disable the splash screen by setting Splash=No.

Extracting the MSI file from the EXE installation file

To extract the MSI file from the EXE installer, run the EXE with the /EXTRACTMSI command line option: atw71a.exe /EXTRACTMSI

The EXE installer will prompt for a target directory where the MSI file will be stored.

Installing AccuTerm directly using MSI

Once the MSI file has been extracted from the EXE, you can use the msiexec command to install directly from the MSI file. You may specify certain MSI properties on the msiexec command line.

Common properties are INSTALLDIR, ALLUSERS, and MSIINSTALLPERUSER. In order to use setup.ini

as described above, specify the SETUPINI property on the command line (the value is the name of the setup.ini file). For example: msiexec /i atwin71.msi ALLUSERS="1" SETUPINI="setup.ini"

AccuTerm 7 Reference 281

282 AccuTerm 7 Help

4 Features for MultiValue Users

4.1 MultiValue File Transfer

Installing MultiValue

Host Programs for information on installing the host programs.

In order to understand how to best use AccuTerm’s MultiValue file transfer features, the differences between the PC and MultiValue file systems must be examined. Traditional PC files may be programs, documents or data files; in the typical MultiValue system, programs and documents are stored as individual items (records) in a file, whereas a data file is collection of related items (records) in a file, with an associated file dictionary.

When exchanging data between your computer and your MultiValue host, it is important to realize the difference between “document files” and “data files”.

MultiValue File Transfer Wizard

MultiValue File Transfer Utilities

When transferring “document files” between the PC and MultiValue host, use AccuTerm’s FT utility.

This utility transfers MultiValue items to PC files and vice versa. The key concept is that each

MultiValue item becomes a separate file on the PC.

You can also use AccuTerm to trasnfer data between two MultiValue hosts. The FTPICK utility is used to transfer data from one MultiValue machine to another, either directly (using two concurrent

AccuTerm sessions), or using an intermediate PC file.

MultiValue File Transfer Functions:

Installing MultiValue Host Programs

Updating the MultiValue Host Programs

Downloading documents to your PC

Uploading documents from your PC

Downloading data files to your PC (export)

Uploading data files from your PC (import)

Transferring data between two MultiValue hosts

Integrating file transfer functions into MultiValue applications

Features for MultiValue Users 283

4.1.1 Installing the MultiValue Host Programs

To install the MultiValue host programs, perform the following steps.

1. Open a terminal session and connect to your MultiValue host system. If you have an existing

ACCUTERM

account, log on to the

ACCUTERM

account (a different account may be used, but it is highly recommended that you use a dedicated

ACCUTERM

account). Otherwise log on to your system administration account (

SYSPROG

QMSYS

, etc.) and create an

ACCUTERM

account (you may need to ask your system administrator to create the

ACCUTERM

account for you).

2. Check the following items before beginning the installation: a) Make sure you are at a command prompt (TCL, ECL, etc.) b) If your system is running on a Unix, Linux or AIX host, make sure that the

CTRL+ A

control character can be input. Check by typing

stty -a

at a *nix prompt – look for ^A - if you find it, either disable that function or map it to a different control character. For example if you see something like

susp = ^A

you can type

stty susp \^-

to disable the suspend function.

c) For jBase systems, make sure you have a valid terminal type assigned.

3. While at the command prompt use MultiValue ? Host Programs ? Install from the main menu to start the host program installation wizard. Confirm that you want to install the host programs by clicking the Yes button.

4. The host program installation wizard will perform some checks to identify the type of MultiValue platform you are running, verify that you are at a TCL prompt and turn off case inversion. You will see meaningless text on the terminal screen during this process.

5. The installation wizard will display a list of supported MultiValue platforms. Select your platform from the list. If the wizard was able to identify the platform, it will be highlighted, but you can change it by clicking a different platform if necessary.

6. If your MultiValue platform is running on IBM's AIX operating system, check the Host operating

system is IBM AIX check-box.

7. Click the Install Host Programs button to install a bootstrap PROC and BASIC program. You will see these scroll up the terminal screen as they are installed. Once the bootstrap programs are installed, the wizard will run them to install the core FTBP programs automatically.

8. After the core FTBP programs are installed, a dialog box will be displayed where you can select any optional program libraries (GUI, ObjectBridge, SUI) and sample programs and data that you want to install.

9. If you have previously installed the ViaDuct host programs, the ViaDuct FT PROC conflicts with

AccuTerm's FT program. If this conflict is detected, the AccuTerm installer will prompt if you want to rename the ViaDuct FT command as "FT.VIA". Answer

to rename.

An alternate method of installing the AccuTerm host programs is available in the event that the installation wizard is not compatible with your host. See

Alternative Host Program Installation .

See also:

Updating the MultiValue Host Programs

Activating other accounts to use the AccuTerm host programs

4.1.1.1

Alternative Host Program Installation

To install the AccuTerm MultiValue host programs manually, perform the following steps.

1. Open a terminal session and connect to your MultiValue host system. If you have an existing

ACCUTERM

account, log on to the

ACCUTERM

account (a different account may be used, but it is

284 AccuTerm 7 Help

highly recommended that you use a dedicated

ACCUTERM

account). Otherwise log on to your system administration account (

SYSPROG

QMSYS

, etc.) and create an

ACCUTERM

account (you may need to ask your system administrator to create the

ACCUTERM

account for you).

2. Check the following items before beginning the installation: a) Make sure you are at a command prompt (TCL, ECL, etc.) b) If your system is running on a Unix, Linux or AIX host, make sure that the

CTRL+ A

control character can be input. Check by typing

stty -a

at a *nix prompt – look for ^A - if you find it, either disable that function or map it to a different control character. For example if you see something like

susp = ^A

you can type

stty susp \^-

to disable the suspend function.

c) For jBase systems, make sure you have a valid terminal type assigned.

d) Check the Paste Options - end-of-line setting (

Clipboard Settings ) and ensure that the CR

option is selected. Ensure that the Do not send line-end... option is not selected.

3. While at the command prompt (TCL, ECL, etc.), click on the Edit menu and select Paste From.

4. Browse to the PICKBP folder.

Click on the install script for your platform (please see the readme.txt file in the PICKBP folder for the latest platform list):

FTPINST.TXT

FTPINSADDS.TXT

generic MultiValue system

Mentor, Mentor Pro, MOE

FTPINSAP.TXT

Advanced Pick (except PRO and AIX)

FTPINSAP_PRO.TXT

Advanced Pick / Pro

FTPINSCACHE.TXT

Intersystems Cache (except AIX)

FTPINSD3.TXT

FTPINSENH.TXT

FTPINSJB.TXT

FTPINSJB4.TXT

FTPINSMD.TXT

FTPINSMV.TXT

FTPINSNR.TXT

FTPINSOI.TXT

D3 (NT, Linux, Unix except AIX)

Enhanced R83 (Altos, Fujitsu, R91, etc.) jBase 3.x (except AIX) jBase 4.x (except AIX)

Reality mvBase

Northgate Reality 9+

Revelation OpenInsight CTO

FTPINSON.TXT

ONWare MVON (except AIX)

FTPINSPWR95.TXT

Power 95

FTPINSQM.TXT

FTPINSQM3.TXT

QM MV Database

QM 3.x MV Database

FTPINSR83.TXT

FTPINSSEQ.TXT

FTPINSUD.TXT

FTPINSULT.TXT

Pick R83

Sequoia, mvEnterprise (except Ultimate emulation and AIX)

UniData (except AIX)

Ultimate Plus (all except SCO Unix and AIX)

FTPINSULT_SCO.TXT Ultimate Plus on SCO Unix

FTPINSULTX.TXT

Early Ultimate (as implemented on mvEnterprise)

FTPINSUV.TXT

FTPINSVIS.TXT

UniVerse (except AIX)

UniVision

For hosts running on IBM AIX, use the following scripts:

FTPINSAP_AIX.TXT

FTPINSCACHE_AIX.

Advanced Pick on AIX

Intersystems Cache on AIX

TXT

FTPINSD3_AIX.TXT

FTPINSJB_AIX.TXT

D3 on AIX jBase 3.x on AIX

FTPINSJB4_AIX.TXT

jBase 4.x on AIX

Features for MultiValue Users 285

FTPINSON_AIX.TXT

ONWare MVON on AIX

FTPINSSEQ_AIX.TXT

Sequoia, mvEnterprise on AIX

FTPINSUD_AIX.TXT

UniData on AIX

FTPINSULT_AIX.TXT

Ultimate Plus on AIX

FTPINSULTX_AIX.TXT

Early Ultimate on AIX (as implemented on mvEnterprise)

FTPINSUV_AIX.TXT

UniVerse on AIX

6. Click the Open button. AccuTerm will install a small bootstrap PROC and program which will be used to install the core file transfer programs. You will see these programs scroll up the terminal screen as they are installed. Once the bootstrap programs have been installed, they will run automatically and complete the installation of the core programs (FTBP file).

7. Once the core FTBP programs are installed, a dialog box will be displayed where you can select any optional program libraries (GUI, ObjectBridge, SUI) and sample programs and data that you want to install.

8. If you have previously installed the ViaDuct host programs, the ViaDuct FT proc conflicts with

AccuTerm's FT program. If this conflict is detected, the AccuTerm installer will prompt if you want to rename the ViaDuct FT command as "FT.VIA". Answer

to rename.

See also:

Updating the MultiValue Host Programs

Activating other accounts to use the AccuTerm host programs

4.1.2 Updating the MultiValue Host Programs

To update the MultiValue host programs previously installed on your host, perform the following steps.

1. Open a terminal session and connect to your MultiValue host system. Log on to the

ACCUTERM

account (or other account where you have the host programs installed). Make sure you are at a command prompt (TCL, ECL, etc.)

2. While at the command prompt use MultiValue ? Host Programs ? Update from the main menu to start the host program update process. Confirm that you want to update the host programs by clicking the Yes button.

3. The AccuTerm Host Program Installation Options dialog box will be displayed. Select the

Reinstall FTBP option. Click the OK button to reinstall the core FTBP programs.

4. To update the optional programs and/or sample data files, use MultiValue ? Host Programs ?

Update from the main menu to restart the host program update process. Confirm that you want to update the host programs by clicking the Yes button.

5. The AccuTerm Host Program Installation Options dialog box will be displayed again. Select any optional program libraries (GUI, ObjectBridge, SUI) and sample programs and data that you want to install or update.

4.1.3 Activating Other Accounts to use the AccuTerm Host Programs

After installing the host programs on the ACCUTERM (or other) account on your host system, you can easily activate these programs on other accounts. To activate the programs on another account, perform the following steps:

286 AccuTerm 7 Help

1. Open a terminal session and connect to your MultiValue host system. Log on to the

ACCUTERM

account (or other account where you have the host programs installed). Make sure you are at a command prompt (TCL, ECL, etc.)

2. While at the command prompt use MultiValue ? Host Programs ? Account Setup from the main menu to start the host program account setup process. Confirm that you want to activate an account to use the host programs by clicking the Yes button.

3. The character-based FTSETUP program will start. From the FTSETUP menu, select option 1

(enter

, then press

ENTER

4. When prompted for the account name to activate, type the name and press

ENTER

5. Repeat for any other accounts that you want to activate.

6. To terminate the FTSETUP program, enter

at the FTSETUP menu, then press

ENTER

4.1.4 Downloading Documents to your PC

Use the FT utility to send MultiValue items (documents) to your PC. FT downloads each item

(document) into a separate PC file. Normally, FT uses text mode, converting attribute-marks to

CR LF

during the download process.

To download using FT, enter FT at the command promot. On-line help is provided for each prompt, just enter a question mark and press ENTER.

(S)end, (R)eceive, (C)onfigure, (O)ptions, (H)elp or (E)xit ?

Answer

to send, then select the file transfer protocol (answer C to modify FT

configuration settings;

enter O to modify FT

options

File transfer protocol: (A)SCII or (K)ermit ?

Kermit is recommended.

Enter source (Pick) file name:

Enter the name of the host file which contains the items to be sent.

Enter source (Pick) item list:

Enter the item-IDs to be sent. If you do not enter item-IDs, any previously selected (SELECT, GET-

LIST, etc.) items will be transferred; if you enter an asterisk (

), all items in the file will be transferred.

To specify a saved list, enter an open parenthesis followed by the list name. Separate item-IDs with blanks.

Enter target (DOS) directory name:

Enter the PC directory name including drive letter if desired. Separate directory names in a full path using back-slashes. UNC-style file names are acceptable.

Enter target (DOS) file name:

Enter the PC file name, including extension. If multiple items are being sent, multiple file names may be specified here. Each host item will be written to a separate PC file. If no file names are specified here, the host item-ID will be used as the PC file name.

Features for MultiValue Users 287

When the transfer is complete, you may see a message like:

Converting file to ANSI character set . . .

This indicates that the raw data has been downloaded and is being converted from the host's character set to the ANSI (Windows native) character set.

4.1.5 Uploading Documents from your PC to the Host

Use the FT utility to send PC files to your MultiValue host. Each PC file uploaded is saved as an item in the host file you specify.

To upload using FT, enter FT at the command prompt and follow the prompts. On-line help is provided for each prompt, just enter a question mark and press ENTER.

(S)end, (R)eceive, (C)onfigure, (O)ptions, (H)elp or (E)xit ?

Answer

to receive, then select the file transfer protocol (answer C to modify FT

configuration settings;

enter O to modify FT

options

File transfer protocol: (A)SCII or (K)ermit ?

Kermit is recommended.

Enter source (DOS) directory name:

Enter the name of the PC directory which contains the files to be received.

Enter source (DOS) file name:

Enter the name(s) of the PC file(s) to be received. Separate multiple file names with blanks. Wildcard characters (? and *) are valid.

Enter target (Pick) file name:

Enter the host file name where the uploaded PC files are to be saved. Each uploaded file is stored as an item in this file.

Enter target (Pick) item list:

Enter the item-ID(s) for the uploaded file(s). If multiple files are being uploaded, multiple item-IDs may be specified here. If no item-IDs are specified here, the PC file name will be used as the item-ID.

Before the transfer begins, you may see a message like:

Converting file to host character set . . .

This indicates that the PC file, which uses the ANSI (Windows native) character set is being translated into the host's character set prior to transfer to your host computer.

288 AccuTerm 7 Help

4.1.6 FT Options and Settings

Several configuration (permanent) and option (temporary) settings are available for the FT utility. To change configuration settings, enter

in response to the first prompt. A list of configuration settings will be displayed:

Current parameter settings are:

1. Transfer mode................. Text

2. Preserve file extension....... Yes

3. Overwrite existing item....... Yes

4. Large item treatment.......... Truncate

5. Convert character set......... No

Enter parameter number (1-5) to modify:

The setting for any of these parameters may be changed by entering the parameter number.

To change option settings, enter

in response to the first prompt. A list of option settings will be displayed. Note that the default value of the options is stored in the configuration settings:

Current parameter settings are:

1. Transfer mode................. Text

2. Preserve file extension....... Yes

3. Overwrite existing item....... Yes

An alternate way to set the value of a configuration or option setting is to answer the prompt with the parameter number, an equal sign, and the first letter of the value to which the parameter is to be set.

For example, to set the first configuration parameter to "binary", respond to "Enter parameter..." with

1=B

. This alternate method is useful in cases where the FT utility is being "driven" by a PROC or by another program using the EXECUTE statement.

Transfer mode

Possible transfer modes are text and binary. Text causes attribute mark characters to be translated to carriage return / line feeds and vice versa.

Preserve file extension

This option affects uploads only. When set to "Yes", and target item-IDs are not specified, the complete

DOS file name, including the file extension, is used for the item-ID. When set to "No", the extension is removed.

Overwrite existing item

This option can be used to protect existing files and items from being overwritten. Select "Yes" to allow existing DOS files to be overwritten during downloads (host to PC), or existing items to be overwritten during uploads (PC to host). Select "No" to protect existing files (downloads) or items (uploads).

Large item treatment

For uploads (PC to host), "Truncate" will truncate large files at about 30000 bytes, "Split" will split large files into multiple items of about 30000 bytes each, and "No action" will leave large file unchanged. Note: if you select "No action", be sure your host system does not have an item size limit. Split items use a special item-ID generated by concatenating the original item-ID, an underscore ( _ ), and a sequential number starting with 001. For downloads (host to PC), when "Split" is selected, the process is reversed.

That is, multiple items, using the naming scheme described above, are joined together to form a single large DOS file.

Features for MultiValue Users 289

Convert character set

If you enable character set conversion, the content of downloaded files is converted from the host's character set to the encoding specified in the session settings Defaults: Text file encoding. For uploads, unless the default encoding is set to "no encoding", the actual file contents are examined to determine the file encoding, and the content is converted to the host character set during the transfer.

4.1.7 Downloading Data Files to your PC (export)

Use the File Transfer Wizard or FTD utility to download a set of specified (or selected) items from your host database to a PC file. You can specify which fields (attributes) to download. The target PC file format is determined by the extension of the file name you specify.

FTD can also be used to join several host items into a single PC file. This is done by setting the field delimiter to "CrLf", and entering an asterisk at the “Source item list” prompt.

To export data from the host using FTD, enter FTD at the command prompt, then answer the prompts.

On-line help is provided for each prompt, just enter a question mark and press ENTER.

(S)end, (R)eceive, (C)onfigure, (O)ptions, (H)elp or (E)xit ?

Answer

to send, then select the file transfer protocol (answer C to modify FTD

configuration settings;

enter O to modify FTD

options ):

File transfer protocol: (A)SCII or (K)ermit ?

Kermit is recommended.

Enter source (Pick) file name:

Enter the name of the host file which contains the data to be exported.

Enter source (Pick) item list:

Enter the item-IDs of the items (records) you want to export. If you do not enter any item-IDs, any previously selected (SELECT, GET-LIST, etc.) items will be exported; if you enter an asterisk (

), all items in the file will be exported. To specify a saved list, enter an open parenthesis followed by the list name. Separate item-IDs with blanks.

Enter target (DOS) file (path) name:

Enter the full PC file name including drive letter and directory, if desired. Separate directory names in a full path using back-slashes. UNC-style file names are acceptable.

For certain file types (Excel, Access, etc.), you may need to append a modifier after the file name; see the discussion of

file types for more information.

Attributes to transfer:

Enter the list of fields, or attributes, to be exported. Enter either the attribute number or attribute name as defined in the file dictionary. An asterisk (*) may be entered here to export all attributes including the

Item-ID, from all selected items. A plus-sign (+) may be entered to export all attributes except the Item-

ID.

290 AccuTerm 7 Help

Generate Header Record (<Y>/N):

Answer

if you want the first record in the PC file to be a "header record". The header record specifies the names of the fields of each data record in the file and may be used as column or field identifiers by certain Windows applications. If an asterisk was entered for the attribute list, the header record will contain only an asterisk.

If asterisk or plus-sign was not entered for the attribute list,

Explode MultiValue Fields (Y/<N>):

Answer

to explode all multi-valued fields. When multi-valued fields are exploded, a separate data record will be generated for each multi-value, with any single-valued attributes repeated for each multivalue.

When the transfer is complete, you may see a message like:

Converting file to Excel file format . . .

This indicates that the raw data has been downloaded and is being formatted in the native file format indicated by the file name you entered.

4.1.8 Uploading Data Files from your PC to the Host (import)

Use the File Transfer Wizard or FTD utility to send a DOS file to a Pick file. When prompted:

(S)end, (R)eceive, (C)onfigure, (O)ptions, (H)elp or (E)xit ?

Answer

to receive, then select the file transfer protocol (answer C to modify FTD

configuration settings;

enter O to modify FTD

options ):

File transfer protocol: (A)SCII or (K)ermit ?

Kermit is recommended.

Enter source (DOS) file (path) name:

Enter the full PC file name including drive letter and directory, if desired. Separate directory names in a full path using back-slashes. UNC-style file names are acceptable.

For certain file types (Excel, Access, etc.), you may need to append a modifier after the file name; see the discussion of

file types for more information.

Use Header Record (<Y>/N):

Answer

if you want the use the first record in the PC file as a "header record". The header record specifies the names (or numbers) of the attributes to be imported. If the header record consists of a single asterisk, all fields (attributes) in the item are assumed. If you answer

to this prompt, the next prompt will be "Enter target (Pick) file name", the other prompts will be bypassed.

Attributes to transfer:

Features for MultiValue Users 291

Enter the list of attributes (fields) to be imported. Enter either the attribute number or attribute name as defined in the file dictionary. An asterisk may be entered here to import all attributes (entire record or item). Attribute names or numbers listed here are in the same order as the fields in the DOS file. Enter a dash ( - ) to skip a field in the DOS file. Attribute definitions containing A or F correlatives cannot be specified.

Number of header records to skip:

Enter the number of records at the beginning of the PC file which are to be considered "header records", and which are to be ignored when importing the file.

Automatically generate target (Pick) IDs (Y/<N>):

Answer

to generate item-IDs for each record. If the item-id is not specified in response to the

"Attributes to transfer" prompt, you must generate item-IDs. The generated item-ID consists of a constant (possibly null) prefix, followed by a sequential number. If item-IDs are not generated, the next two prompts will be skipped.

Auto ID Prefix:

Enter the constant item-id prefix. Null is acceptable if the generated item-id is simply a sequential number.

Auto ID Starting Number:

Enter the starting value for automatically generated item-IDs.

Enter target (Pick) file name:

Enter the name of the host file where the imported data is to be stored.

Before the transfer begins, you may see a message like:

Converting file from Excel format for upload

This indicates that the PC file data is being converted into a delimited ASCII format which can be imported to your MultiValue database prior to transfer to your host computer.

4.1.9 FTD Options and Settings

Several configuration (permanent) and option (temporary) settings are available for the FTD utility. To change configuration settings, enter

in response to the first prompt. A list of configuration settings will be displayed:

Current parameter settings are:

1. Preserve file extension....... Yes

2. Overwrite existing item....... No

3. Large item treatment.......... Truncate

4. Field delimiter............... Tab

5. Convert character set......... No

Enter parameter number (1-5) to modify:

292 AccuTerm 7 Help

The setting for any of these parameters may be changed by entering the parameter number.

To change option settings, enter

in response to the first prompt. A list of option settings will be displayed. Note that the default value of the options is stored in the configuration settings:

Current parameter settings are:

1. Preserve file extension....... Yes

2. Overwrite existing item....... No

3. Field delimiter............... Tab

For example, to set the fourth configuration parameter to "tab", respond to "Enter parameter..." with

4=T

This alternate method is useful in cases where the FTD utility is being "driven" by a PROC or by another program using the EXECUTE statement.

Preserve file extension

This option affects FT uploads only. See the

FT options for more information.

Overwrite existing item

"Merge" to append or merge data into existing files during downloads.

Large item treatment

This option affects FT operations only. See the

FT options

for more information.

Field delimiter

The field delimiter (PC file) may be set to "Tab", "Comma", "CrLf" or any user-defined string. When

"Comma" is chosen, fields are enclosed in double-quote marks during downloads (host to PC) and are removed from fields during uploads (PC to host) if present. "CrLf" can only be used for exporting data to the PC (when importing, the field and record delimiters must be different). User-defined field delimiter is entered in hex, at the "Enter parameter..." prompt, as in

4=1A

Convert character set

4.1.10 FTD File Types

The default file format used by the FTD utility is ASCII delimited text. In this format, records in the

PC file are separated by a carriage return / line feed and fields are separated by tabs or commas. If the field delimiter is a comma, then each field is enclosed in quotation marks. Embedded quotation marks are duplicated. This file format is easily imported by many Windows database and spreadsheet programs.

Certain file extensions are recognized by AccuTerm and are assumed to be a particular format. These extensions are:

Features for MultiValue Users 293

.accdb

.db2

.dbf

.htm, .html

.mdb

.sym

.wb1

.wk1

.wks

.xl, .xls

.xlsb, .xlsm, .xlsx

Microsoft Access database dBase II dBase III/IV

HTML table

Microsoft Access database

Lotus Symphony

Quattro

Lotus v1-v2

Lotus v3-v5

Microsoft Excel

Microsoft Excel 2007

Excel import and export

When exporting and importing from Excel workbook files, the FTD utility has the ability to reference explicit worksheets and ranges of cells. To use this feature, specify the Excel file name as: d:\path\file.xls!sheet!range

where d:\path\file.xls is the path of the Excel file, sheet is the worksheet name or tab number (sheet may be null to use the first worksheet in the workbook), range is the range of cells to access. Either a named range may be used or a cell location (e.g. A4) or cell range (e.g. B3:F42) may be specified.

When exporting data to Excel, the range identifies the upper-left cell of the target worksheet; the number of columns and rows is determined by the data being sent. If a range is specified and the

Overwrite option is set to "Yes", new data is written beginning at the upper-left cell of the specified range. Cells outside the specified range are not modified. If Overwrite is set to "Merge", you normally do not specify a range. In this case, new data is appended to the specified sheet. If no sheet is specified, a new worksheet is created.

When importing data from Excel, the range specifies the entire block of data to be imported. To specify only the upper-left corner of the block (the number of columns and rows determined by the extent of the worksheet), follow the cell with a trailing colon (e.g. B3: ).

Access import and export

When exporting and importing from Access databases, the table name must be appended to the file name as: d:\path\file.mdb!table!connect

where d:\path\file.mdb is the path of the Access database file, table is the name of an existing or new table, and connect is an optional connection string that may be required to connect to the specified data source. If Overwrite is set to "Yes", and the specified table exists, then the table is cleared and new data is added. If Overwrite is set to "Merge", then new data is appended to an existing table.

294 AccuTerm 7 Help

4.1.11 Transferring Data Between MultiValue Hosts

The FTPICK utility will transfer specified (or selected) Pick items from one MultiValue computer to another. This transfer can be done in one step if you have two AccuTerm sessions open, connected to each of the MultiValue host computers. AccuTerm will also let you transfer data from one host to another using an intermediate file stored on your PC. This transfer requires two steps: transfer from first host to intermediate file, then transfer from the intermediate file to the second host.

Direct Host-to-Host (one step) transfer

Host-to-Host transfer using Intermediate PC file (two step)

FTPICK Options and Settings

4.1.11.1 Direct Host-to-Host file transfer

The direct transfer requires two sessions running on AccuTerm - one session connected to the file source host (sending machine), and one session connected to the target host (receiving machine). If you cannot run two sessions, you must use an intermediate PC file to store the data temporarily (see

Hostto-Host transfer using Intermediate PC file ).

When using direct transfer mode, both AccuTerm sessions must be running inside the same main

AccuTerm window.

To use the FTPICK direct transfer method, activate the AccuTerm session connected to the target host, and start FTPICK. When prompted:

(S)end, (R)eceive, (C)onfigure, (O)ptions, (H)elp or (E)xit ?

Answer

to receive files, then select the direct mode:

Receive (D)irectly from PICK file or from (I)ntermediate DOS file ?

by answering

. A panel titled "AccuTerm Pick-to-Pick File Transfer" will be displayed on the target screen. You can cancel the Host-to-Host transfer at any time by pressing the

ESC

key while the target session is active.

Next, activate the AccuTerm session connected to the source host, or sending machine, and start

FTPICK. When prompted:

(S)end, (R)eceive, (C)onfigure, (O)ptions, (H)elp or (E)xit ?

answer

to send files. Then enter the name of the source host file to be sent:

Enter PICK source file name:

Enter the name of the source host file which contains the items to be sent.

Enter source (Pick) item list:

Enter the item-IDs to be sent. If you do not enter item-IDs, any previously selected (SELECT, GET-

LIST, etc.) items will be transferred; if you enter an asterisk (

), all items in the file will be transferred.

To specify a saved list, enter an open parenthesis followed by the list name. Separate item-IDs with blanks.

Features for MultiValue Users 295

Send (D)irectly to PICK file or to (I)ntermediate DOS file ?

Answer

to send the file directly to the target machine.

Enter target PICK file name:

Enter the file name on the target machine into which the selected items will be written.

Once the target file name has been entered, the receiving session will be activated and the transfer progress will be displayed in the panel. When the transfer is complete, press the

ESC

key to terminate the receiving FTPICK program, or activate the sending session to send another file.

4.1.11.2 Host-to-Host file transfer

If you cannot open one session to each MultiValue host machine, or if you want to send the same file to several target machines, you can save the data in an intermediate PC file. The procedure is similar to the direct method, except that the send must be done first, and a PC file must be specified for both the send and receive steps.

Step 1: Transferring Host items to an intermediate DOS file

Open an AccuTerm session connected to the source machine, and start FTPICK. When prompted:

(S)end, (R)eceive, (C)onfigure, (O)ptions, (H)elp or (E)xit ?

answer

to send files. Then enter the name of the source file to be sent:

Enter PICK source file name:

Enter the name of the source file which contains the items to be sent.

Enter source (Pick) item list:

Enter the item-IDs to be sent. If you do not enter item-IDs, any previously selected (SELECT, GET-

LIST, etc.) items will be transferred; if you enter an asterisk (

), all items in the file will be transferred.

To specify a saved list, enter an open parenthesis followed by the list name. Separate item-IDs with blanks.

Send (D)irectly to PICK file or to (I)ntermediate DOS file ?

Answer

to send the file to an intermediate PC file.

Enter intermediate DOS file name:

Enter the full PC file name of the intermediate file including drive letter and directory, if desired. Separate directory names in a full path using back-slashes.

Upon entering the PC file name, the selected items will be transferred to the specified PC file in a special format used by the FTPICK utility.

Step 2: Transferring From an Intermediate File to the Target Host

Open an AccuTerm session connected to the target machine, and start FTPICK. When prompted:

296 AccuTerm 7 Help

(S)end, (R)eceive, (C)onfigure, (O)ptions, (H)elp or (E)xit ?

answer

to receive files. Then enter the name of the intermediate PC file which contains the desired data:

Receive (D)irectly from PICK file or from (I)ntermediate DOS file ?

Answer

to retrieve data from an intermediate file.

Enter intermediate DOS file name:

Enter the full PC file name of the intermediate file including drive letter and directory, if desired. Separate directory names in a full path using back-slashes.

Enter target PICK file name:

Enter the file name on the target machine into which the retrieved items will be written.

If the intermediate PC file is in the correct format, the items contained in the file will be transferred and stored into the target host file.

4.1.11.3 FTPICK Options and Settings

One configuration setting (permanent) and option setting (temporary) is available for the FTPICK utility.

To change configuration setting, enter

in response to the first prompt. A list of configuration settings will be displayed:

Current parameter settings are:

1. Overwrite existing item........ Yes

Enter parameter number (1-1) to modify:

The "overwrite existing file" setting may be changed by entering the parameter number (1).

When using the direct mode, both the sender and receiver must have "Overwrite existing file" set to

"Yes" in order for existing items to be overwritten. If either the sender or receiver has this settings set to

"No", existing items will not be overwritten.

To change option setting, enter

in response to the first prompt. A list of option settings will be displayed. Note that the default value of the options is stored in the configuration settings:

Current parameter settings are:

1. Overwrite existing item........ Yes

Enter parameter number (1-1) to modify:

For example, to set the first configuration parameter to "binary", respond to "Enter parameter..." with

1=Y

. This alternate method is useful in cases where the FTPICK utility is being "driven" by a PROC or by another program using the EXECUTE statement.

Features for MultiValue Users 297

4.1.12 Integrating File Transfer Functions into Pick Applications

There are two ways to integrate AccuTerm file transfer functions into your applications: either call one of the supplied file transfer subroutines, described below, or use one of the command-line file transfer programs, passing parameters via STON or DATA statements.

File Transfer Subroutines

There are 7 callable file transfer subroutines that are provided for integrating AccuTerm file transfer functions with your applications:

FTSEND

sends one or more items from the host to the PC.

FTRECV

retrieves one or more files from the the PC.

FTEXPORT

exports a specified or selected set of items from the host database to a PC file. Several file

formats are supported including delimited text, Excel worksheet and Access database table.

FTEXPORTDA

exports a dynamic array from the host to a PC file. Several file formats are supported

including delimited text, Excel worksheet and Access database table.

FTIMPORT

imports data from a PC file, worksheet or table, updating one or more items in the host database. The PC file being imported should be a database or table file, such as a spreadsheet, delimited text file, html table or other supported database.

DOSSVC

performs three functions (each is optional). First, a "file" is sent to the PC; next a Windows or

DOS command is executed (this may be a BATCH file); finally, a file is retrieved from the PC.

FTS

performs a simple "file" transfer to or from the PC. The "file" (a dynamic array) to be sent to (or

received from) is passed as an argument to the subroutine.

Command-line File Transfer Utilities

As an alternative to calling one of the subroutines, you can use the

and

FTD

command-line programs in PROCs or BASIC programs using the EXECUTE statement. Responses to all of the prompts may be

"stacked" and fed to the file transfer utility.

4.1.12.1 FTSEND

The FTSEND subroutine sends one or more items from the host to the PC. Each MultiValue item becomes a file on the PC. The calling syntax is:

CALL FTSEND(MODE,HOST.FILE,HOST.IDS,REMOTE.PATH,

REMOTE.FILES,ITEM.COUNT,BYTE.COUNT,STAT)

Input arguments:

MODE options separated by commas (first letter is sufficient):

KERMIT - use the Kermit file transfer protocol (recommended)

ASCII - use the ASCII file transfer protocol

OVERLAY - overwrites existing files

NO OVERLAY - skips existing files

298 AccuTerm 7 Help

HOST.FILE

HOST.IDS

REMOTE.PATH

REMOTE.FILES

TEXT - convert AM to CR/LF

BINARY - no AM conversion

UNLIMITED - no item size limit (overrides "large item" config setting)

LIMIT - 32K item size limit (overrides "large item" config setting)

JOIN - joins large item (overrides "large item" config setting)

Y - perform character set translation

Z - no character set translation source file name on host source item list: explicit item-ID list separated by AM

'*' (asterisk) to send all items in the file null to use an active external select list

(SAVEDLIST to use a saved list target directory on the PC target file names (used to rename files): explicit file name list separated by AM, corresponding to each item being sent null to use the source item-ID as the target file name

Output arguments:

ITEM.COUNT

BYTE.COUNT

STAT number of items sent number of bytes sent null indicates success, otherwise an error message

4.1.12.2 FTRECV

The FTRECV subroutine retrieves one or more files from the the PC. Each PC file becomes a MultiValue

item. The calling syntax is:

CALL FTRECV(MODE,HOST.FILE,HOST.IDS,REMOTE.PATH,

REMOTE.FILES,ITEM.COUNT,BYTE.COUNT,STAT)

Input arguments:

MODE options separated by commas (first letter is sufficient):

KERMIT - use the Kermit file transfer protocol (recommended)

ASCII - use the ASCII file transfer protocol

OVERLAY - overwrites existing files

NO OVERLAY - skips existing files

Features for MultiValue Users 299

REMOTE.PATH

REMOTE.FILES

HOST.FILE

HOST.IDS

TEXT - convert CR/LF to AM

BINARY - no CR/LF conversion

PRESERVE EXT - includes file extension in target item-ID

IGNORE EXT - removes file extension from target item-ID

UNLIMITED - no item size limit (overrides "large item" config setting)

LIMIT - 32K item size limit (overrides "large item" config setting)

JOIN - joins large item (overrides "large item" config setting)

Y - perform character set translation

Z - no character set translation source directory on the PC source file names, separated with AM; wildcard characters '*' and '?' are allowed.

target file name on the host target item list (used to rename files): explicit item-ID list separated by AM, corresponding to each file being received null to use the source file name as the target item-ID

Output arguments:

ITEM.COUNT

BYTE.COUNT

STAT number of items received number of bytes received null indicates success, otherwise an error message

4.1.12.3 FTEXPORT

The FTEXPORT subroutine exports a specified or selected set of items from the host MultiValue database to a PC file. You can specify which fields (attributes) to export. Several file formats, including

Excel worksheet and Access database table, are supported by FTEXPORT. The calling syntax is:

CALL FTEXPORT(MODE,HOST.FILE,HOST.IDS,REMOTE.FILE,

ATTRS,ITEM.COUNT,BYTE.COUNT,STAT)

Input arguments:

MODE options separated by commas (first letter is sufficient):

KERMIT - use the Kermit file transfer protocol (recommended)

ASCII - use the ASCII file transfer protocol

OVERLAY - overwrites existing files

NO OVERLAY - skips existing files

MERGE - appends data to existing file, worksheet or table. If file, worksheet or table does not exist, it is created.

300 AccuTerm 7 Help

HOST.FILE

HOST.IDS

REMOTE.FILE

ATTRS

DELIM=TAB - creates a tab-delimited text file

DELIM=COMMA - creates a comma-delimited text file (CSV)

DELIM=CRLF - merges multiple items into a single text file

DELIM=hex - creates a delimited text file with user-defined delimiter

HEADER - first line of target file contains attribute names as column headings

LABEL - first line of target file contains column headings from file dictionary

EXPLODE - repeats single-valued columns based on number of multi-values in the record

Y - perform character set translation

Z - no character set translation source file name on host source item list: explicit item-ID list separated by AM

'*' (asterisk) to send all items in the file null to use an active external select list

(SAVEDLIST to use a saved list target file name on the PC. See

FTD File Types for special file syntax

for updating ranges of existing worksheets or specifying Access database tables.

Multi-valued list of attributes to export. Use attribute numbers or dictionary names, or '*' (asterisk) for all attributes, or '+' (plus sign) for all attributes except the item-ID.target file names (used to rename files).

Output arguments:

ITEM.COUNT

BYTE.COUNT

STAT number of items exported number of bytes exported null indicates success, otherwise an error message

Note: it is possible to have partial success, such as when the user click s the Abort button while a transfer is in progress. Check the

ITEM.COUNT

BYTE.COUNT

variables to test for partial success.

4.1.12.4 FTEXPORTDA

The FTEXPORTDA subroutine exports a dynamic array from the host to a PC file. The data to be exported is passed as a subroutine argument as a dynamic array. Each attribute is exported as a row in the target file and each value is a column within the row. Several file formats, including Excel worksheet and Access database table, are supported by FTEXPORTDA. The calling syntax is:

CALL FTEXPORTDA(MODE,CONTENTS,ATTRS,REMOTE.FILE,

ITEM.COUNT,BYTE.COUNT,STAT)

Features for MultiValue Users 301

Input arguments:

MODE

CONTENTS

ATTRS

REMOTE.FILE

options separated by commas (first letter is sufficient):

KERMIT - use the Kermit file transfer protocol (recommended)

ASCII - use the ASCII file transfer protocol

OVERLAY - overwrites existing files

NO OVERLAY - skips existing files

MERGE - appends data to existing file, worksheet or table. If file, worksheet or table does not exist, it is created.

DELIM=TAB - creates a tab-delimited text file

DELIM=COMMA - creates a comma-delimited text file (CSV)

DELIM=CRLF - merges multiple items into a single text file

DELIM=hex - creates a delimited text file with user-defined delimiter

HEADER - first line of target file contains attribute names as column headings

Y - perform character set translation

Z - no character set translation dynamic array containing data to be exported multi-valued list of column headings, if HEADER option is specified.

target file name on the PC. See

FTD File Types for special file syntax

for updating ranges of existing worksheets or specifying Access database tables.

Output arguments:

ITEM.COUNT

BYTE.COUNT

STAT number of items exported number of bytes exported null indicates success, otherwise an error message

Note: it is possible to have partial success, such as when the user click s the Abort button while a transfer is in progress. Check the

ITEM.COUNT

BYTE.COUNT

variables to test for partial success.

4.1.12.5 FTIMPORT

The FTIMPORT subroutine imports data from a PC file, worksheet or table. The PC file being imported should be a database or table file, such as a spreadsheet, delimited text file, html table or other database table supported by AccuTerm. The calling syntax is:

CALL FTIMPORT(MODE,REMOTE.FILE,HOST.FILE,ATTRS,HDR.SKIP,

ID.PREFIX,ID.START,ITEM.COUNT,BYTE.COUNT,STAT)

Input arguments:

MODE options separated by commas (first letter is sufficient):

KERMIT - use the Kermit file transfer protocol (recommended)

302 AccuTerm 7 Help

REMOTE.FILE

HOST.FILE

ATTRS

ID.PREFIX

ID.START

ASCII - use the ASCII file transfer protocol

OVERLAY - overwrites existing files

NO OVERLAY - skips existing files

MERGE - merges data with existing items. Attributes not specified in the ATTRS argument are not updated

DELIM=TAB - imports from a tab-delimited text file

DELIM=COMMA - imports from a comma-delimited text file

(CSV)

DELIM=hex - imports from a delimited text file with userdefined delimiter

HEADER - first line of target file contains column headings which are used as dictionary names. ATTRS argument is ignored if this option is specified. If first line of source contains a single asterisk, the imported item is created from all the columns in the source and no data conversions (date, mask, etc) are performed.attribute names as column headings

GENERATE - generates sequential item-IDs for imported items. The item-ID is formed by concatenating the specified

ID.PREFIX to a sequential number starting with ID.START

Y - perform character set translation

Z - no character set translation source file on the PC. See

FTD File Types for special file syntax for

importing ranges of worksheets or specifying Access database tables target file name on the host

Multi-valued list of attributes to import. Use attribute numbers or dictionary names, or '*' (asterisk) for all attributes. Use '-' (minus sign) to skip a column in the source file. Use '0' (zero) for the column that contains the item-ID. If no columns contain item-ID, use the

GENERATE option in the MODE argument to automatically generate sequential item-IDs for imported data. This argument is ignored if the

HEADER mode option is present.

Prefix for automatically generated sequential item-IDs. This argument is ignored unless the GENERATE mode option is present.

Starting number for automatically generated sequential item-IDs. This argument is ignored unless the GENERATE mode option is present.

Output arguments:

ITEM.COUNT

BYTE.COUNT

STAT number of items imported number of bytes imported null indicates success, otherwise an error message

Note: it is possible to have partial success, such as when the user click s the Abort button while a transfer is in progress. Check the

ITEM.COUNT

BYTE.COUNT

variables to test for partial success.

Features for MultiValue Users 303

4.1.12.6 DOSSVC

The DOSSVC subroutine performs three functions (each is optional). First, a "file" is sent from the host to the PC; next a Windows or DOS command is executed (this may be a BATCH file); finally, a file is retrieved from the PC. The data to be sent, PC file name, and Windows / DOS command are passed as arguments to the subroutine, and the received file is passed back to the calling program. The calling syntax is:

CALL DOSSVC(CMD,SEND.PATH,SEND.FILE,SEND.DATA,

GET.PATH,GET.FILE,GET.DATA)

Input arguments:

CMD

SEND.PATH

SEND.FILE

SEND.DATA

GET.PATH

GET.FILE

DOS or Windows command to execute after sending the data to the

PC. This argument may be null if no command should be executed.

Target directory on the PC where SEND.DATA is saved before executing CMD.

Target file name on the PC. If this argument is null, no data is sent to the PC.

Contents are stored in the target file on the PC before executing

CMD.

Source directory on the PC where GET.DATA is retrieved from.

Source file name on the PC where GET.DATA is retrieved from. If this argument is null, no data is retrieved from the PC after executing

CMD.

Output arguments:

GET.DATA

Contents of GET.FILE retrieved from the PC after executing CMD.

Note: the

SEND.DATA

and

GET.DATA

arguments must be different variables!

4.1.12.7 FTS

The FTS subroutine performs a simple "file" transfer to or from the PC. The "file" (a dynamic array) to be sent to (or received from) is passed as an argument to the subroutine. The calling syntax is:

CALL FTS(MODE,PATH,FILE,ITEM,STAT)

Input arguments:

MODE options separated by commas (first letter is sufficient):

SEND - send file to PC

RECEIVE - retrieve file from PC

KERMIT - use the Kermit file transfer protocol (recommended)

ASCII - use the ASCII file transfer protocol

OVERLAY - overwrites existing files

NO OVERLAY - skips existing files

304 AccuTerm 7 Help

PATH

FILE

ITEM

Output arguments:

ITEM

STAT

TEXT - convert AM to CR/LF

BINARY - no AM conversion

PRESERVE EXT - includes file extension in target item-ID

IGNORE EXT - removes file extension from target item-ID

XLATE - perform character set translation directory on the PC where the item is sent to or retrieved from file name on the PC, including file extension, where the item is sent to or retrieved from.

body of item to send to PC body of item retrieved from PC null indicates success, otherwise an error message

Features for MultiValue Users 305

4.2 MultiValue Server

When AccuTerm is connected to a MultiValue host, and the host is running a special server program,

FTSERVER

, installed with the

AccuTerm host programs , other Windows applications (client applications)

can request and update data from the host database using the ActiveX

Server

object.

The

Server

object, in conjunction with the

FTSERVER

host program, provides a simple method for performing common host database operations, including reading and writing files, executing commands, calling BASIC subroutines and converting data. The

Server

object can be used in any ActiveX enabled client application, such as Microsoft Word, Excel, and Visual Basic.

When an AccuTerm session is in server mode, it is dedicated to providing MultiValue database services to client programs, and cannot be used as a normal terminal. A “Server Mode” status message is displayed while the session is in server mode. When server mode is terminated, normal terminal functions are resumed. To start server mode, enter “

FTSERVER

” at the TCL command line. To terminate server mode, click the Cancel button below the server status message.

See also:

Configuring the MultiValue Server

Using the MultiValue Server

The Server object

4.2.1 Configuring FTSERVER

After installing the

host programs , use the FTSETUP utility to configure the server. Use FTSETUP to

give your host a meaningful server name - the server name is shown in the file browser when opening files from the wED editor or GUI designer. You can also enable or disable individual services (read, write, convert, execute) using FTSETUP.

4.2.2 Using the MultiValue Server

When AccuTerm is connected to a MultiValue host, and the host is running a special server program,

FTSERVER (installed when you install the AccuTerm host programs), other Windows applications

(client applications) can request and update data from the host database using AccuTerm's

MultiValue

Server object.

To access the MultiValue host, open an AccuTerm session to the desired host, and type

FTSERVER

at the TCL command prompt. AccuTerm should respond by displaying a “Server Mode” status panel identifying the host server name (you can configure the host server name by running the FTSETUP program from the ACCUTERM account and selecting menu option 6).

Next, start the client application (Word, Excel, VB, etc.) and open its VBA editor or equivalent tool

(Tools Macro Visual Basic Editor or Developer Visual Basic for Office 2007). Add a reference to

“AccuTerm 7 MultiValue Server” (Tools References). Note: it is not strictly necessary to add the

reference, but doing so allows for automatic parameter type check ing and provides a slight performance increase. If you do not add the reference, declare your server object variable as type

Object

rather than as

atMVSvr7.Server

. Next, add a module (Insert Module). In your Sub or Function, declare a variable for the server object:

Dim MVServerObject As atMVSvr7.Server

306 AccuTerm 7 Help

Next, use the

CreateObject()

function to create an instance of the server object:

Set MVServerObject = CreateObject("atMVSvr7.Server")

Use the

Connect method of the server object to establish a connection to the host:

If MVServerObject.Connect() Then …

The

Connect

method returns True if the connection is successful.

Use the

Import methods to access the host database.

When you are finished using the server, you can

Disconnect

and destroy the server object:

MVServerObject.Disconnect

Set MVServerObject = Nothing

If you are going to use the server object multiple times (perhaps from several Subs or Functions), you can make the server object variable global (declare it before all Subs or Functions in the module). Then you could write a common function to create the server object and connect to the host:

Dim MVServerObject As atMVSvr7.Server

Private Function ConnectServer() As Boolean

On Error Resume Next

If Not MVServerObject Is Nothing Then

ConnectServer = True

Else

Set PickServerObject = CreateObject(“atPickServer.

Server”)

If Not PickServerObject Is Nothing Then

If PickServerObject.Connect() Then

ConnectServer = True

Exit Function

Else

Set PickServerObject = Nothing

End If

ConnectServer = False

End If

End Function

All other Subs or Functions which require MultiValue host database access would first call the

ConnectServer()

function to make sure that services are available:

Public Function MVRead(File As String, ID As String) As String

If ConnectServer() Then

MVRead = MVServerObject.ReadItem(File, ID)

End If

End Function

After calling any of the server methods, check the result of the operation by examining the

LastError

Features for MultiValue Users 307

property. To get a description of the error, use the

LastErrorMessage

property.

If MVServerObject.LastError Then

MsgBox “Server Error: “ & MVServerObject.LastErrorMessage

End If

Some standard errors returned by the FTSERVER program are shown below; other codes may be returned from called MV/BASIC subroutines.

-1

201

202

223

235

260

261

End of file

Unable to open file

Unable to read item

Item already exists

Unable to update locked item

Unable to read locked item

Unable to write item

For further information on using the MultiValue server, a sample Excel worksheet and Visual Basic application are included in the Samples sub-directory.

See also:

Server object

4.2.3 Activating Other Accounts to use the Host Programs

1. Open a terminal session and connect to your MultiValue host system. Log on to the

ACCUTERM

account (or other account where you have the host programs installed). Make sure you are at a command prompt (TCL, ECL, etc.)

3. The character-based FTSETUP program will start. From the FTSETUP menu, select option 1

(enter

, then press

ENTER

4. When prompted for the account name to activate, type the name and press

ENTER

5. Repeat for any other accounts that you want to activate.

6. To terminate the FTSETUP program, enter

at the FTSETUP menu, then press

ENTER

308 AccuTerm 7 Help

4.3 Object Bridge

Object Bridge is a Windows Object extension (ActiveX Automation) for MV/BASIC programs. This allows a MV/BASIC program to manipulate nearly any (OLE) Automation compatible object on the Windows machine. Examples of Automation objects include Word documents, Excel spreadsheets, and any public objects implemented using Visual Basic.

Object Bridge consists of three components: an MV/BASIC interface implemented as a set of callable subroutines, a “remote procedure call” (RPC) conduit (AccuTerm session) and a Windows object manager (installed with AccuTerm 7). The Object Bridge programs are installed (optionally) along with the

AccuTerm host programs . If you did not install the Object Bridge programs at the time you installed

the host file transfer programs, you can install them by typing LOAD-ACCUTERM-PROGS at TCL in the

ACCUTERM account.

Object Bridge allows a MV/BASIC program to create and destroy instances of Windows objects, set and retrieve property values from an object, invoke methods (subroutine calls and functions) on an object and process events produced by an object. The MV/BASIC subroutines which provide this functionality are described in the following topics.

To use Object Bridge effectively, you may need some reference material in order to understand the object model of the application you are trying to control (Word, Excel, VB, etc). Also, the Object

Browser tool available in Word or Excel (Macro -> Visual Basic Editor) or in the Visual Basic IDE is very useful.

The basic idea is this:

1) Initialize the Object Bridge environment

2) Create an object

3) Set property values, get property values or call subroutines or functions (invoke methods) on the object

4) Respond to desired events produced by the object

5) Release the object

Initializing the Object Bridge Environment

Resetting the Object Bridge Environment

Creating an Object

Releasing an Object

Setting Object Properties

Getting Object Properties

Invoking Methods (calling subroutines and functions on an object)

Enabling Event Processing

Polling for Events

Completing Event Processing

4.3.1 Initializing the Object Bridge Environment

CALL ATINITOBJMGR(ERRMSG, OPTS)

Call this subroutine before using any other Object Bridge routine. This verifies that a compatible version of AccuTerm 7 is connected, and initializes some important state information in the OPTS variable. You must maintain and pass the OPTS variable to all other Object Bridge routines.

Features for MultiValue Users 309

If any of the Object Bridge routines encounter an error, the ERRMSG arugment will be set to indicate the error, otherwise it will be null. Sometimes you can ignore an error, such as when attempting to set a property to an invalid value; other times you should call

ATRESETOBJMGR

to release all your objects and terminate the program.

4.3.2 Resetting the Object Bridge Environment

CALL ATRESETOBJMGR

This routine may be called if you want to release all objects and clean up the Windows object manager.

This is useful if an error occurs and you want to abort all further use of any objects. You do not need to call

ATRELEASEOBJECT

if you call

ATRESETOBJMGR

4.3.3 Creating an Object

CALL ATCREATEOBJECT(CLSID, OBJID, ERRMSG, OPTS)

This routine will attempt to create an object of the desired class (CLSID). Use the returned OBJID to refer to this object. When you no longer require access to the object, call

ATRELEASEOBJECT

passing the same OBJID, otherwise the object remains present in Windows memory.

CALL ATGETOBJECT(OBJNAME, CLSID, OBJID, ERRMSG, OPTS)

This routine will attempt to get a reference to an existing object. To get a reference to a document object, specify the OBJNAME argument (usually a file name). To get a reference to an arbitrary, specify the desired class (CLSID). Use the returned OBJID to refer to this object. When you no longer require access to the object, call

ATRELEASEOBJECT

passing the same OBJID, otherwise the object remains present in Windows memory.

4.3.4 Releasing an Object

CALL ATRELEASEOBJECT(OBJID, ERRMSG, OPTS)

This routine releases the specified object, as well as any objects "derived" from the specified object

(OBJID). A dereived object may be an object returned by a call to

ATGETPROPERTY

ATINVOKEMETHOD when the return value is itself another object.

4.3.5 Setting Object Properties

CALL ATSETPROPERTY(OBJID, PROPNAMES, PROPVALUES, ERRMSG, OPTS)

Use this routine to set the values of one or more properties of an object. Specify the property names you desire in the PROPNAMES argument, separated by attribute marks. The corresponding property values to set are passed in the PROPVALUES argument, also separated by attribute marks. If an error occurs, the error message will be in the corresponding attribute of the ERRMSG argument.

4.3.6 Getting Object Properties

CALL ATGETPROPERTY(OBJID, PROPNAMES, PROPVALUES, ERRMSG, OPTS)

Use this routine to get the values of one or more properties of an object. Specify the property names you desire in the PROPNAMES argument, separated by attribute marks. The corresponding property values are returned in the PROPVALUES argument, also separated by attribute marks. If an error occurs, the

310 AccuTerm 7 Help

error message will be in the corresponding attribute of the ERRMSG argument.

Some properties are actually objects themselves. This is a "derived" object. In this case, you can use the returned property value as an object ID in other Object Bridge calls. When the object which returned the "derived" object is released, all of its derived objects will also be released. Releasing the derived object will not release its creator.

4.3.7 Invoking Methods

CALL ATINVOKEMETHOD(OBJID, METHNAMES, METHARGS, RESULT,

ERRMSG, OPTS)

Call this routine to invoke a "method" on the object. A method is a subroutine or function. A subroutine will not return a value (RESULT will be null). A function will return a result in the RESULT argument.

Multiple methods may be called. Separate method names in the METHNAMES argument by attribute marks. If a method requires arguments, the arguments are passed in the METHARGS parameter, with arguments for each method separated by attribute marks. Within the method arguments for one method, multiple arguments are separated by value marks. Results from multiple methods are returned in the

RESULTS argument separated by attribute marks.

Some methods return objects. In this case, you can use the returned value as an object ID in other

Object Bridge calls. When the object which returned the "derived" object is released, all of its derived objects will also be released. Releasing the derived object will not release its creator.

4.3.8 Enabling Event Processing

CALL ATSETEVENT(OBJID, EVENTNAMES, ENABLE, ERRMSG, OPTS)

Many objects support events, which notify the object’s owner of certain actions, such as closing the program or clicking a button. Object Bridge only notifies the Pick application of those events which have been enabled by calling

ATSETEVENT

. Specify the event names in the EVENTNAMES arguments, separated by attribute marks. Specify whether the event is enabled (1) or disabled (0) in the corresponding ENABLE argument, also separated by attribute marks.

4.3.9 Polling for Events

CALL ATGETEVENT(OBJID, EVENTNAME, ARGS, TIMEOUT, ERRMSG, OPTS)

Call this routine to wait for an event from any objects for which you have enabled events. You do not pass OBJID to this routine, it is passed back to your program when an event occurs so you can identify the source of the event. EVENTNAME and ARGS are also passed back to your routine. Some events allow you to modify one or more of their arguments, for example, to cancel an operation. You must preserve OBJID, EVENTNAME and ARGS (except for modified values in ARGS) when processing the event so they can be passed to

ATENDEVENT

when you complete processing the event. Event argument values are separated by value marks. You must always call

ATENDEVENT

after processing the event. You can call other routines in between, but no more events can be processed, and the Windows object may be roadblocked until you call

ATENDEVENT

If you want

ATGETEVENT

to return to your program even if an event did not occur, you can specify the number of milliseconds to wait for the event in the TIMEOUT parameter. Set TIMEOUT to zero to wait forever for the event.

Features for MultiValue Users 311

4.3.10 Completing Event Processing

CALL ATENDEVENT(OBJID, EVENTNAME, ARGS, ERRMSG, OPTS)

Call this routine after handling an event. Pass back the OBJID, EVENTNAME and ARGS as they were returned by the

ATGETEVENT

routine, except for any argument values you have modified.

You must call this routine after processing an event returned by

ATGETEVENT

, otherwise no other events may be processed and the Windows application which implements the object may not be able to terminate.

5

312 AccuTerm 7 Help

Copyright & Trademarks

Copyright Notices

Sax Software / Polar Engineering & Consulting, http://www.kenai.com/ vb4tools .

Freeimage:

The accompanying software uses the Freeimage open source image library. See http://freeimage.sourceforge.net

for details. Freeimage is used under the Freeimage Public License version 1.0.

DejaVu Fonts:

Fonts are (c) Bitstream (see below). DejaVu changes are in public domain. Glyphs imported from Arev fonts are (c) Tavmjong Bah.

Bitstream Vera Fonts:

Vera is a trademark of Bitstream, Inc.

Trademark Notices

AccuTerm is a registered trademark of Zumasys, Inc.

Bitstream Vera is a trademark of Bitstream, Inc.

DEC, VT52, VT100, VT220, VT320 and VT420 are trademarks of Digital

Equipment Corp.

IBM is a registered trademark of International Business Machines

Corp.

Microsoft and Microsoft Windows are registered trademarks of

Microsoft Corp.

Pick, D3 and UniData are trademarks of Rocket Software, Inc.

Print Wizard is copyright Rasmussen Software, Inc.

Procomm is a trademark of Datastorm Technologies, Inc.

Tektronix 4010/4014/4100 is a trademark of Tektronix, Inc.

Viewpoint is a trademark of Applied Digital Data Systems.

Wyse-50 and Wyse-60 are trademarks of Wyse Technology.

Other trademarks and registered trademarks appearing in this

Copyright & Trademarks 313

document are the property of their respective owners.

314 AccuTerm 7 Help

Index

- . -

.mdb 292

.xls 292

.xlsx 292

- A -

About AccuTerm 32

Access 292

AccountName property 108

ACCUTERM account 283, 285

AccuTerm constants 204

AccuTerm Menu Designer 27

AccuTerm Object 91

AccuTerm Object Reference 90

AccuTerm Programming 211

AccuTerm User Interface 25

Action property 105

Activate method 99, 157

Activating accounts 285, 307

Activating an evaluation version 24

ActiveSession property 92

ActiveX 90

Adapter script 56

Add method 169

AddClone method 170

AddItem 110

ADDS 44

ADDS 4000 240

ADDS Viewpoint 240

ADDS Viewpoint Enhanced 221

Advanced Pick 283

AIX 283

Altos 283

ANSI 44, 53, 55, 58, 69, 70, 73, 182

AnsiAppCursor property 119, 175

AnsiAppKeypad property 119, 175

AnsiAutoprint property 176

Answerback 44

Answerback property 119, 176

AppActivate statement 84

AppClose statement 84

AppFind function 84

AppGetActive function 84

AppGetPosition statement 84

AppGetState function 85

AppHide statement 85

Application menu 63

Application mode 44

Application object 90

AppList statement 85

Apply method 173

AppMaximize statement 85

AppMinimize statement 85

AppMove statement 85

AppRestore statement 86

AppSetState statement 86

AppShow statement 86

AppSize statement 86

Arrange method 99

ASCII 58

ASCII Codes 275

AsciiDelay property 119, 176

AsciiEOL property 120, 176

ATCREATEOBJECT 309

ATENDEVENT 311

ATGETPROPERTY 309

ATINITOBJMGR 308

ATINVOKEMETHOD 310

ATRELEASEOBJECT 309

ATRESETOBJMGR 309

ATSETEVENT 310

ATSETPROPERTY 309

AttributeMask property 119, 175, 176

Attributes 48, 50 atwin.ini 277 atwin71.ini 277

Authentication 37

Auto Dialer 67

AutoAnswer property 120, 177

AutoClose property 92, 120

Auxiliary port 55, 73

- B -

background image 211

Background picture 51, 120, 121, 177, 178

BackgroundPictureFile property 120, 121, 177, 178

BackgroundPictureMode property 120, 121, 177,

178

Index

315

BackgroundTransparency property 120, 121, 177,

178

Backspace 44

Band Properties 63

Bands 62

BandType property 104

Baud property 121, 178

Baud Rate 42, 43

Beep 54

BkspSendsDel property 121, 178

Blinking 50

BoldFont property 122, 178

Border colors 51

Border style 48, 50

Break Key 36, 37

Break method 158

BreakKeyAction property 122, 179

BytesIn property 122

BytesOut property 122

- C -

Caché 283

CallSub method 110

CapsLock 52

CapsLock property 123

Caption property 104, 106, 123

Capture method 158

CaptureEnd method 158

CaptureFileName property 123

CaptureMode property 123

CaptureSource property 123 case inversion 283

Certificate 41

Certified 76

Chain statement 86

Changed property 124 character encoding 53 character set 53, 55, 69, 70, 73, 182

CharacterMapping property 179

Charset property 124, 180

Checked property 106

Cipher 37, 151, 152, 201

Citrix 18

Classic Windows 48

Clear method 158

ClearSelection method 158

Client certificate 41

Clipboard Settings 57

Close method 99, 159

Col property 124

Color 48, 50

Color property 125

Color Scheme 48

Color Settings 48, 50

Colors() property 125, 180

Cols property 126

COM 90

Com port 22

Comm Port 42

Command() function 87

Commands

Private 211

Common collection 93

Common property 92

Configuring AccuTerm 33

Configuring FTSERVER 305

Connect method 110

Connected property 126

Connection settings 35

Connection Wizard 21

Baud rate 22

Data bits 22

Handshake 22

Modem 23

Parity 22

Secure Shell 21

Serial Port 22

SSH 21

Stop bits 22

Telnet 21

Terminal Type 23

ConnectTimeout property 126, 181

Console 44, 271

Context Menu 62

Control Characters 275

Control Codes 275

Controlling AccuTerm with Scripts 82

Copy method 159

CopyHistory method 159

CopyPasteShortcut property 127

CopySelMode property 127, 181

Count property 103, 104

Creating an Object 309

Creating SSH keys 39

316 AccuTerm 7 Help

CursorType property 127, 181

Custom installation 277

Customize Menu 62

Customizing the Menu 27

CustomMouseTable property 93, 94, 100, 101, 127

- D -

D3 71, 282, 305

Data Bits 42, 43

Data Capture 26 ending 73 starting 73

DataBits property 128, 181

DataReady event 169

Debugging a Script 81

Default Colors 48

DefaultCaptureDir property 128, 182

DefaultTextEncoding property 182

DefaultXferDir property 128, 182

DefaultXferMode property 128, 182

DefaultXferOverwrite property 128, 182

DejaVu font 53

Delete method 159

DeleteItem method 110

Deselect method 159

Device driver 55

Device Licensing 35

Device property 129, 183

Device settings 35

DeviceLicenseMode property 129, 183

Dial method 160

Dialog method 173

DialStatus property 129

Dial-up 23

Direct Host-to-Host file transfer 294

DisableAppMode property 130, 183

Disconnect 35

Disconnect method 111

Disconnect Warning 23

DockingArea property 104

DOSSVC 71, 282, 303

DOSSVC Subroutine 297

Download 69

Download method 111, 160

DSA key 39

Dtr/Dsr 42, 43

Duplex 35

Duplex property 130, 183

- E -

Echo 35

Edit Menu 27

Emulate method 160

Emulation 44

Enabled property 106 encoding 53, 55, 69, 70, 73, 182

Encryption 37, 76

ErrorMode property 108

Euro character 53

Evaluation Version 24

Excel 292

Execute DOS command 211

Execute method 111

Export 289

Export method 111

ExtCols property 130, 184

Extension event 169

ExtMode method 130

ExtRows property 130, 184

- F -

Features of AccuTerm 7 16

File Download 69

File Menu 27

File Transfer 69

Direct Host-to-Host file transfer 294

DOS file to Pick item 290

DOS file to Pick items 287

DOSSVC Subroutine 297

FT options 288

FT utility 71, 282

FTD options 291

FTD utility 292

FTEXPORT Subroutine 297

FTEXPORTDA Subroutine 297

FTIMPORT Subroutine 297

FTPICK options 296

FTPICK utility 294

FTRECV Subroutine 297

FTS Subroutine 297

FTSEND Subroutine 297

Host file to PC file 289

File Transfer 69

Host items to PC file 286

Indirect Pick-to-Pick transfer 295

Integration with applications 297

PC file to Host file 290

PC file to Host items 287

Pick file to DOS file 289

Pick items to DOS files 286

Pick Server 305

File transfer protocol

ASCII 69, 71, 282

Kermit 69, 71, 282

Xmodem 69

Ymodem 69

Zmodem 69

File transfer protocol options 58

File Transfer Settings 58

File transfer wizard 71, 282

File Upload 70

FileExists function 87, 88, 112

FileName property 131

Fingerprint 39

FIPS-140 39, 76

FKeys() property 131, 184

Flow control 42, 43

Folder Settings 34

Font 53

Font Settings 53

FontName property 132, 185

FontSize property 132, 185

FT 71, 282

FT Options and Settings 288

FTD 71, 282

FTD file types 292

FTD Options and Settings 291

FTEXPORT 71, 282, 299

FTEXPORT Subroutine 297

FTEXPORTDA 300

FTIMPORT 71, 282, 301

FTIMPORT Subroutine 297

FTPICK 71, 282

FTPICK Options and Settings 296

FTRECV 71, 282, 298

FTRECV Subroutine 297

FTS 71, 282, 303

FTS Subroutine 297

FTSEND 71, 282, 297

FTSEND Subroutine 297

Index

317

FTSERVER 59, 305

FTSETUP 305

FTWIZ 71, 282

Fujitsu 283

Full Duplex 35

FuncBarPos property 93, 94

FuncBarStyle property 93, 94

FuncBarVisible property 93, 94

Function key programming 52

- G -

General Settings 33

GetBlock method 160

GetSelection method 161

GetText method 161

Getting Object Properties 309

GmodeEnable property 132, 185

Green Screen 48

- H -

Half Duplex 35

Handshake 42, 43

Handshake property 132, 185

Hangup method 161

Hardware and Software Requirements 17

Hardware Requirements 17

Height property 94, 133

Hide method 100, 161

History 26

History buffer 47

HistoryRows property 133, 185 host character set 53 host mouse reporting 58, 208

Host programs 69, 71, 282, 283, 285, 295, 305,

307, 308

HostName property 134, 186

HostPort property 134, 187

HostTermType property 134, 187

Host-to-Host file transfer 295 hWnd property 134

- I -

Icon property 135

IConv method 112

318 AccuTerm 7 Help

ID property 135

IDN 36, 37, 153, 202

Image Selection 66

Import 290

Import method 112

Importing SSH keys 39

Initialize method 174

Initializing the Object Bridge Environment 308

Initiate connection 140

Input method 161

InputMode property 135

Installing the MultiValue File Transfer Programs 283

Installing the Pick File Transfer Programs 283

Integrating File Transfer Functions into Pick

Applications 297

Integrating Pick and DOS 71, 282

Internationalized Domain Names 36, 37, 153, 202

Internet Explorer 37

Introduction 14

Invoking Methods 310

IsConnected method 112

ISO 8859-1 53

Item function 87

Item property 103

ItemCount function 87

ItemExists function 113

Keyboard Settings 52

- L -

Language Extensions 83

LargeIcons property 94

LastError property 108

LastErrorMessage property 108

Latin-1 53

LayoutFilename property 94, 100, 101

Left property 94, 137

Legacy Colors 48

Legacy font 53

LegibleFont property 137, 189

License 24

LICENSEACCEPTED 277

Line Drawing 48, 50

Line function 87

LineCount function 87

Linux 44

Load method 174

LoadImage method 162

Locate method 162, 166

LockBaudRate property 138, 189

LockFKeys property 138, 189

LockKeyboard property 138

Loopback 35

- J -

jBase 71, 282, 283, 305

- K -

Keepalive 36, 37, 154, 203

KeepaliveInterval property 135, 187

Kermit 58, 71, 282

KermitCRC property 136, 187

KermitEOL property 136, 188

KermitErrRetry property 136, 188

KermitInitRetry property 136, 188

KermitQuote property 136, 188

KermitRept property 137, 188

KermitTimeout property 137, 189

Key Fingerprint 39

Key Management 39

Key Types 52

Keyboard Commands 26

- M -

Macro Recorder 78

Main Menu 25, 62, 63

MapUpperFKeys property 138, 190

Master menu 62, 63

Master menu override 63

MDI 16, 20, 25

MDName property 109

Mentor 283

Menu 25, 27

Menu Bar 62, 63

Menu Designer 27, 62

Menu file name 63

Menu icon 66

Menu Object 102, 107

Menu property 95, 138

Menu Scope 62

Menu Structure 62

Menu Tool 64 menu.ini 277 messagerows property 139, 190

Microsoft Crypto API 76

MM-MON 271

MnuBand Object 103

MnuBands property 103

MnuTool Object 105

MnuTools property 104

Modem 23, 43

Modem settings 43

Modern Windows 48

Monochrome 48

Mouse 47, 93, 94, 100, 101 host control of 211 mouse pattern file 58, 208 mouse pattern matching 58, 208

Mouse Settings 58

Mouse Wheel 47

MouseEnable property 139, 190

MouseTableAdd method 162

MouseTableLoad method 162

MouseTableReset method 163

Move method 100, 163

Multiple Document Interface 16, 20, 25

MultiValue 59, 71, 282, 283, 285, 305

MultiValue Database 305

MultiValue File Transfer Programs 283, 285

MultiValue Host Programs 285, 307

MultiValue Server 305 mvBase 283 mvEnterprise 283

- N -

Name property 105

New connection 21

NoAutoWrap property 139, 190

NoCloseWarning property 95

Normal installation 18

NormCols property 139, 190

NormMode method 140

NormRows property 139, 190

Northgate 283

Index

319

- O -

Object hierarchy 90

Object Reference 90

AccuTerm object 91

Creating new session 81

Events 80

Menu object 102, 107

Methods 80

MnuBand object 103

MnuTool object 105

Predefined session objects 81

Predefined sessions objects 81

Properties 80

Session object 81, 114

Sessions collection 169

Settings object 170

ObjectBridge 308

OConv method 113

OLE 90, 308

OnLine property 140

OpenFileName function 88

OpenInsight 283

OpenLayout method 100, 101

OpenSSH 39

Orientation 144, 148, 194, 198

Output method 163

OverrideModemConfig property 140, 191

- P -

Page property 140

Pages property 140, 191

Palette 51

Palette() property 141, 191 paper size 145, 149, 195, 198

Paper source 146, 149, 196, 199

Parity 42, 43

Parity property 141, 192

Password 37

Paste method 163

PasteEOFChar property 142, 192

PasteEOFMode property 142, 192

PasteEOLChar property 142, 193

PasteEOLMode property 142, 193

Pause 26

320 AccuTerm 7 Help

Pause statement 88

PCL 56

PC-MON 271

Personal menu 62, 63

Phone book 34

Phone directory 67

PhoneBookName property 95

Pick 71, 282, 305

Pick Database 305

Pick File Transfer and Server Programs 71, 282

Pick File Transfer Programs 283, 285 installation 71, 282

Pick PC Console 271

Pick PC Monitor 44

Pick Server 305

Pick-to-Pick file transfer 295

PlayMidi method 163

PlayWave method 164

Popup Menu 62, 63

Port property 143, 193

Portable installation 18

Power 95 283

Pre-configured installation package 277

Print adapter 56

Print adapter script 55

Print adapters 148, 150, 197, 199

Print Screen 26

Print Wizard 55, 148, 150, 197, 199

Printer driver 55

Printer paper size 145, 149, 195, 198

Printer Settings 55

PrinterClose method 164

PrinterColorMode property 143, 193

PrinterFontBold property 143, 194

PrinterFontItalic property 143, 194

PrinterFontName property 143, 194

PrinterFontSize property 144, 194

PrinterMode property 144

PrinterName property 144, 150, 199

PrinterOff method 164

PrinterOn method 164

PrinterOrientation property 144, 194

PrinterPaperSize property 145, 195

PrinterPaperSource property 146, 196

PrinterTimeout property 146, 196

PrintJobEject property 146, 196

PrintScreen method 164

PrintScreenBackground property 146, 196

PrintScreenEject property 147, 197

PrintWizard 56

Prism 44

Private Commands 211

Private Key 37

Procomm 240

Product activation 24

ProductLicenseType property 95

ProductName property 96

ProductRelease property 96

ProductSerialNumber property 96

Programming AccuTerm 211

ProtectAttr property 147, 197

Protected Attribute 47

PTERM 283

Public Key 37

Punycode 36, 37, 153, 202 putty 39 puttygen 39, 76

- Q -

QM 71, 282, 283, 305

Quiet installation 277

- R -

R83 283

R91 283

Random function 88

ReadItem method 113

Readnext method 113

ReadProperties method 174

ReadText method 164

Reality 283

Recent file list 34

RecentListSize property 96

RegisteredCompany property 96

RegisteredLocation property 97

RegisteredUser property 97

Registration 24

Releasing an Object 309

Reset Menu 27

Reset method 165

ResetComm method 165

ResetTerm method 165

Resize method 100, 165

Resume 26

Revelation 283

Row property 124

Rows property 126

RSA key 39, 76

Rts/Cts 42, 43

Running a Script 80

Running AccuTerm 7 20

- S -

Save method 165, 174

SaveAs method 166

SaveFileName function 88

SaveLayout method 101

ScaleFont property 147, 197

Scaling 51

SCO 44

Screen print 55

Screen Settings 47

Screen Size 47

ScreenPrintAdapterScript property 148, 197

ScreenPrintMode property 148, 198

ScreenPrintOrientation property 148, 198

ScreenPrintPaperSize property 149, 198

ScreenPrintPaperSource property 149, 199

Script 83

Chain statement 80 closing 79 controlling AccuTerm 80 creating 79 debugging 81 editing 79 loading 79

Pause statement 80 printing 79 running 80 running from command line 80 running from function key 80 running from host computer 80 running from menu or toolbar 80 saved in layout file 80 saving 79

Script Language Extensions 83

Scripting 79, 90

Scripting language 16

ScrMode property 149, 199

Scrollback 26, 47

Index

321

Scrollbar 47

ScrollHistory method 166

ScrollMode property 149, 199

Secure Shell 21, 37, 76

Select method 166

Selection 27

Selection property 150

Sending a DOS File to a Pick File 290

Sending a Pick File to a DOS File 289

Sending DOS Files to Pick Items 287

Sending MultiValue Items to DOS Files 286

Sequoia 283

Serial Port 22, 42

Serial port settings 42

Server 305

Server validation 41

ServerID property 109

ServerName property 109

Session 62

Session Bar 25, 62, 63

Session icon 47, 60

Session Object 114

Session title 47, 60

Session Window 25

SessionBarVisible property 97

Sessions Collection 169

Sessions property 97

Sessions.Add method 169

Sessions.AddClone method 170

Sessions.Count method 170

SetBlock method 166

SetExtension method 166

SetSelection method 167

SetText method 167

Setting Object Properties 309

Settings

Attribute Colors 50

Background 51

Colors 48, 50

File Transfer 58

Font 53

General 33

Keyboard 52

Mouse 58

Palette 51

Printer 55

Public Key 39

Secure Shell 39

322 AccuTerm 7 Help

Settings

Sound 54

SSL/Telnet 41

Telnet 41

Terminal Type 44

Settings method 147

Settings Object 170

SettingsDialog method 101 setup.ini 277

Shell function 88

Shortcut 20

Show method 102, 167

ShowErrs property 150

Silent installation 277

SingleInstance property 97

Slave port 55, 73

Slave printer 55, 73

SlavePrintAdapterScript property 150, 199

SlavePrinterName property 144, 150, 199

SlavePrintMode property 151, 200

Sleep statement 89

Software License Agreement 277

Software Requirements 17

Sound property 151, 200

Sounds 54

Speaker 54

Splash screen 60

SSH 21, 37, 76, 133, 134, 186

SSH Cipher 152, 201

SSHAuth property 151, 200

SSHCipher property 151, 201

SSHKey property 152, 201

SSHUseOnlyPreferredCipher property 152, 201

SSHVersion property 152, 201

SSL 41, 124, 133, 180, 186

SSL/Telnet 41

Standalone installation 18

Start capturing 73

Status Bar 25, 62, 63

Status bar icon 66

Status Lines 44

StatusLineVisible property 98

Stop Bits 42, 43

StopBits property 152, 201

Strip8th property 153, 202

Sub-Menu 64

System Colors 48

System Requirements 17

- T -

TCL Rules 59

TCP/IP 36, 37, 41

TcpIdn property 153, 202

TcpNoDelay Property 153, 202

Technical support 77

Tektronix 44

Tektronix Graphics 47

Telnet 21, 36, 41

Telnet settings 36, 41

TelnetBinary property 153, 202

TelnetBypass property 153, 203

TelnetKeepaliveIsNOP property 154, 203

Terminal Emulation 44

Terminal Server 18

Terminal Services 18

Terminal Type 23, 36, 37, 44

Terminal Type Settings 44

Terminate connection 140

Terminate method 102, 167

TermType property 154, 203

Text file encoding 58

The ScreenBlock object 107

Themes 48

Timeout 36, 37, 41

Title Bar 25

TitleFormat property 98

TLS 41

Tool Properties 64

ToolBar 25, 27, 62, 63

Toolbar icon 66

ToolbarVisible property 98

ToolID property 106

Tools 62, 64

Tools Menu 27

ToolTipText property 106

Top property 98, 155

TrackKeyboardState property 98

Trademark 312

Transfer mode 58

Transparency 51

Type library 90

Index

323

- U -

U2 71, 282, 305

Ultimate 283

Unattended installation 277

Underline 50

Unicode 16, 53, 55, 58, 69, 70, 73, 109, 182

UnicodeDelimiters property 109

UniData 283

UniVerse 283

UniVision 283

UnloadImage method 168

UnlockItem method 114

Updating the MultiValue File Transfer Programs 285

Updating the Pick File Transfer Programs 285

Upload 69

Upload method 113, 168

UserName property 109

Using the FT Utility 286, 287

Using the FTD Utility 289, 290

Using the FTPICK Utility 294

Using the MultiValue Server 305

Using the Pick Server 305

UTF-8 16, 53, 55, 58, 69, 70, 73, 182

Windows Terminal Server 18

WindowState property 99, 155

Wizard 27, 71, 282, 286, 287, 289, 290

Word function 89

WordCount function 89

Workspace 25

WriteItem method 114

WriteProperties method 175

WriteText method 168

Wyse 44

Wyse 50 221

Wyse 60 221

- X -

XferBytes property 156

XferFiles property 156

XferStatus property 156

XModem 58

XmodemTimeout property 157, 204

Xon/Xoff 42, 43

- Y -

YModem 58

YmodemTimeout property 157, 204

- V -

VARFILES 277

VBA 16, 79

ViaDuct 283

Video Pages 47

View Menu 27

Viewpoint 44, 240

Viewpoint Enhanced 221

Visible property 98, 105, 107, 155

Visual attributes 48, 50

Visual Basic for Applications 79

Visual Styles 48, 50

- Z -

ZModem 58

ZmodemAuto property 157, 204

ZmodemTimeout property 157, 204

Zumasys company information 77

- W -

WaitFor method 168 wallpaper 120, 121, 177, 178, 211

Welcome screen 20

Width property 99, 155

Window Menu 27

Reklāma